PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

DP Series
DP Series Type R
INSTRUCTION MANUALNF Corporation

DA00027113-007

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

DP Series
DP Series Type R
INSTRUCTION MANUAL Preface 
Thank you for purchasing our Programmable AC Power Source DP Series or DP Series Type R.
For safe and correct use of the electrical product, please first read "Safety Precautions" on the next
page.
Alert symbols in this manualThis manual uses the following alert symbols. The instructions by these alert symbols shall becarefully obeyed to ensure equipment operator's safety and prevent damage to equipment.

WARNING
Equipment handling could result in death or serious injury. This symbol contains information
to avoid such risk.

CAUTION
Equipment handling could result in minor or moderate injury, or property damage. Thissymbol contains information to avoid such risk.

This manual consists of the following chapters.
If it is the first time for you to use this product, start with "1. Outline."
1.

Outline: Explains the overview, configuration, and features of this product.

2.

Preparation before Use: Explains the preparations carried out before installation or operation.

3.

Basic operation: Explains the component names and basic operations.

4.

Advanced Operation: Explains the operations more extensively.

5.

Description of Screen and Menu: Explains the screen configuration and menu composition.

6.

Remote Control: Explains the remote control via communication interface.

7.

Options: Explains the available options.

8.

Troubleshooting: Explains the remedies when an error message is displayed, or when a failure
is suspected.

9.

Maintenance: Explains the methods of storage, repackaging, transportation, and maintenance.

10. Specifications: Provides the list of specifications of functions and performance.
Scope of contents
In this manual models with output power of 12.0 kVA or below in DP series and models with output
power of 9.0 kVA or below in DP series Type R are covered.
The description of this manual applies to products with firmware version 3.00 or above which areordered after July 1st, 2019.
For details on checking the firmware version, see Chapter 9.4.

DP Series/DP Series Type Ri Safety Precautions 
For safe use, ensure to obey the following warnings and considerations.
We are not responsible for damage resulting from failure to obey these warnings and considerations.
This product is an insulation Class I device (with a protective conductor terminal) complying with
the JIS and IEC standards.
Ensure you obey the instructions in this instruction manual.
This instruction manual contains instructions for safe operation and use of this product.
Before using this product, please read this manual first.
All the warning items contained in this instruction manual are intended for preventing risks that may
lead to serious accidents. Ensure to obey them.
Ensure to ground.
Ensure to connect the protective conductor terminal of the power input terminal of this product to an
earth ground so that ground resistance is 100 Ω or less. If the product is not certainly grounded, anelectric shock might occur.
To prevent electric shock, ensure that the protective grounding conductor is connected before youconnect a cable to the power input terminals L, L1, L2, L3, and N.
For grounding, use the supplied power cable or an equivalent cable whose diameter is same or
greater.
Check the power supply voltage.
This product operates on the power supply voltage specified in "2.4 Grounding and Power
Connections". Before connecting this product to a power supply, make sure that the voltage ofdistribution board conforms to the power supply voltage rating of the product. The input voltage isnoted as line voltage in three-phase four-wire input, unless otherwise noted.
If you notice anything strange
If this product produces smoke, unusual odor, or strange sound, immediately cut the power to the
product and stop using it.
Should you encounter any anomaly like above, immediately contact us or our agent. Never use it
until the repair is completed.
Do not operate in an explosive atmosphere.
An explosion or other such hazard may result.
Do not remove the cover.
This product has high-voltage portions inside. Never remove the cover.
When inspection into the inside of the product is needed, never allow anybody to touch the innards
except our certified service engineers.

ii

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCEDo not modify the product.
Never modify the product. Modification to the product may pose a new risk. We may refuse therepair of a modified product at fault.
Prevention of electric shock by output voltage
The maximum output of this product is ± 454 V. Be careful to avoid electric shock. Directly
touching the output or changing the cable connection while the output is on may cause electric
shock.
This product weights over 18 kg.
Do not carry it alone, or you may suffer physical injury.
Do not expose this product to water.
When this product is used in wet condition, it may cause an electric shock and a fire. If this productis exposed to water, cut the power at the distribution board immediately, and contact NF Corporationor one of our representatives.
If lightning occurs, power off this product and cut the power at the distribution board.
A lightning may cause an electric shock, a fire and a failure.
Safety symbols
The following shows the general definitions of the safety symbols used on the product main unit andin the instruction manual.
Refer to the instruction manualThis notifies the user of potential hazards and indicates that he/she must refer to the
instruction manual.
Electric shock hazard
This indicates that an electric shock may occur under specific conditions.
Protection conductor terminal
This indicates that the terminal needs to be grounded in order to prevent electric shock
accidents.
Before operating the equipment, ensure to connect this terminal to an earth ground sothat ground resistance is 100 Ω or less.

WARNING

Warning
Equipment handling could result in death or serious injury. This symbol
contains information to avoid such risk.

CAUTION

CautionEquipment handling could result in minor or moderate injury, or property
damage. This symbol contains information to avoid such risk.

DP Series/DP Series Type Riii

Other symbol
ChassisThis indicates that the terminal (or external conductor for a connector) is connected tothe chassis.
Request about disposal
For environmental preservation, pay attention to the followings when you dispose of this product.
a) Do not discard this product in domestic household waste. This product shall be disposed ofthrough an appropriate industrial waste disposer.
b) This product does not include a battery.
c) This product does not contain mercury.

iv

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCETable of Contents
Page

Preface ...................................................................................................................................... i
Safety Precautions .................................................................................................................... ii
List of Figures .......................................................................................................................... xi
List of Tables .......................................................................................................................... xiii
1. Outline ................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1

Overview..................................................................................................................... 2

1.2

Series Line-up and Polyphase System Configuration ................................................. 2

1.3

Features ..................................................................................................................... 4

2. Preparation before Use........................................................................................................ 9
2.1

Check before Use ..................................................................................................... 10

2.2

About Installation Environment ................................................................................. 11

2.3

Cautions during Moving and Transportation .............................................................. 16

2.4

Grounding and Power Connections .......................................................................... 17

2.5

Output and System Cable Connection ...................................................................... 22

2.5.1

Single-phase Model ........................................................................................... 23

2.5.2

Polyphase Model ............................................................................................... 26

2.5.3

Multi-phase Model ............................................................................................. 28

2.5.4

Polyphase System ............................................................................................. 29

2.6

How to Tilt Control Panel .......................................................................................... 33

2.7

Simple Operation Check ........................................................................................... 34

2.8

Calibration ................................................................................................................ 37

3. Basic Operation ................................................................................................................. 39
3.1

Component Name ..................................................................................................... 40

3.1.1

Front .................................................................................................................. 40

3.1.2

Rear................................................................................................................... 42

3.1.3

Control Panel ..................................................................................................... 44

3.2

Power On/Off ............................................................................................................ 45

3.2.1

Before Turning on the Power ............................................................................. 45

3.2.2

Set the Output Phase Configuration (Multi-phase model Only) .......................... 46

3.2.3

Power On........................................................................................................... 46

3.2.4

Screen Display and Operations at Starting Up ................................................... 47

3.2.5

The Settings Loaded after Startup ..................................................................... 47

3.2.6

Checking the Rated Power ................................................................................ 48

3.2.7

Power Off .......................................................................................................... 48

3.3

Basic Key Operations ............................................................................................... 49

3.3.1

Changing the Output Function (Continuous/Sequence/Simulation) ................... 49

3.3.2

Item Selection .................................................................................................... 49

DP Series/DP Series Type Rv

3.3.3Using Soft-keys ................................................................................................. 50

3.3.4

Closing Windows ............................................................................................... 51

3.3.5

Entering Values (Numerical Entry Box) .............................................................. 51

3.3.6

Entering Strings (Character String Entry Box).................................................... 53

3.3.7

Using Shortcut Operations (SHIFT Key) ............................................................ 54

3.4

Using the Continuous Function ................................................................................. 55

3.4.1

Setting the AC/DC Mode and the Signal Source ................................................ 55

3.4.2

Setting the Output Range .................................................................................. 58

3.4.3

Setting Waveforms ............................................................................................ 59

3.4.4

Setting the Output Voltage (Single-phase Output) ............................................. 61

3.4.5

Setting the Output Voltage (Polyphase Output) ................................................. 62

3.4.6

Setting the Output Frequency ............................................................................ 64

3.4.7

Setting the Output On/Off Phase ....................................................................... 64

3.4.8

Turning the Output On or Off ............................................................................. 65

3.4.9

Using the Measurement Function ...................................................................... 66

3.4.10Switching the Display Format (RMS/AVG/Peak) of the Measured Value ............ 68

3.4.11

Enlarge Display Letters for the Measured Value ................................................ 69

3.4.12

Clearing the Output Current Peak-hold Value .................................................... 72

3.4.13

Switching the Target Phase of which the Measured Values are Displayed(Polyphase Output) ............................................................................................ 74

4. Advanced Operation .......................................................................................................... 77
4.1

4.1.1

Use Peak Current Limiter .................................................................................. 78

4.1.2

Using RMS Current Limiter ................................................................................ 80

4.1.3

Using Voltage Setting Range Limit..................................................................... 82

4.1.4

Using Frequency Setting Range Limit ................................................................ 83

4.1.5

About Wattage Limiter ....................................................................................... 85

4.2

Using Sequence Function ......................................................................................... 86

4.2.1

Basics ................................................................................................................ 86

4.2.2

Parameters of Sequence Function ..................................................................... 89

4.2.3

Example of Output Using Sequence Function.................................................... 92

4.2.4

Process Flow in a Step ...................................................................................... 92

4.2.5

Edit a Sequence ................................................................................................ 94

4.2.6

Load a Sequence............................................................................................... 97

4.2.7

Execute a Sequence ........................................................................................ 101

4.2.8

Save a Sequence ............................................................................................ 105

4.2.9

Clear/Rename Sequence ................................................................................. 109

4.2.10Set so as the Sequence Function is Selected at Power-on .............................. 113

4.2.11

Sequence Control by CONTROL I/O ............................................................... 114

4.2.12

Screen Overview ............................................................................................. 114

4.2.13

Change Output Parameter during Output ON .................................................. 116

4.3
vi

Using Limiter, Setting Limiter .................................................................................... 78

Using Power Fluctuation Testing (Simulation) Function .......................................... 118
PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.3.1

Basics .............................................................................................................. 118

4.3.2

Simulation Function Parameters ...................................................................... 120

4.3.3

Output Examples Using Simulation Function ................................................... 122

4.3.4

Process Flow in a Step .................................................................................... 124

4.3.5

Editing Simulation ............................................................................................ 124

4.3.6

Loading a Simulation ....................................................................................... 127

4.3.7

Executing Simulation ....................................................................................... 130

4.3.8

Saving Simulation ............................................................................................ 132

4.3.9

Clear/Rename Simulation ................................................................................ 136

4.3.10Set so as the Simulation Function is Selected at Power-on ............................. 140

4.3.11

Simulation Control by CONTROL I/O ............................................................... 141

4.3.12

Screen Overview ............................................................................................. 141

4.4

Measuring Harmonic Current .................................................................................. 143

4.4.1

Harmonic current ............................................................................................. 143

4.4.2

Basics .............................................................................................................. 144

4.4.3

Measured Value Display Method ..................................................................... 144

4.5

Measuring Inrush Current ....................................................................................... 145

4.5.1

Inrush Current .................................................................................................. 145

4.5.2

Basics .............................................................................................................. 146

4.5.3

Measurement Method ...................................................................................... 146

4.5.4

Measurement Tips ........................................................................................... 147

4.6

Using Clipped Sine Wave ....................................................................................... 147

4.7

Outputting Arbitrary Waveform ................................................................................ 150

4.7.1

Basics .............................................................................................................. 150

4.7.2

Arbitrary Waveform Creation Procedure .......................................................... 151

4.7.3

Arbitrary Waveform Creation Example ............................................................. 151

4.7.4

Transferring Arbitrary Waveform ...................................................................... 151

4.7.5

Outputting Arbitrary Waveform ........................................................................ 154

4.8

Using Memory Function .......................................................................................... 155

4.8.1

Basic Setting Memory ...................................................................................... 156

4.8.2

Arbitrary Waveform Memory ............................................................................ 163

4.8.3

Sequence Memory ........................................................................................... 167

4.8.4

Simulation Memory .......................................................................................... 168

4.9

Using USB Memory Function .................................................................................. 169

4.10

Using Monitor Function ........................................................................................... 170

4.11

Using Remote Sensing Function ............................................................................. 173

4.12

Using AGC Function ............................................................................................... 176

4.13

Using Autocal Function ........................................................................................... 179

4.14

Adjusting DC Offset ................................................................................................ 183

4.15

Using for Unbalanced Polyphase Output ................................................................ 185

4.16

Using as DC Power Supply ..................................................................................... 187

4.17

Setting Voltage using External DC Input Signal ...................................................... 189

DP Series/DP Series Type Rvii

4.17.1

Using External Signal in AC-VCA Mode........................................................... 189

4.17.2Using External Signal in DC-VCA Mode .......................................................... 191

4.18

Control Using External Control Function ................................................................. 192

4.18.1

Using CONTROL I/O ....................................................................................... 193

4.18.2Control of DIP .................................................................................................. 198

4.19

Synchronizing the Output Frequency with the Power Line or the External Signal ... 200

4.20

Amplifying the External Signal Input ....................................................................... 202

4.21

Turning the Output On or Off Rapidly ...................................................................... 203

4.22

Enabling Automatic Output-On at Power-On ........................................................... 205

4.23

Using the Emission CO2 Calculator ........................................................................ 206

4.24

Power Unit Energization Setting (Using Under the Restricted Rated Power) .......... 208

4.25

Key Lock ................................................................................................................. 210

4.26

Beep ....................................................................................................................... 210

4.27

Changing the Background Color and the Contrast of the Screen ............................ 211

4.28

Restoring to the Factory Default Setting (Reset) ..................................................... 212

5. Description of Screen and Menu ...................................................................................... 217
5.1

Screen Configuration .............................................................................................. 218

5.1.1

Status Icon ...................................................................................................... 219

5.1.2

Measured Value Display Items ........................................................................ 220

5.1.3

Output Setting Display Items ........................................................................... 221

5.1.4

Warning and Error Display ............................................................................... 221

5.2

Menu Composition .................................................................................................. 222

5.2.1

Menus of the Continuous Function .................................................................. 222

5.2.2

Menus of the Sequence Function .................................................................... 223

5.2.3

Menus of the Simulation Function .................................................................... 224

5.2.4

Menus of the Memory Function ....................................................................... 224

5.2.5

System Menus ................................................................................................. 225

6. Remote Control ............................................................................................................... 227
6.1

Communication Interface ........................................................................................ 228

6.1.1

USB ................................................................................................................. 228

6.1.2

RS232 ............................................................................................................. 231

6.1.3

GPIB ................................................................................................................ 233

6.1.4

LAN ................................................................................................................. 235

6.2

Remote/Local State Switching ................................................................................ 237

6.2.1

Remote State ................................................................................................... 237

6.2.2

Local State ...................................................................................................... 237

7. Options ............................................................................................................................ 239
7.1

Remote Controller................................................................................................... 240

7.2

System Cable (for Polyphase System) .................................................................... 240

7.3

Rack-Mount Adapter ............................................................................................... 241

7.4

Replacement Air Filter ............................................................................................ 242

7.5

Power Cable ........................................................................................................... 243

viii

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

7.6

Cable Holder ........................................................................................................... 244

8. Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................... 247
8.1

Error Messages and Error Handling ........................................................................ 248

8.1.1

Error Message Screen ..................................................................................... 248

8.1.2

If An Error Message is Displayed ..................................................................... 248

8.1.3

If An Error Occurs Repeatedly ......................................................................... 249

8.1.4

Protection Operation Types ............................................................................. 250

8.1.5

Error Message List .......................................................................................... 251

8.2

When a Failure is Suspected .................................................................................. 255

9. Maintenance .................................................................................................................... 261
9.1

Preface ................................................................................................................... 262

9.2

Daily Maintenance .................................................................................................. 262

9.3

Storage, Repackaging, Transportation .................................................................... 265

9.4

Checking Firmware Version .................................................................................... 265

10. Specifications .................................................................................................................. 267
10.1

Output Function ...................................................................................................... 269

10.2

Output Range ......................................................................................................... 269

10.3

AC/DC Mode........................................................................................................... 269

10.4

Signal Source ......................................................................................................... 270

10.5

AC Output ............................................................................................................... 271

10.6

DC Output ............................................................................................................... 275

10.7

Output Voltage Stability ........................................................................................... 276

10.8

Distortion of Output Voltage Waveform ................................................................... 276

10.9Power Input ............................................................................................................ 277

10.10 Withstand Voltage and Insulation Resistance ......................................................... 277
10.11 Measurement Function ........................................................................................... 278
10.12 Power Unit Energization Setting ............................................................................. 283
10.13 Current Limiter ........................................................................................................ 284
10.14 Setting Range Limit Function .................................................................................. 286
10.15 Remote Sensing ..................................................................................................... 287
10.16 AGC ........................................................................................................................ 287
10.17 Autocal (Output Voltage Compensation) ................................................................. 288
10.18 Sequence ............................................................................................................... 289
10.19 Simulation ............................................................................................................... 290
10.20 Clipped Sine Wave ................................................................................................. 291
10.21 Arbitrary Wave ........................................................................................................ 291
10.22 External Signal Input............................................................................................... 292
10.22.1 External Synchronous Signal Input (Signal Source SYNC only) ...................... 292
10.22.2 Voltage Setting Signal Input (Signal Source VCA only) ................................... 292
10.22.3 External Signal Input (only EXT and ADD)....................................................... 293
10.23 General Function .................................................................................................... 293
10.24 Memory Function .................................................................................................... 294
DP Series/DP Series Type Rix

10.25 Self-diagnosis/Protection Function.......................................................................... 295
10.26 External Control Function ....................................................................................... 295
10.26.1 CONTROL I/O ................................................................................................. 296
10.26.2 Control of Peripherals by Device Control ......................................................... 297
10.27 External Interface ................................................................................................... 297
10.28 USB Memory Interface............................................................................................ 298
10.29 Waveform Monitor Output ....................................................................................... 298
10.30 Safety, EMC, and RoHS ......................................................................................... 299
10.31 Operation Environment ........................................................................................... 299
10.32 Externals, Weight, and Terminal Block .................................................................... 300
10.33 Option ..................................................................................................................... 302
10.34 Outline Dimensional Drawing .................................................................................. 305
Index ..................................................................................................................................... 310

x

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

Figures and Tables
List of Figures
Page

Figure 1-1 Model Naming System of DP series ........................................................................ 3
Figure 1-2 Model Naming System of DP series Type R ............................................................ 3
Figure 2-1 How to Use the Adjuster Foot ................................................................................ 13
Figure 2-2 Assembly Diagram of Stabilizer ............................................................................. 14
Figure 2-3 Power Input Terminal ............................................................................................. 21
Figure 2-4 Terminal Panel Arrangement of Multi-phase Model (Rear) .................................... 28
Figure 3-1 Component Name (Front) ...................................................................................... 40
Figure 3-2 Component Name (Rear) ....................................................................................... 42
Figure 3-3 Component Name (Control Panel) ......................................................................... 44
Figure 3-4 The Self Check Screen to be Displayed when Starting the Unit in Other System orin Other Output Phase configuration than before ................................................ 47
Figure 3-5 The Rated Power Icon ........................................................................................... 48
Figure 3-6 The Root Menu ...................................................................................................... 49
Figure 3-7 The Example of a Selection Box ............................................................................ 50
Figure 3-8 The Example of a Data List Box ............................................................................ 50
Figure 3-9 Soft-key Function ................................................................................................... 50
Figure 3-10 The Example of the Window with the [Close] Button ............................................ 51
Figure 3-11 The Example of the Window with the [OK]/[Cancel] Button .................................. 51
Figure 3-12 The Numerical Entry Box ..................................................................................... 52
Figure 3-13 Character String Entry Box .................................................................................. 53
Figure 3-14 The Normal View (left) and the Simple View Mode (right) .................................... 69
Figure 4-1 Step-control Parameters and intra-Step Parameters ............................................. 87
Figure 4-2 Step Behavior ........................................................................................................ 88
Figure 4-3 Stop Phase ............................................................................................................ 91
Figure 4-4 Example of Sequence ............................................................................................ 92
Figure 4-5 Process Flow in Sequence Step ............................................................................ 93
Figure 4-6 Branch Operation/Stop Operation .......................................................................... 93
Figure 4-7 Sequence Edit View ............................................................................................. 115
Figure 4-8 Sequence Control View (Output Off State) .......................................................... 115
Figure 4-9 Sequence Control View (Output On State/Sequence in Execution) ..................... 115
Figure 4-10 Sequence Control View (Output On State/Sequence Stopped) ......................... 116
Figure 4-11 Simulation Function Steps ................................................................................. 120
Figure 4-12 Voltage Dip Simulation Example ........................................................................ 122
Figure 4-13 Voltage Change Simulation Example ................................................................. 123
Figure 4-14 Process Flow through Simulation Steps ............................................................. 124
Figure 4-15 Stop Operation .................................................................................................. 124

DP Series/DP Series Type R

xiFigure 4-16 Simulation Edit View .......................................................................................... 142
Figure 4-17 Simulation Control View (Output Off State, Simulation Stopped) ....................... 142
Figure 4-18 Simulation Control View (Output On State, Simulation Running) ....................... 142
Figure 4-19 Simulation Control View (Output On State, Simulation Stopped) ....................... 143
Figure 4-20 Current Waveform Containing Many Harmonic Components ............................. 143
Figure 4-21 Inrush Current Example ..................................................................................... 145
Figure 4-22 Clipped Sine Wave ............................................................................................ 147
Figure 4-23 USB Memory Folder Structure ........................................................................... 169
Figure 4-24 Sensing Input Terminals in Multi-phase Model................................................... 174
Figure 4-25 The Control Cable Connection of DP030S and DP4172(DIP) ............................ 200
Figure 4-26 The Message Window to be Shown Before the Automatic Output-On After thePower-On ......................................................................................................... 205
Figure 5-1 Component Name (Display Areas on the Screen)................................................ 218
Figure 5-2 Menu Composition ............................................................................................... 222
Figure 7-1 Remote Controller External View ......................................................................... 240
Figure 7-2 Front Grills ........................................................................................................... 242
Figure 7-3 Assembly Diagram of Cable Holder ..................................................................... 244
Figure 8-1 Error Message Screen Example .......................................................................... 248
Figure 10-1 Reverse Power Flow Duty or Sink Time Duty ..................................................... 272
Figure 10-2 Range of Ambient Temperature/Humidity .......................................................... 299
Figure 10-3 DP015S, DP030S, DP030D, DP015RS (Type 1 cabinet) ................................... 305
Figure 10-4 DP045S, DP045T, DP045M, DP060S, DP060D,

DP030RS, DP030RD,

DP045RS, DP045RT (Type 2 cabinet) ............................................................. 306
Figure 10-5 DP075S, DP090S, DP090D, DP090T,

DP060RS, DP060RD (Type 3 cabinet) 307

Figure 10-6 DP090M, DP105S, DP120S, DP120D,

DP075RS, DP090RS, DP090RD,

DP090RT(Type 4 cabinet) ............................................................................ 308

Figure 10-7 Stabilizer Installation Drawing (Type 3, Type 4 cabinet only) .............................. 309

xii

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCEList of Tables
Page

Table 1-1 Series Line-up (Single-phase Model, Polyphase Model) ........................................... 3
Table 1-2 Series Line-up (Multi-phase Model) .......................................................................... 3
Table 1-3 Combination of DP series ......................................................................................... 4
Table 1-4 Combination of DP series Type R ............................................................................. 4
Table 1-5 Combination of DP series and DP series Type R....................................................... 4
Table 2-1 List of Content......................................................................................................... 10
Table 2-2 Heat Value of DP series .......................................................................................... 11
Table 2-3 Heat Value of DP series Type R ............................................................................. 12
Table 2-4 Mass of DP series ................................................................................................... 13
Table 2-5 Mass of DP series Type R ....................................................................................... 13
Table 2-6 Power Input ............................................................................................................. 18
Table 2-7 Power Input Terminal .............................................................................................. 18
Table 2-8 Maximum Power/Current Consumption ................................................................... 18
Table 2-9 Output Terminals .................................................................................................... 22
Table 2-10 Outlet List ............................................................................................................. 25
Table 3-1 Component Name (Front) ....................................................................................... 41
Table 3-2 Component Name (Rear) ........................................................................................ 43
Table 3-3 Component Name (Control Panel) .......................................................................... 44
Table 3-4 How the Rated Power Icon is Displayed Depending on the Power Unit Energization
Setting ................................................................................................................ 48
Table 3-5 Character String Entry List ...................................................................................... 53
Table 3-6 Shortcut Operations ................................................................................................ 54
Table 3-7 Description of the AC/DC Mode .............................................................................. 55
Table 3-8 The Description of the Signal Source ...................................................................... 55
Table 3-9 List of the Selectable Combinations of the AC/DC Mode and the Signal Source ..... 56
Table 3-10 The Setting Range per Output Range ................................................................... 58
Table 3-11 Main Measurement Functions ............................................................................... 66
Table 3-12 The Measuring Mode for the Measured Values of the Output Voltage and Output
Current ............................................................................................................... 68
Table 4-1 Wattage Limiter Value per Phase (Reference value, Unit: W) ................................. 85
Table 4-2 Parameters of Sequence Function .......................................................................... 89
Table 4-3 Example of Editing Sequence ................................................................................. 92
Table 4-4 Simulation Function Parameters ........................................................................... 120
Table 4-5 Simulation Function Steps and Settable Step Parameters .................................... 121
Table 4-6 Voltage Dip Simulation Edit Example .................................................................... 122
Table 4-7 Voltage Change Simulation Edit Example ............................................................. 123
Table 4-8 Different Output Voltage Settings Depending on Clip Depth Setting Method ........ 148
Table 4-9 Content Saved in Sequence Memory .................................................................... 167
Table 4-10 Content Saved in Simulation Memory ................................................................. 168
Table 4-11 Setting Range of DC Offset Adjustment Value .................................................... 183
DP Series/DP Series Type R

xiii

Table 4-12 CONTROL I/O Pin Assignment ........................................................................... 194
Table 4-13 Step Sync Code................................................................................................... 194
Table 4-14 Memory Specification .......................................................................................... 194
Table 4-15 The Output Terminal Impedance in the Output Off State whenthe Activation of

the Output Relay is Disabled ............................................................................ 203
Table 4-16 Setting Items to be Reset .................................................................................... 212
Table 5-1 Component Name (Display Areas on the Screen) ................................................. 218
Table 5-2 Status Icons .......................................................................................................... 219
Table 5-3 Measured Value Display Items.............................................................................. 220
Table 5-4 Output Setting Display Items ................................................................................. 221
Table 5-5 Menus of the Continuous Function ........................................................................ 222
Table 5-6 Menus of the Sequence Function .......................................................................... 223
Table 5-7 Menus of the Simulation Function ......................................................................... 224
Table 5-8 Menus of the Memory Function ............................................................................. 224
Table 5-9 System Menus ...................................................................................................... 225
Table 7-1 Rack-Mount Adapter Model Names ...................................................................... 241
Table 7-2 Replacement Air Filter Model Names .................................................................... 242
Table 7-3 Power Cable Model Names................................................................................... 243
Table 7-4 Cable Holder Model Names .................................................................................. 244
Table 7-5 Cable Holder Correspondence List ........................................................................ 245
Table 8-1 Description of the Error Message Screen.............................................................. 248
Table 8-2 Error Message List ................................................................................................ 251
Table 8-3 Actions When a Failure is Suspected .................................................................... 255

xiv

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

1. Outline

DP Series/DP Series Type R

1.1

Overview ·························································· 2

1.2

Series Line-up and Polyphase System Configuration · 2

1.3

Features ··························································· 4

11. Outline

1.1

Overview

Programmable AC power source DP series offers a compact, lightweight, and highly-efficient powersystem, ranging from single-phase 1.5 kVA to three-phase 36 kVA at a maximum. It also provides
various interfaces such as the external control input/output, communication interface, and remotecontroller (some of them are optional) to address a wide variety of usage. You can configure several
products of the configurable single-phase model to participate in a single-phase three-wire system or
three-phase system by using a System Cable (optional).
The AC output of DP series ranges from 0 to 320 V for voltage (phase voltage) and 1 to 550 Hz for
frequency, and the DC voltage output ranges from −454 V to +454 V. The maximum output current(phase current) is 120 Arms continuous (single-phase 12 kVA, 100 V range), and if you use acapacitor input type rectified load, you can output a peak value of 480 Apk at a maximum(single-phase 12 kVA, 100 V range, crest factor of 4).
Also, programmable AC power source DP series Type R is added a reverse power flow capability to
DP series, ranging from single-phase 1.5 kVA to three-phase 27 kVA at a maximum which is a
polyphase system.
The AC output of DP series Type R ranges from 0 to 320 V for voltage (phase voltage) and 1 to550 Hz for frequency, and the DC voltage output ranges from −454 V to +454 V. The maximum
output current (phase current) is 90 Arms continuous (single-phase 9 kVA, 100 V range), and if you
use a capacitor input type rectified load, you can output a peak value of 360 Apk at a maximum(single-phase 9 kVA, 100 V range, crest factor of 4).
* It is to be noted that regeneration from the load is described as “reverse power flow” in thismanual. Also, it is to be noted that DC regeneration is described as “sink current” and DC power
running is described as “source current”.

1.2

Series Line-up and Polyphase System Configuration

In DP series and DP series Type R, multiple models (single-phase model, polyphase model) areavailable with various combinations of output capacity and output phase configuration. The lineupsof single-phase model and polyphase model are listed in Table 1-1.
DP series also offers the Multi-phase model which can switch the output phase configuration(single-phase two-wire, single-phase three-wire, or three-phase four-wire) on a cabinet. When you
set the "phase configuration setting switch" of the Multi-phase model and then turn on the power,
the model operates as single-phase model or polyphase model as shown in Table 1-2. The operation
specification, performance specification, and manipulation method of the Multi-phase model follow
those of the single-phase model and polyphase model of DP series shown in Table 1-2.
The model naming system of DP series is shown in Figure 1-1, and that of DP series Type R isshown in Figure 1-2.
For the single-phase model, you can connect two or three products of the configurable model using
an optional System Cable to allow single-phase three-wire output or three-phase four-wire output,
respectively (polyphase system). The polyphase system configurations are listed in Table 1-3 toTable 1-5.
2

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE1.2 Series Line-up and Polyphase System Configuration

Table 1-1 Series Line-up (Single-phase Model, Polyphase Model)
DP series and DP series Type R

Rated
Outputper phase2

Polyphase model

Single-phase (1P2W) model

DP015S
1.5 kVA DP015RS
1.5 kVA
DP030S
3 kVA DP030RS
3 kVA

1

Number of power units per phase

Single-phase model

1.5 kVA
3 kVA
DP045S
DP045RS4.5 kVA
DP060S
DP060RS
6 kVA

3

4.5 kVA

－

4

6 kVA

－

5

7.5 kVA

－

－

6

9 kVA

－

－

7

10.5 kVA－－

8

12 kVA

－－

1.5 kVA
3 kVA

1.5 kVA

Single-phase three-wire (1P3W) model
DP030D
DP030RD
3 kVA

3 kVA

－

DP060D
DP060RD
6 kVA

6 kVA

6 kVA

3 kVA

3 kVA

Three-phase (3P4W) model
DP045T
DP045RT
4.5 kVA

4.5 kVA－－－

DP090T
DP090RT
9 kVA

－

9 kVA

－

－

－

－

－

3 kVA

4.5 kVA

4.5 kVA－－

DP090D
DP090RD
9 kVA

6 kVA

6 kVA

－

－

－

DP120D
12 kVA

－－－－

7.5 kVA

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

9 kVA

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

DP105S10.5 kVA

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

DP120S
12 kVA

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

DP075S
DP075RS7.5 kVA
DP090S
DP090RS
9 kVA

The bold fonts indicate the products lined up for the series. The upper text indicates the model name, and the lower text indicates the rated output.
The thin fonts indicate the output which can be achieved by changing the power unit energization setting in the product (bold) in the same column.

Table 1-2 Series Line-up (Multi-phase Model)
DP series
Setting of phase configuration setting switch

DP045M

DP090M

1φ3W: Single-phase three-wire (1P3W) output

Operates as DP045S.
Operates as DP090S.
Does not support the polyphase system connection
which uses the optional System Cable.
Operates as DP030D.
Operates as DP060D.

3φ4W: Three-phase four-wire (3P4W) output

Operates as DP045T.

1φ2W: Single-phase two-wire (1P2W) output

Operates as DP090T.

Note: In the DP series Type R, multi-phase models do not exist.

D

P

0

3

0

S
DP Series
Rated output power
015: 1.5 kVA
045: 4.5 kVA
030: 3 kVA
060: 6 kVA

075: 7.5 kVA
090: 9 kVA

105: 10.5 kVA
120: 12 kVA

Output phase configuration
S: Single-phase (1P2W) D: Single-phase three-wire (1P3W) T: Three-phase (3P4W) M: Multi-phase
Outlet type (Single-phase model only)(None): NEMA 5-15 (Japan/North America type) E: CEE 7 (Europe type)Figure 1-1 Model Naming System of DP series

D

P

0

3

0

R

S
DP Series Type R
Rated output power
015: 1.5 kVA
045: 4.5 kVA
030: 3 kVA
060: 6 kVA

075: 7.5 kVA
090: 9 kVA

Output phase configuration
S: Single-phase (1P2W) D: Single-phase three-wire (1P3W) T: Three-phase (3P4W)
Outlet type (Single-phase model only)(None): NEMA 5-15 (Japan/North America type) E: CEE 7 (Europe type)Figure 1-2 Model Naming System of DP series Type R

DP Series/DP Series Type R

3

1. Outline

Table 1-3 Combination of DP series
DP015S

DP030S

1P3W: 3.0 kVA
3P4W: 4.5 kVA

DP015S
DP030S

DP060S

DP075S

DP090S

DP105S

DP120S

×

×

×

×

×

×

1P3W: 6.0 kVA
3P4W: 9.0 kVA

×

×

×

×

×

×

1P3W: 9.0 kVA
3P4W: 13.5 kVA

DP045S××

DP060S×××

DP075S

DP045S

×

×

×

×

×

×

1P3W: 12.0 kVA
3P4W: 18.0 kVA

×

×

×

×

×

1P3W: 15.0 kVA
3P4W: 22.5 kVA

××

1P3W: 18.0 kVA
3P4W: 27.0 kVA

××

1P3W: 21.0 kVA
3P4W: 31.5 kVA

DP090S××××

DP105S

×

×

×

×

×

×

DP120S

×

×

×

×

×

×

1P3W: 24.0 kVA
3P4W: 36.0 kVA

Table 1-4 Combination of DP series Type R
DP015RS

DP030RS

1P3W: 3.0 kVA
3P4W: 4.5 kVA

DP015RS
DP030RS

DP045RS

DP060RS

DP075RS

DP090RS

×

×

×

×

1P3W: 6.0 kVA
3P4W: 9.0 kVA

×

×

×

×

1P3W: 9.0 kVA
3P4W: 13.5 kVA

DP045RS××

DP060RS

×

×

×

×

1P3W: 12.0 kVA
3P4W: 18.0 kVA

××

1P3W: 15.0 kVA
3P4W: 22.5 kVA

DP075RS

×

×

×

×

DP090RS

×

×

×

×

1P3W: 18.0 kVA
3P4W: 27.0 kVA

Table 1-5 Combination of DP series and DP series Type R
DP015S
DP015RS

DP030S

1P3W: 3.0 kVA
3P4W: 4.5 kVA

DP030RS

DP045S

DP060S

DP075S

DP090S

DP105S

DP120S

×

×

×

×

×

×

1P3W: 6.0 kVA
3P4W: 9.0 kVA

×

×

×

×

×

×

1P3W: 9.0 kVA
3P4W: 13.5 kVA

DP045RS××

DP060RS

×

×

×

×

×

×

1P3W: 12.0 kVA
3P4W: 18.0 kVA

×

×

×

×

1P3W: 15.0 kVA
3P4W: 22.5 kVA

×

×

×

×

DP075RS

×

×

×

×

DP090RS

×

×

×

×

1P3W: 18.0 kVA
3P4W: 27.0 kVA

Note: In case of combination of Table 1-3 and that of Table 1-5, an error message (ID: 53 Power Unit
DCPS Overvoltage) may be displayed and the output may be turned off when the reverse power
flow is occurring.

1.3

Features

Reverse power flow
DP series Type R supports the reverse power flow. User does not need to consult with the powercompanies about power system interconnection because DP series Type R processes the reverse
power internally and does not regenerate to the power system when the reverse power flow is
occurring. Also, DP series Type R supports sink current in DC mode. User can use DP series Type R
for testing equipment such as bidirectional converters.

4

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE1.3 Features

Various interfaces to address a variety of usage
The interface to use for the remote controlling from a computer or sequencer is equipped. USB and
RS232 interface are standard, and either GPIB or LAN (LXI 1.4) interface can be chosen whenordering. You can use a contact/TTL signal to turn the output on/off or switch the memory without
using a computer. The product also offers the status output for showing the device status and theoutput which is synchronized with Sequence or Simulation step. With these functions you canachieve various types of systemization and automatization. The AGC function and Autocal function
for calibrating the output voltage drop are also provided.
Variable current limiter
This function can limit the effective value and the positive/negative peak value of the output current
where the limiting value is variable. You can set the limiter so that the output is turned off when thelimited condition continues for a certain time.
Power inputThis product of single-phase input supports a wide range of power input from 100 V to 230 V.
However, with the model of which the output capacity is 6 kVA or more, the output power capacity
will be limited when the power input is 170 V or less. For the model of which the output capacity is
4.5 kVA or more, it is powered from the single-phase mains or the three-phase three-wire mains or
the three-phase four-wire mains, any of which can be chosen when ordering.
Feature-rich measurement function
On the panel the product displays the effective value, peak value, average DC value, current
peak-hold value, and active/apparent power of the output voltage/current. Furthermore, the power
factor, crest factor, reactive power, and harmonic current are also measured and displayed.
Control Software included by default
You can perform the following operations by using Control Software included in the attached
CD-ROM:• Operations same as those performed on the control panel• Editing/transferring/exporting* the arbitrary waveform data
• Data logging (importing the measured values)• Editing/transferring/exporting*/performing Sequence• Editing/transferring/exporting*/performing Simulation*Exporting the data to USB memory allows the data to be set to DP series/DP series Type R.
USB memory support (supported format type: FAT32)
You can write/read the following data to/from a commercial USB memory stick:• Basic setting• Sequence• Simulation• Arbitrary waveform

DP Series/DP Series Type R

5

1. Outline

Restriction of CO2 emission (= power usage) and the display of CO2 emission (= powerusage) during operation
The efficiency is improved by about 27% compared to the linear amplifier method by adopting theswitching amplifier method. When the power output is low, the internal loss can be lowered by
reducing the number of power units being powered on. The function for calculating and displaying
the CO2 emission from the internal loss or output power.
Selecting specification when ordering
Power Input
Single-phase input (1P2W) /three-phase three-wire input* (3P3W)/three-phase four-wire input* (3P4W)* Three-phase three-wire input and three-phase four-wire input can be selected for the modelof
which the output capacity is 4.5 kVA or more.
Communication Interface
GPIB or LAN (LXI 1.4)
Options (partial)
Remote Controller
A remote controller with the numeric keypad, jog, and shuttle.
System Cable (for single-phase three-wire/three-phase connection)
Connects the products of the configurable single-phase model by this cable to configure apolyphase output system.
Power Cable
Cables for the power input.
Cable Holder
By mounting it to this product, you can fix power cables and/or output cables.

6

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE1.3 Features

Peripherals
Immunity Test Software, Voltage Dips Simulator, Reference Impedance Network are provided as
peripherals of this product.
ES0406D, As-517A, As-537, ES4152, ES4153 which are peripherals of ES series cannot be used as
those of this product.
Immunity Test Software (DP0408)
It is application software that performs various low frequency immunity tests including IEC
61000-4-11.
Voltage Dips Simulator (DP4170 Series)
By combining with this product, single-phase and three-phase voltage dips tests complying
with IEC 61000-4-11 can be performed. In addition, "Large capacity model" is also available
for IEC 61000-4-34 test.
In this document, it is written as DIP. When using this product in combination with DIP,
consult NF Corporation.
Note: When performing the tests specified by the IEC standard, use both DIP and Immunity
Test Software.
Reference Impedance Network (DP4160 Series)
It is a network of resistance and inductance to simulate the impedance of the commercial
power system. By combining with this product, impedance specified by IEC 61000-3-3 can berealized. In addition, "Large capacity model" is also available for IEC 61000-3-11 test.
In this document, it is written as RIN. When using this product in combination with RIN,
consult NF Corporation.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

72. Preparation before Use

DP Series/DP Series Type R

2.1

Check before Use ············································· 10

2.2

About Installation Environment ···························· 11

2.3

Cautions during Moving and Transportation············ 16

2.4

Grounding and Power Connections ······················ 17

2.5Output and System Cable Connection ··················· 22

2.6

How to Tilt Control Panel ···································· 33

2.7

Simple Operation Check ···································· 34

2.8

Calibration······················································· 37

92. Preparation before Use

2.1

Check before Use

Check the safety.
To ensure equipment operator's safety, be sure to read the following sections of the instruction
manual.
Safety Precautions (Page ii)
2.4 Grounding and Power Connections
Check the appearance and contents.
If there is any problem, contact the seller (NF Corporation or our agent) from whom you purchased
this product.
Appearance check
Make sure that there is no damage or dent made during the transportation on the LCD screen,
keys, jog, or shuttle of the control panel, or rear connectors.
Contents (main unit and accessories) check
The contents are listed in Table 2-1. Make sure that all of the main unit and accessories areincluded.
Table 2-1 List of Content
Main unit

Accessories

Content
Main unit
Instruction Manual
CD-ROM
Contents: Control Software for DP Series, LabVIEW Driver,
Instruction Manual (Remote Control), Control Software for
DP Series Instruction Manual
Ferrite core (large) (multi-phase model only)
Ferrite core (small) (multi-phase model only)
Cable tie (multi-phase model only)
Stabilizer (only for DP series model of 7.5 kVA or higher andDP series Type R model of 6 kVA or higher)

Quantity
1
1
1
2
1
2
1

Note: Refer to Figure 2-2 and assemble the stabilizer, because it is necessary to ensure stability of DP series
and DP series Type R.

10

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

2.2 About Installation Environment

2.2

About Installation Environment

To use safely and maintain the reliability, take the followings into consideration:
Install the product where the exhaust heat will not damage surroundings.
This product performs forced air cooling using a fan. Keep the front and rear, on which the air
inlet and outlet are located, away from the wall at least 50 cm to secure air circulation.
This product exhausts the heat from the air outlet on the rear. Do not place heat-sensitive
objects around the outlet.
If you install the product in a closed narrow room, air conditioning equipment is required. The
heat value of DP series is shown in Table 2-2. The heat value of DP series Type R is shown in
Table 2-3.
Table 2-2 Heat Value of DP series
ModelRated output
Heat value
DP015S
1.5 kVA
0.5 kW
430 kcal/hDP030S
3 kVA
0.9 kW
780 kcal/hDP045S
4.5 kVA
1.4 kW
1210 kcal/h
DP060S
6 kVA
1.8 kW
1550 kcal/hSingle-phase
DP075S
7.5 kVA
2.3 kW
1980 kcal/hDP090S
9 kVA
2.7 kW
2320 kcal/hDP105S10.5 kVA
3.2 kW
2760 kcal/hDP120S
12 kVA
3.6 kW
3100 kcal/hDP030D
3 kVA
0.9 kW
780 kcal/h
6 kVA
1.8 kW
1550 kcal/hSingle-phase DP060D
three-wire
DP090D
9 kVA
2.7 kW
2320 kcal/hDP120D
12 kVA
3.6 kW
3100 kcal/hDP045T
4.5 kVA
1.4 kW
1210 kcal/hThree-phase
DP090T
9 kVA
2.7 kW
2320 kcal/hDP045M
4.5 kVA
1.4 kW
1210 kcal/hMulti-phase
DP090M
9 kVA
2.7 kW
2320 kcal/hNote: Estimate at power input single-phase 200 V or three-phase three-wire 200 V or
three-phase four-wire 380 V (phase voltage 220 V), rated output.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

11

2. Preparation before Use

Table 2-3 Heat Value of DP series Type R
Model

Rated output
Heat value
Power running
1.5 kVA
0.5 kW
430 kcal/h
50 %0.9 kW
780 kcal/hDP015RS
Reverse power flow
100 %1.7 kW
1470 kcal/hPower running
3 kVA
0.9 kW
780 kcal/h
50
%
1.8
kW
1550
kcal/hDP030RS
Reverse power flow
100 %3.3 kW
2840 kcal/hPower running
4.5 kVA
1.4 kW
1210 kcal/h
50 %2.7 kW
2330 kcal/hDP045RS
Reverse power flow
100 %4.9 kW
4220 kcal/hSingle-phase
Power running
6 kVA
1.8 kW
1550 kcal/h
50 %3.5 kW
3010 kcal/h
DP060RS
Reverse power flow
100 %6.5 kW
5590 kcal/hPower running
7.5 kVA
2.3 kW
1980 kcal/hDP075RS50 %4.4 kW
3790 kcal/hReverse power flow
100 %8.1 kW
6970 kcal/hPower running
9 kVA
2.7 kW
2320 kcal/h
50 %5.2 kW
4480 kcal/hDP090RS
Reverse power flow
100 %9.7 kW
8340 kcal/hPower running
3 kVA
0.9 kW
780 kcal/h
50 %1.8 kW
1550 kcal/hDP030RD
Reverse power flow
100 %3.3 kW
2840 kcal/hPower running
6 kVA
1.8 kW
1550 kcal/hSingle-phase
DP060RD50 %3.5 kW
3010 kcal/hthree-wireReverse power flow
100 %6.5 kW
5590 kcal/hPower running
9 kVA
2.7 kW
2320 kcal/h
50 %5.2 kW
4480 kcal/hDP090RD
Reverse power flow
100 %9.7 kW
8340 kcal/hPower running
4.5 kVA
1.4 kW
1210 kcal/hDP045RT50 %2.7 kW
2330 kcal/hReverse power flow
100 %4.9 kW
4220 kcal/hThree-phase
Power running
9 kVA
2.7 kW
2320 kcal/hDP090RT50 %5.2 kW
4480 kcal/hReverse power flow
100 %9.7 kW
8340 kcal/hNote: Estimate at power input single-phase 200 V or three-phase three-wire 200 V or
three-phase four-wire 380 V (phase voltage 220 V), rated output.

12

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

2.2 About Installation Environment

Install the product on a sturdy place.
The floor needs to have enough strength to support the weight of this product. The mass of DP
series is shown in Table 2-4. Also the mass of DP series Type R is shown in Table 2-5.
Table 2-4 Mass of DP series
Model

Mass
38 kg approx.
50 kg approx.
70 kg approx.
82 kg approx.
110 kg approx.
125 kg approx.
140 kg approx.
155 kg approx.

DP015S
DP030S
DP045S
DP060S
DP075S
DP090S
DP105S
DP120S

Single-phase

Model
Single-phase
three-wireThree-phase
Multi-phase

DP030D
DP060D
DP090D
DP120D
DP045T
DP090T
DP045M
DP090M

Mass
50 kg approx.
82 kg approx.
122 kg approx.
155 kg approx.
70 kg approx.
125 kg approx.
75 kg approx.
130 kg approx.

Table 2-5 Mass of DP series Type R
Model
DP015RS
DP030RS
DP045RS
Single-phase
DP060RS
DP075RS
DP090RS

Mass
50 kg approx.
80 kg approx.
90 kg approx.
130 kg approx.
150 kg approx.
170 kg approx.

Model
DP030RD
Single-phase
DP060RD
three-wire
DP090RD
DP045RT
Three-phase
DP090RT

Mass
80 kg approx.
130 kg approx.
170 kg approx.
90 kg approx.
170 kg approx.

Do not install this product on a sloped surface. The Adjuster Foot is only for temporary fixing,
and cannot support the unit's own weight. You also must not lean on this product or use it as asupport. How to use the Adjuster Foot is shown in Figure 2–1.

X^tbg

Adjuster
Foot
AW


A W  X ^ t b g Í A ã © ç © ÄA¶ i ½  v û ü j Ö ñ · Æ ã ª èA
EivûüjÖñ·ÆºªèÜ·B
Xpi
 

The Adjuster Foot can be moved up by
rotating it counterclockwise and moved
down by rotating it clockwise as viewed
i û a 19mmj È Ç ð g p µ Ä
from above.
º°Ä­¾³¢B
Use an open-end wrench of 19 mm
width.
ãªéUpºªé
Down

Figure 2-1 How to Use the Adjuster FootDP Series/DP Series Type R

13

2. Preparation before Use

Refer to Figure 2-2 Assembly Diagram of Stabilizer and assemble the stabilizer, because it isnecessary to ensure stability of DP series and DP series Type R.

Figure 2-2 Assembly Diagram of Stabilizer
14

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

2.2 About Installation Environment

About arrangement
Stacking arrangement• The center of gravity becomes high, which
poses a risk of falling down.
• The product does not have a structure forsupporting a heavy load.

ÏÝã°ézu
@EdSª­ÈèA|ê¿éë¯ª èÜ·B
@EdÊ¨ðx¦çêé\¢ÉÈÁÄ¢Ü¹ñB
Tandem arrangement• The product placed behind
another will be overheated byexhaust heat, which reduces
the product's lifetime.

OãÉÀ×ézu
@EãÌ»iªrCMÅßM³¹ç
@@êA»iõ½ªZ­ÈèÜ·B

Do not place the product on its side, back or top.
Do not stack the product on top of the other, or place it in front or back of the other(arrangement which makes the cabinet placed behind inhale the exhaust heat of the other).
When you use multiple cabinets to form a polyphase system, there is no limitation regarding
the order of the phases to be arranged. Arrange them in your convenient order within the rangeof the length of the System Cable.
Other installation location conditions
Use the product indoors, at altitude up to 2000 m.
Use the product where the temperature is 0 to +50 degrees Celsius, and the humidity is 5 to
85%RH (the absolute humidity should be 1 to 25 g/m3, without condensation). However, onsome specifications, the temperature range limit is more strict.
Do not install the product in the following places:
Place exposed to inflammable gas→This may pose a risk of explosion. Never install and use the product in such a place.
Outdoors, place exposed to direct sunlight, or place near fire or heat source→This may reduce the performance, or cause failure.
Place exposed to briny air→ This may cause salt damage.
Place exposed to corrosive gas or water, or humid place→This may cause corrode or failure.
Place near electromagnetic field source, high-voltage equipment, or power line
→This may cause malfunction.
Place of frequent vibration→This may cause malfunction or failure.
Dusty place→This may cause failure. Especially do not install the product in a place with conductive
dust.
Electromagnetic emissions from this product may interfere with reception of radio andtelevision broadcasts. Unless the user takes special measures to reduce electromagnetic
emissions, using this product in a residential area must be avoided.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

15

2. Preparation before Use

2.3

Cautions during Moving and Transportation

Follow the instructions below when moving or transporting this product.
Remove all wirings connected to this product.

WARNING
Before removing the wiring, be sure to turn off this product to cut the power from the
distribution board. Otherwise, an electric shock might occur.

Check before movement and transportation
Check the weight before moving the product (Table 2-4, Table 2-5).
Moving with casters
The casters attached to this product are intended for use to move the product on a horizontal surface.
To move the product on a sloped or uneven surface, a licensed personnel should move it byoperating a lifting machine or crane instead of the casters.
As this product is heavy, whenever it is moved, at least two people are required to move it.
Move the Adjuster Foot up enough from the floor by using an open-end wrench (19 mm width).
You can move the Adjuster Foot up by turning it counterclockwise as viewed from above.

AWAdjuster
X^tFootbgãªUpéºDownªé

WARNING
Do not use the casters to move this product on a sloped surface. This product may move
automatically due to its own weight, and cause physical injury.
Do not use the casters to move this product on an uneven or irregular surface. This product may
fall down, and cause physical injury.

16

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

2.4 Grounding and Power Connections

2.4

Grounding and Power Connections

Ensure to ground.
This product uses a line filter. If the product is not grounded, an electric shock might occur.

WARNING
Ensure to connect the protective conductor terminal of the power input terminal of this productto an earth ground so that ground resistance is 100 Ω or less. If the product is not certainly
grounded, an electric shock might occur.
To prevent electric shock, ensure that the protective grounding conductor is connected before
you connect a cable to the power input terminals L, L1, L2, L3, and N.
For grounding, use the optional power cable or a power cable of sufficient ampacity for the
maximum current consumption (see Table 2-8).

Before connecting the product to power source, check the followings.

WARNING
The power supply for this product must be taken from the distribution board.
Be sure to switch off the breaker or the switch at the distribution board before connecting thisproduct to the distribution board. Otherwise, an electric shock might occur.
Route the wire so that the distance between this product and the distribution board breaker orswitch is 3 m or less. If the distance with the distribution board exceeds 3 m, install anotherbreaker or switch within 3 m from this product to connect. Use a breaker complying with IEC
60947-2 or a switch complying with IEC 60947-3 which can disconnect all L, L1, L2, L3, andN. (Protective grounding must not be disconnected.) Mark the breaker or the switch with a sign
indicating that it is a disconnecting device of power input for this product.
These are from requirements in IEC 61010-1.

CAUTION
Condensation may form inside the product when the ambient temperature or humidity changes
suddenly, for example, after transportation in winter. In such case, leave the product in room
temperature enough time to evaporate the condensation, and then connect the product to thepower source.

Check the power source
For safety, use the product in the ranges of input voltage and frequency described below (see Table
2-6). Connect the product to a distribution board which provides the power sufficiently higher thanthe maximum power consumption of each model (see Table 2-8). For the models of which rated
output is 6 kVA or more, if the power input voltage is single-phase 170 V or less, the maximum
output active power is restricted by the wattage limiter function of this product. For details, see
4.1.5.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

17

2. Preparation before Use

Table 2-6 Power Input
Power input
Three-phase three-wire
inputSingle-phase input
Voltagerange

90 V to 250 V

Frequency
range

Three-phase four-wire
input
323 V to 433 V(phase voltage
187 V to 250 V)

170 V to 250 V
50 Hz ±2 Hz or 60 Hz ±2 Hz

About power input terminal
Table 2-7 Power Input Terminal
Power input

Screw

Single-phase
input
Three-phase
three-wire input
Three-phasefour-wire input

DP015, DP030

DP series and DP series Type R
DP045, DP060 DP075, DP090

M6

DP105, DP120

M8

―

M6

―

M6

Note: DP105 and DP120 are not in DP series Type R. The power input of DP015 and DP030 is single-phase only.

About power cable
Use a cable of sufficient ampacity for the maximum current consumption (see Table 2-8). A
protective grounding cable should have ampacity higher than or equal to the power cable. For the
optional power cable, see 7.5.
Table 2-8 Maximum Power/Current Consumption
Rated
outputMaximum
power
consumption

1.5 kVA
3 kVA
4.5 kVA
6 kVA
7.5 kVA
9 kVA
10.5 kVA
12 kVA

2.25 kVA
4.50 kVA
6.75 kVA
9.00 kVA
11.25 kVA
13.50 kVA
15.75 kVA
18.00 kVA

Maximum current consumption
Single-phase
90 V

Single-phase
170 V

25 A
50 A

13 A
26 A
40 A
53 A
66 A
79 A
93 A
106 A

75 A

Three-phase
three-wire
170 V

Three-phasefour-wire
323 V(phase voltage: 187 V)

23 A
36 A
46 A
46 A
58 A
69 A

13 A
25 A
25 A
25 A
37 A
37 A

Note: The power input of DP015 and DP030 is single-phase only.

18

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

2.4 Grounding and Power Connections

Power source connection procedure
Check the current capacity of the distribution board before wiring. The wiring must be performed bya professional engineer.

WARNING
Before connecting this product to the power source, be sure to cut the power to the distribution
board. Otherwise, an electric shock might occur.

The figure in the following procedure is the figure that single-phase input is selected and when using
the cable holder (option). For cable holder installation, see 7.6.
1.

Remove the resin-molded power input terminal cover and the cable holder (option).

2.

Connect the power cable to the power input terminal of this product. Be sure to tighten thescrews firmly.

`LINEL

DP Series/DP Series Type RN

19

2. Preparation before Use

3.

Attach the resin-molded power input terminal cover and the cable holder (option). Direct thefolded part of the resin-molded power input terminal cover to the upper side of the product.

4.

Ensure that the power switch of this product is turned off, and then connect the power cable tothe distribution board.

WARNING
Do not use this product when the resin-molded terminal cover is removed. Otherwise, an electric
shock might occur.
Use enough thick cables to prevent touching live conductive parts after attaching theresin-molded terminal cover. If a thin cable is connected, fingers may enter the gap between theresin-molded terminal cover and the cable, resulting in electric shock, therefore attach some
additional guards.

CAUTIONBe sure to check phases L, L1, L2, L3, and N are correctly connected between this product andthe distribution board.
If this product whose power input is three-phase four-wire input (3P4W) is used without
connecting N, it may be damaged. Be sure to connect all power cables.

20

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

2.4 Grounding and Power Connections

Power input single-phase

Distribution board

L

N(Protective grounding)Power input three-phase three-wirePower input three-phase four-wireDistribution board

L1

L2

Distribution board

L1

L3

L2

L3

N

(Protective grounding)(Protective grounding)Figure 2-3 Power Input Terminal
Note: The figure shows the panel notation of the DP120S.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

21

2. Preparation before Use

2.5

Output and System Cable Connection

Before connecting, check the followings.

WARNING
Before touching the output terminal, be sure to turn off the power switch of this product, and cut
the power to the distribution board. Otherwise, an electric shock might occur.

CAUTION
The output terminals that can be grounded are the Lo or N terminals. Do not ground the Hi, L1,
L2, and L3 terminals.

About output terminal
Table 2-9 Output Terminals

DP series

DP series Type R
Screw

22

DP015S, DP030S, DP045S, DP060S
DP030D, DP060D, DP090D, DP120D,
DP045T, DP090T,
DP090M (polyphase output)
DP015RS, DP030RS, DP045RS, DP060RS
DP030RD, DP060RD, DP090RD,
DP045RT, DP090RT
M6

DP075S, DP090S,
DP105S, DP120S,
DP090M (single-phase output)
DP075RS, DP090RS

M8

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

2.5 Output and System Cable Connection

2.5.1 Single-phase Model
Connection procedure
The figure in the following procedure is the figure when using the cable holder (option). For cable
holder installation, see 7.6.
1.

Remove the resin-molded output terminal cover and the cable holder (option) of the output
terminal.

2.

Connect the output terminal to the load with a cable. Be sure to tighten the screws firmly. If you
want to ground the output terminal at one point only, ground the Lo terminal. The Hi terminal
should not be grounded. If the load has a ground terminal, connect it to the chassis terminal of
the output terminal of this product.

CAUTION
The output terminal that can be grounded is the Lo terminals. Do not ground the Hi terminal.

OUTPUTHi

DP Series/DP Series Type RLo23

2. Preparation before Use

3.

Attach the resin-molded terminal cover and the cable holder (option). Direct the folded part of
the resin-molded terminal cover to the upper side of the product.

WARNING
Do not use this product when the resin-molded terminal cover is removed. Otherwise, an electric
shock might occur.
Use enough thick cables to prevent touching live conductive parts after attaching theresin-molded terminal cover. If a thin cable is connected, fingers may enter the gap between theresin-molded terminal cover and the cable, resulting in electric shock, therefore attach some
additional guards.

About outlet
If you purchase a single-phase model, you need to specify the outlet type to either NEMA 5-15
(Japan/North America type) or CEE 7 (Europe type). The model name of this product isdistinguished by this outlet type (Figure 1-1, Figure 1-2). The output terminals, the maximum
voltage, the maximum current, and available output range are listed for each type in Table 2-10.
Each outlet can provide up to 15 A of current. If a current exceeding 15 A flows, the circuit breaker
may operate to cut the output. When the circuit breaker operates, the button is pushed out forward.
Pushing in this button resets the breaker, and power can be provided from the outlet.
The outlet is dedicated to AC output. It can be used in the AC or ACDC mode. In the settings below,
the outlet is separated from the output by the internal relay of this product. However, only the Hi
terminal is separated.
When in DC mode (DC-INT, DC-VCA)
When the outlet is the Japan/North America type (NEMA 5-15), and in the 200 V range

24

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

2.5 Output and System Cable Connection

Table 2-10 Outlet List
Type

NEMA 5-15

CEE 7

Hi

Lo Hi

Lo

125 Vrms
15 Arms

250 Vrms
15 Arms
100 V range
200 V range

Form
and Terminals

Maximum Voltage
Maximum Current
Available
Output Range

100 V range

WARNING
When using the outlet only and not using the outlet terminal, attach the resin-molded terminal
cover so that the folded part of it is directed to the lower side of the product, in order to avoid
contact with the output terminal.

CAUTION
Use the outlet only for AC output without DC offset. Do not take DC output or AC output with
DC offset from the outlet.
Use the outlet for 15 A or less output.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

25

2. Preparation before Use

2.5.2 Polyphase Model
Connection procedure
The figure in the following procedure is the figure when using the cable holder (option). For cable
holder installation, see 7.6.
1.

Remove the resin-molded terminal cover and the cable holder (option) of the output terminal.

2.

Connect the output terminal to the load with a cable. Connect voltage lines to the L1, L2, andL3 output terminals of this product. Connect a neutral line to the N terminal of output terminalof this product, if necessary. Be sure to tighten the screws firmly. In both single-phase
three-wire model and three-phase model, the N terminal can be grounded. If the load has aground terminal, connect it to the chassis terminal of the output terminal of this product.

OUTPUT

L1

26

L2

L3

N

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

2.5 Output and System Cable Connection

CAUTION
The output terminal that can be grounded is the N terminal. Do not ground any of the L1, L2,and L3 terminals.
Do not apply current exceeding the maximum current per phase (see 10.5 and 10.6) to any
output terminal including N terminal.

3.

Attach the resin-molded terminal cover and the cable holder (option). Direct the folded part of
the resin-molded terminal cover to the upper side of the product.

WARNING
Do not use this product when the resin-molded terminal cover is removed. Otherwise, an electric
shock might occur.
Use enough thick cables to prevent touching live conductive parts after attaching theresin-molded terminal cover. If a thin cable is connected, fingers may enter the gap between theresin-molded terminal cover and the cable, resulting in electric shock, therefore attach some
additional guards.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

27

2. Preparation before Use

2.5.3 Multi-phase Model
The output terminal of DP045M/DP090M is divided into two terminals, the polyphase output
terminal and the single-phase output terminal, as shown in Figure 2–2. The single-phase two-wire(1P2W) output uses the single-phase output terminal, and the single-phase three-wire (1P3W) output
and the three-phase four-wire (3P4W) output use the polyphase output terminal.

Polyphase
output terminal
多相出力端子(Used for the single-phase
単相3線出力，three-wire
output and the
三相4線出力three-phasefour-wire
で使用します。
output.)

Power
input
電源入力端子terminal

Single-phase
単相出力端子 output
terminal
単相2線出力(Usedfor single-phase
で使用します。
two-wire
output.)Sensing
input terminal
センシング入力端子

Figure 2-4 Terminal Panel Arrangement of Multi-phase Model (Rear)

Connection procedure
The connection procedure of the single-phase output terminal follows the description in 2.5.1, andthat of the polyphase output terminal follows 2.5.2.

CAUTION
In the single-phase two-wire (1P2W) output, do not connect anything to the polyphase output
terminal.
In the single-phase three-wire (1P3W) output and the three-phase four-wire (3P4W) output, do
not connect anything to the single-phase output terminal.
In the single-phase three-wire (1P3W) output, do not connect anything to the L3 terminal.

28

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

2.5 Output and System Cable Connection

2.5.4 Polyphase System

System Cable (1P3W)

System Cable (3P4W)

Single-phase three-wire system

Three-phase four-wire system

Optional System Cable should be connected to the SYSTEM I/O connector of this product. The
cabinet which the L1 connector of the System Cable is connected to becomes L1 phase, and theoutput terminals Hi and Lo correspond to the L1 and N terminals, respectively. This is same for L2
and L3 phases. This product recognizes the polyphase system by checking the state of the system
cable connection at power-on, so connect the System Cable before turning on the power.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The polyphase system can be configured only when the configurable single-phase models areconnected with System Cables.
Connection with polyphase model or Multi-phase model is not allowed.
You cannot use a Multi-phase model to configure a polyphase system, even when it is used asa single-phase output.
You cannot connect single-phase models in parallel to boost up a single-phase output.
Turn on all power supplies within 20 seconds.
The L2 and L3 cabinets in a polyphase system are restricted in their operation as follows:
Cannot use the communication interface (USB, RS232, GPIB, LAN).
Cannot use the external control function.
Cannot use a USB memory.
Cannot connect and use the remote controller.
Starts according to the contents of the Basic Setting Memory No.1 of the L1 cabinet.
Does not accept the control panel key operations except for special cases.
Can only display the output measured value of their own cabinet in the measurement display.
The display format of the measured value (3.4.10) follows that of the LI cabinet.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DP Series/DP Series Type R

29

2. Preparation before Use

Connection procedure
The figure in the following procedure is the figure when using the cable holder (option). For cable
holder installation, see 7.6.
1.

Connect the connector L1 of the System Cable to the SYSTEM I/O connector of the cabinet
which is to be L1 phase. Also connect the L2 and L3 connectors in the same way.

L
TRO

I/O

CON
TEM
SYS

2.

30

I/O

Remove the resin-molded output terminal cover and the cable holder (option) of each cabinet.

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

2.5 Output and System Cable Connection

3.

Connect the output terminal to the load with a cable. Connect a voltage line to the Hi output
terminal of each cabinet. The neutral line can be connected to the Lo terminal with two methods
described below. The neutral line can be grounded. If the load has a ground terminal, connect itto the chassis terminal of each output terminal. Be sure to tighten the screws firmly.
(a) When connecting the load with the neutral line (single-phase three-wire or three-phasefour-wire connection)
Connect the neutral point of load with the Lo terminal of each cabinet using cables withsame length and diameter as the voltage line. Alternatively, connect between the Lo
terminals of each cabinet by a cable which is as short as possible and has a diameter equal
to or more than that of the voltage line, and then connect one of the Lo terminals with theneutral point of load by a cable with same length and diameter as the voltage line.
(b) When not connecting the load with the neutral line (three-phase three-wire connection),
Connect between the Lo terminals of each cabinet by a cable which is as short and thick as
possible (with a diameter equal to or more than that of the voltage line).

CAUTION
The terminal which can be grounded is the Lo terminal of each cabinet. Do not ground the Hi
terminal (L1, L2, and L3 voltage lines).

L1

L2

OUTPUTHiL3

OUTPUT
Lo

L1

Hi

L2

L3

N

OUTPUT
Lo

Hi

Lo

×Loadi(CabinetâÌÚnground[qjterminal)iajOfour-wire4üÚ±connection(a)Three-phase

DP Series/DP Series Type R

31

2. Preparation before Use

L1

L2

OUTPUTHiL3

OUTPUTLoHi

OUTPUT
Lo

Hi

Lo

×

Load
L1

L2

L3

 âÌÚn[qji3üÚ± connection
ibjOthree-wire(b)Three-phase(Cabinet ground terminal)

4.

Attach the resin-molded output terminal cover and the cable holder (option) to each cabinet.
Direct the folded part of the resin-molded terminal cover to the upper side of the product.

WARNING
Do not use this product when the resin-molded terminal cover is removed. Otherwise, an electric
shock might occur.
Use enough thick cables to prevent touching live conductive parts after attaching theresin-molded terminal cover. If a thin cable is connected, fingers may enter the gap between theresin-molded terminal cover and the cable, resulting in electric shock, therefore attach some
additional guards.

32

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

2.6 How to Tilt Control Panel

2.6

How to Tilt Control Panel

You can tilt up the control panel to operate it. There is a lever in the back under the control panel,
which is locked with the hook of the chassis, being pulled by a spring. The hook consists of two
steps, which can be used to tilt the control panel and fix it in two ways.
Operation procedure
1.

Pull the lever in the back under the control panel. The handle moves toward you and the lock of
the control panel is released.

Ìo[ðø«Ü·Pull the lever in the back2.

While holding the lever in pulled position, tilt the control panel by desired degree.

3.

Release the lever slowly. The control panel will be locked.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

33

2. Preparation before Use

WARNING
When closing the control panel, pull the lever and press down on the panel slowly in order toavoid pinching your fingers.

2.7

Simple Operation Check

This section describes how to perform a simple operation check when you purchased a new product,or after storing the product for a long period. This check should be performed without load. For apolyphase system, remove the System Cable, and check the single-phase output for each cabinet. If
you are not satisfied with the results verified at the operation check, please request the repair to us or
our agent.
Operation procedure1.

Connect the power supply referring to "2.4 Grounding and Power Connections."

2.

Attach the resin-molded output terminal cover without connecting anything to the output
terminals or any other terminal/connector.

OUTPUT
Hi

Lo

Using cable holder (option)

Nothing is connected tothe output terminal.

34

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

2.7 Simple Operation Check3.

«Only for Multi-phase model» For the Multi-phase model, set the phase configuration setting
switch according to the output phase configuration to be checked.
スイッチをスライドさせて設定する。
Set
the switch by sliding it.

3φ4W

1φ2W
1φ3W

4.

Turn on the switch of the distribution board, and then turn on the power switch of this product.
Check that all LEDs on the control panel illuminate for several seconds, and then turn off, andthat our logo mark appears on the LCD screen (see 3.2.4). If LAN interface is equipped, "LXI"
is displayed below the logo mark.

5.

Except when you purchased a new product, refer to "4.28 Restoring to the Factory Default
Setting (Reset)" to initialize the product to factory defaults. The product will be reset, anddisplay the Continuous screen automatically.

6.

When you purchased a new product, the product will start and then display the Continuous
screen automatically.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

35

2. Preparation before Use

7.

Check that the measured values of 100 V range, AC-INT, V, and I are displayed in rms, and that
the AC voltage (ACV) is set to 0 V.

8.

«Only for the polyphase model, the polyphase output of the Multi-phase model, or thepolyphase system» As shown in the figure below, for the three-phase model or three-phasesystem, check that the icon

is displayed, and for the single-phase three-wire model orthe single-phase three-wire system, check that the icon

is displayed. Press the [Osc]soft-key and select [6: Phs Mode] to display the [Phase Mode] window, and check that themode is set to [Balance] (balanced mode).

Three-phase model, three-phase output of Multi-pase model, or three-phase system

Single-phase three-wire model, single-phase three-wire output of Multi-phase model, or single-phase
three-wire system

36

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

2.8 Calibration

9.

Press the OUTPUT key to turn the output on. Press the V key to open the numerical entry box
for AC voltage (ACV). Raise the AC voltage setting value gradually by using the jog, shuttle,
arrow keys, and numeric keypad.

2.8

Calibration

When the product needs calibration, contact us or our agent.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

37

3. Basic Operation

DP Series/DP Series Type R

3.1

Component Name ············································· 40

3.2Power On/Off ··················································· 45

3.3

Basic Key Operations ········································ 49

3.4

Using the Continuous Function ···························· 55

393. Basic Operation

3.1

Component Name

3.1.1 Front

1. 操作パネル
1. Control
panel

2. リモートコントローラコネクタ
2. Remotecontroller connector

3. USBメモリコネクタ
USB memory connector
3.

4. フロントグリル
4. Front grill

5.フロントグリル固定金具
Front grill holder
5.
6. Outlet
6. 出力アウトレット

7.電源スイッチ
Power switch
7.

8.キャスタCaster8.

9.
9.アジャスタフット
Adjuster Foot(Multi-phase model)

10. Phase configuration setting switch

Figure 3-1 Component Name (Front)

40

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

3.1 Component Name

Table 3-1 Component Name (Front)
Number
1

2
3
4
5
6

Name
Control panel

Remote controller
connector
USB memory connector
Front grill

7
8

Front grill holder
Outlet(Only for the single-phasemodel)
Power switch
Caster9

Adjuster Foot

10

Phase configuration setting
switch(Multi-phase model only)

DP Series/DP Series Type R

Description
Configures the settings and turns theoutput on or off. Information such as
setting values and measured values isdisplayed on the LCD screen.
Optional remote controller can beconnected.
USB memory can be connected.
The fresh air inlet. An air filter is
attached.
Clasps for fixing the front grill.
Can provide up to 15 A of AC output peroutlet.
Turns the power on/off.
Caster with the freely movable
front-wheels and fixed rear-wheels. Can
be used to move this product in thehorizontal location.
Can be used to fix this producttemporarily in the horizontal location.
Set the output phase configuration.

Refer to
3.1.3

7.1
4.9
9.2
9.2
2.5

3.2
2.3

2.2
3.2.2

41

3. Basic Operation

3.1.2 Rear

5. GPIB connectoror
LAN connector

1. External signal input
connector
2. Monitor output connector

6. RS232 connector
3. SYSTEM I/O connector
7. USB connector
4. CONTROL I/O connector

8. Air outlet

11. Output terminal

9. Power input terminal

12. Cable holder (output side)

10. Cable holder(power input side)

13. Sensing input terminal
14. Caster(Multi-phase model)

15.
15.多相出力端子
Polyphase output

terminal

16.単相出力端子
Single-phase
16.
output terminal

17. Sensing
input terminal
17. センシング入力端子

Figure 3-2 Component Name (Rear)

42

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

3.1 Component Name

Table 3-2 Component Name (Rear)
Number1

Name
External signal input
connector

2

Monitor output connector

3

SYSTEM I/O connector

4

CONTROL I/O connector

5

GPIB connectoror
LAN connector
RS232 connector
USB connector
Air outlet
Power input terminal

6
7
8
9

10
11
12
13
14

15
16
17

Cable holder(power input side) *Option
Output terminal
Cable holder(output side) *Option
Sensing input terminal(Single-phase model,
Polyphase model)
CasterPolyphase output terminal(Multi-phase model)
Single-phase output terminal(Multi-phase model)
Sensing input terminal(Multi-phase model)

DP Series/DP Series Type R

Description
Used when controlling the voltage value
setting by the external signal (VCA),
when synchronizing the output frequency
with the external signal (SYNC), andwhen outputting the amplified externalsignal (EXT, ADD).
Can observe waveforms of the output
voltage and output current whenconnected to a unit such as oscilloscopes.
An optional System Cable can beconnected to make multiple single-phasemodels into a polyphase output system.
Used to control this product externally bylogic signal and non voltage contact. Also
it can obtain the state of this product witha logic signal.
GPIB or LAN communication interface.
Either one can be chosen when ordering.
RS232 communication interface.
USB communication interface.
Air outlet for exhausting the heat.
Power input terminal. Power input is
1P2W or 3P3W or 3P4W, either of which
can be chosen when ordering. (only forthe model of which the output capacity is
4.5 kVA or more)
Figure 3-2 shows the case of power input
1P2W.
Used to fix the power cable.
Output terminal.
Used to fix the output cable.
Connect to the load end that is located in
the distance from the main unit to detect
its voltage.
Caster with the freely movable
front-wheels and fixed rear-wheels. Can
be used to move this product in thehorizontal location.
Output terminal for the single-phase
three-wire and three-phase four-wire.
Output terminal for the single-phasetwo-wire.
Connect to the load end that is located in
the distance from the main unit to detect
its voltage. Common among thesingle-phase two-wire, single-phase
three-wire, and three-phase four-wire
output.

Refer to
4.17,
4.19,
4.20

4.10

2.5.4

4.18

6.1.3,
6.1.4
6.1.2
6.1.1
2.2
2.4

2.4,
7.6
2.5
2.5,
7.6
4.11

2.3

2.5.3
2.5.3
4.11

43

3. Basic Operation

3.1.3 Control Panel
8. LCD screen

9. MEMORY key.

10. V key
11. F key
12. I key

1. LIMIT LED

13. SHIFT key

2. ERROR LED

14. SHIFT LED.

15. Numeric keypad
3. OUTPUT LED
4. OUTPUT key

16. Arrow key
17. Jog
18. Shuttle

5. RANGE key

19. ENTER key

6. MENU key

20. CANCEL key

7. Soft-key

Figure 3-3 Component Name (Control Panel)

Table 3-3 Component Name (Control Panel)
Number
1

44

Name
LIMIT LED

2
3
4
5

ERROR LEDOUTPUT LED
OUTPUT key
RANGE key

6
7

MENU key
Soft-key

8
9
10

LCD screen
MEMORY key
V key

11

F key

Description
Illuminates when the peak current limiter,
RMS current limiter, or wattage limiter
activates.
[DP series Type R only]Flashes when the reverse power flow
satisfies one of the following conditions.
The reverse power exceeding 40% of theelectric power capacity has lasted for 3
minutes.
The reverse power exceeding 40% of theelectric power capacity has occupied 20%
in duty cycle.
Illuminates when an error is detected.
Illuminates in the output on state.
Turns the output on or off.
Switches between the 100 V and 200 V
ranges.
Displays the root menu.
Assigned with the functions displayed at thebottom of the LCD screen.
Displays the measured values or menu.
Displays the Memory View.
Opens the numerical entry box for the
output voltage setting.
Opens the numerical entry box for thefrequency setting.

Refer to
4.1

8.1
3.4.8
3.4.8
3.4.2
3.3.1
5.1
5.1
4.8
3.4.4,
3.4.5
3.4.6

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

3.2 Power On/Off

Table 3-3 Component Name (Control Panel) (continued)
Number
12
13

3.2

Name
I key
SHIFT key

14
15
16

SHIFT LED
Numeric keypad
Arrow key

17

Jog

18

Shuttle19
20

ENTER key
CANCEL key

Description
Opens the RMS current limiter set window.
Turns on or off the shift state, whichenables Shortcut operations.
Illuminates when the shift state is turned on.
Used to enter a value directly.
Used to move across the items orincrementing/decrementing the value by
one step.
Used to move across the items orincrementing/decrementing the value by
one step.
Used to move across the items in theselection box or incrementing/decrementing
the value. The greater the turning angle is,the faster you move or
increment/decrement.
Confirms the selection.
Returns to the previous state without
confirming the selection. The numericalentry box is closed when the value wasincremented or decremented using the jog,
shuttle, or arrow key.

Refer to
4.1.2
3.3.7
3.3.7
3.3.5
3.3

3.3

3.3

3.3
3.3

Power On/Off

3.2.1 Before Turning on the PowerThis product can output AC 320 V/DC 454 V at a maximum for a single-phase output in asingle-phase model or Multi-phase model. In a single-phase three-wire model, a single-phase
three-wire output in a Multi-phase model, or in a single-phase three-wire system, it can also output
AC 640 V at a maximum between the wires. The wrong operations may cause the electric shock or
result in malfunction of your load. Please check the following before starting operations.
When you use this product for the first time, we recommend you to perform the test operation
without any connection to the output (without loads) with the instruction manual at your side.
Double-check the connection to the power supply. Ensure that the cable is appropriate for thecurrent consumption and firmly connected.
Double-check the connection to the output. Ensure that the cable is appropriate for the output
current and firmly connected.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

45

3. Basic Operation

3.2.2 Set the Output Phase Configuration (Multi-phase model Only)
Operation procedure
Switch the phase configuration setting switch in the power off state depending on the output phase
configuration.
スイッチをスライドさせて設定する。
Set the switch by sliding it.

3φ4W

1φ2W
1φ3W

CAUTION
Ensure that the power is off when you switch the phase configuration setting switch. If thepower is on when you switch the phase configuration setting switch, the output phase
configuration will not be switched. Also, this operation does not affect the behaviors of the
product. If you move the phase configuration setting switch by mistake in the power onstate, be sure to move it back to the original position. Otherwise the product starts up in
unexpected output phase configuration when at power-on next time.

3.2.3 Power On

POWER

OFF

ON

Press "On" side of the power switch. If you configured a polyphase system, all cabinets need to beturned on within 20 seconds while the order does not matter.

46

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

3.2 Power On/Off

3.2.4 Screen Display and Operations at Starting Up
When you power on the cabinet, all LEDs in the control panel illuminate. The LEDs are lighted off
after a while and the following contents are displayed in the order below.
1.

The "NF" logo mark is displayed for a few seconds or more than 10 seconds. The length forwhich this logo is displayed depends on your model and system.

2.

The self check is performed and the result is displayed. If any problem is detected, if youchange the polyphase system connection in the single-phase model, or if you change the output
phase configuration in the Multi-phase model, the startup process halts in the self check screen
shown in Figure 3–4. Check the self check result and press the ENTER key to resume thestartup process.

Figure 3-4 The Self Check Screen to be Displayed when Starting the Unit in Other
System or in Other Output Phase configuration than before
3.

Depending on the output function selection setting at power-on, the Continuous function screen,
Sequence function screen, or Simulation function screen is displayed. For detailed information
about the output function selection at power-on setting, see 4.2.10 and 4.3.10.

4.

If the output function selection is set to the Continuous function and the output-on at power-on
setting is on, the output is turned on after the confirmation message to inform that the output is
automatically turned on is displayed for about 10 seconds. If you press the ENTER key while
this message is displayed, you can cancel the setting of automatic output-on. For detailed
information about the output-on at power-on setting, see 4.22.

3.2.5 The Settings Loaded after Startup
For the Continuous function, the output settings are invoked from the Basic Setting Memory No.1
and other settings are loaded from the System Setting Memory. For details, see 4.8 and 10.24.
For the Sequence function and the Simulation function, the factory default settings are loaded for thecontent of each step.
If you changed the configuration of a polyphase system or the output phase configuration in a
Multi-phase model, the settings are invoked depending on the output phase configuration.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

47

3. Basic Operation

3.2.6 Checking the Rated PowerOn the screen after startup, the rated power icon is displayed in the position shown in Figure 3–5.
The value in the icon indicates the maximum electric power that can be output. In Figure 3–5, themaximum electric power is 6.0 kVA.
If the rated power is restricted by the power unit energization setting, the icon is highlighted asshown in Table 3-4. For detailed information about the power unit energization setting, see 4.24.
In some models, the maximum output active power may be restricted when the power supply voltage
is less than or equal to 170 V. In that case, the restricted maximum output active power value isdisplayed using the normal icon as shown in Table 3-4. For the restriction applied to the maximum
output active power due to the power supply voltage, see 4.1.5.
Rated
定格電力
power
icon
アイコン

Figure 3-5 The Rated Power Icon

Table 3-4 How the Rated Power Icon is Displayed Depending on the Power Unit
Energization Setting
Normal icon
Example:Highlighted icon
Example:All power unit energization settings are enabled. The rated power is set tothe maximum value that the model system and the power supply voltage canprovide.
Because some power unit energization settings are disabled, the rated power
is restricted.

-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------For a polyphase model, the total rated power of all phases is displayed.
For a polyphase system, the rated power is displayed for each phase.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

3.2.7 Power Off
Disable the output and ensure the OUTPUT LED is off before pressing "Off" side of the powerswitch. All screens disappear and all LEDs turn off, then the power input and the output are blocked
inside the system. For a polyphase system, although the order for turning off cabinets is not
significant, a communication error message may appear if the interval between the operations ofturning off the cabinets is too long. This does not cause any problem.

CAUTIONFor DP series Type R, do not turn off the power input immediately after the reverse power
flow occurs. If the power input is immediately turned off, it may shorten the life of thisproduct.

48

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

3.3 Basic Key Operations

3.3

Basic Key Operations

3.3.1 Changing the Output Function(Continuous/Sequence/Simulation)
To change the Continuous/Sequence/Simulation function, press the MENU key. This operation
displays the root menu shown in Figure 3–6.
Five icons are available in the root menu. The cursor location is informed by the highlighted icon. The
description of the icon at the cursor location is displayed in the box located at the bottom of the screen.
Move the cursor to the function you want to select by using arrow keys or the jog. Each icon in
upper line represents the Continuous function, Sequence function, and Simulation function from theleft. When you press the ENTER key, the screen for the selected function is displayed. You cannotchange the function in the output on state. However, you can move to the Memory function screen
or System function screen.

Figure 3-6 The Root Menu

3.3.2 Item Selection
You can move the cursor (highlighted icon) by using arrow keys or the jog. However, some items
cannot be selected depending on your model or system. These items are skipped when moving the
cursor. If you press the ENTER key, the item under the cursor is selected and run. If the item is amenu, the menu screen, window, or selection box is displayed. If you press the CANCEL key, themenu in the upper hierarchy is displayed without selection or execution of that item.
Selection box
If the menu has numbers before its menu items as shown in Figure 3–7 (selection box), pressing thecorresponding number on the numeric keypad also selects and runs the item. You can also move thecursor by using the shuttle.
If you select an item withon the right, the selection box in the lower hierarchy menu isdisplayed. In addition to the ENTER key, you can also use → arrow key to open the selection box ofthat menu.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

49

3. Basic Operation

You cannot select grayed items in a selection box, which are different depending on your model orsetting.

Figure 3-7 The Example of a Selection Box

Data list box
When selecting data in the memory, the data list box shown in Figure 3–8 is displayed. To select adata in a data list box, hover the cursor over the box by using the arrow keys or jog and press the
ENTER key. This operation enables the cursor to move over each data in the data list box. Hover the
cursor over the item you want to select by pressing the up or down arrow key or turning the jog or
shuttle and press the ENTER key.

Figure 3-8 The Example of a Data List Box

3.3.3 Using Soft-keys
When the soft-key function is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen as shown in Figure 3–9,
pressing a soft-key performs the function assigned to that key.

Soft-key function

Figure 3-9 Soft-key Function
50

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

3.3 Basic Key Operations

3.3.4 Closing Windows
The window with the [Close] button
Following three methods are available to close the window with the [Close] button shown in Figure
3–10.
Move the cursor to the [Close] button in the window by using the arrow keys or the jog andpress the ENTER key.
Press the CANCEL key.
Press the soft-key under the [Close] button (third button from the left).

Figure 3-10 The Example of the Window with the [Close] Button

Window with the [OK]/[Cancel] button
Following three methods are available to close the window with the [OK]/[Cancel] button shown in
Figure 3–11.
Move the cursor to the [OK] button or [Cancel] button in the window by using the arrow keys
or the jog and press the ENTER key.
Press the CANCEL key. To do so, perform the same operation as you did to select the [Cancel]
button.
Pressing the soft-key under the [OK] button (fourth button from the left) means same as
selecting the [OK] button. Similarly, pressing the soft-key under the [Cancel] button (second
button from the left) means same as selecting the [Cancel] button.

Figure 3-11 The Example of the Window with the [OK]/[Cancel] Button

3.3.5 Entering Values (Numerical Entry Box)Entering values with arrow keys/jog or shuttle
For an item to set value, hover the cursor over the value (which will be highlighted) and press the
ENTER key to open a numerical entry box shown in Figure 3–12 in which you can enter a value.
Move to the desired digit by using the right or left arrow key and increment/decrement the value by
using the up or down arrow key/the jog or shuttle. During the edit, the value is confirmed every time

DP Series/DP Series Type R51

3. Basic Operation

it is incremented or decremented. The value for the voltage or frequency output is applied evenduring the edit. If you press the ENTER key or the CANCEL key, the numerical entry box is closed.
Enter values directly by using the numeric keypad
For an item required to set values, hover the cursor over a value (which will be highlighted) andenter a new value by using the numeric keypad. A numerical entry box opens as you start entering avalue, and the entered value is displayed. Press the ENTER key to confirm the value. The previous
values for the voltage or frequency output are held until you press the ENTER key. If you press the
CANCEL key, the settings are not changed.

Figure 3-12 The Numerical Entry Box-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------If you already know the value to set, the direct entry using the numeric keypad will be
convenient.
If you want to increment/decrement the value by one step at one time, use the up and downarrow key.
If you want to increment/decrement the value by a large amount step by step, use the jog.
If you want to increment/decrement the value by a large amount quickly, use the shuttle.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

52

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

3.3 Basic Key Operations

3.3.6 Entering Strings (Character String Entry Box)Enter the name of the data when saving it to the internal memory or USB memory. In this case,hover the cursor over the string (which will be highlighted) and press the ENTER key. This
operation opens a character string entry box shown in Figure 3–13.
When you turn the jog or press the up or down arrow key in a character string entry box, thecharacter at the cursor (highlighted character) is changed in a way shown in Table 3-5. When youpress a key in the numeric keypad, the corresponding value or symbol is entered. To move the cursor
position, use the right or left arrow key. When you press the ENTER key, the edited string is
confirmed and the character string entry box is closed.

Figure 3-13 Character String Entry Box
Table 3-5 Character String Entry List
← Turning the jog in the counterclockwise direction
Pressing the down arrow key

Turning the jog in the clockwise direction
Pressing the up arrow key →ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789!#$%&'()+,-.;=@[]^_`{}~(Note)

indicates a space.

-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The name of the data which will be saved in the internal memory or USB memory must be 20
characters long at a maximum.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DP Series/DP Series Type R

53

3. Basic Operation

3.3.7 Using Shortcut Operations (SHIFT Key)When you press the SHIFT key, the SHIFT LED illuminates. In this state (shift state), pressing oneof the V, F, I, and any keys in the numeric keypad enables shown in Table 3-6. In this instruction
manual, pressing a key in the shift state is denoted by "+ X."

If you press the SHIFT key once more in the shift state, the SHIFT LED is lighted off and the shiftstate exits.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The shift state is kept until you press the SHIFT key next time. Therefore, continuous Shortcut
operations can be performed.
You do not have to hold down the SHIFT key while you press another key.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Table 3-6 Shortcut Operations
Shortcut

Item+

V-LIMIT+

F-LIMIT++

Ipk-LIMIT
S-L1/L2/L3†+

M-L1/L2/L3†+

RMS/AVG/PK†++

KEY LOCKAGC/Acal+USB-EJECT

+

AC/DC

+

SOURCE+CONTRAST

+

LOCAL

+

DISP

+

Ipk CLR

Description

Refer
to
Opens the setting window for the voltage setting 4.1.3
range limit.
Opens the setting window for the frequency
4.1.4
setting range limit.
Opens the peak current limiter set window.
4.1.1
Switches the target phase to be configured in
3.4.5,
the following order: L1, L2, L3 (unbalanced
4.15mode), All Phase, and All Line (balancedmode).
Switches the target phase of which the
3.4.13measured value is displayed in the following
order: L1, L2, L3, L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1.
Switches the display format of the measured
3.4.10value in the following order: RMS, AVG, PK.
Enables/Disables the key lock.
4.25
Opens the AGC/Autocal set window.
4.12,
4.13
Performs the eject operation for removing a
4.9
USB memory.
Switches the AC/DC mode in the following
3.4.1
order: AC, ACDC, DC.
Switches the signal source in the following
3.4.1
order: INT, VCA, SYNC, EXT, ADD.
Changes to the state in which the contrast is
4.27
selected in the LCD set window.
Exits the Remote state between the device
6.2
connected to the communication interface andenters the Local state in which the panel
operations are accepted.
Switches the measured value display mode
3.4.11
between normal and simple.
Clears the current peak-hold value.
3.4.12

Note: If you change the item presented with † symbol using a Shortcut operations, the setting is not saved in the
System Setting Memory (see 10.24).

54

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

3.4 Using the Continuous Function

3.4

Using the Continuous Function

3.4.1 Setting the AC/DC Mode and the Signal Source
The description of the AC/DC mode is shown in Table 3-7. The description of the signal source isshown in Table 3-8. The selectable combinations of the AC/DC mode and the signal source areshown in Table 3-9.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------If the load is a transformer whose core saturates even with small amount of DC component,
select the AC mode.
If you output AC less than 40 Hz, select the ACDC mode. You cannot set the frequency to lessthan 40 Hz in the AC mode.
In the AC mode, if the output is a waveform that has a long cycle or is dissymmetric in termsof positive and negative (e.g. when the phase is changed rapidly or the different values are set
for the positive and negative in the peak current limiter), the waveform may be transformed by
the DC component removing function of the AC mode. If you want to make the output
waveform similar to the signal source, select the ACDC mode.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Table 3-7 Description of the AC/DC Mode
AC/DC mode
AC
ACDC
DC

Description
Only the AC voltage can be set. The AC coupling is used between the signal
source and the amplification section and the DC component is removed.
The AC voltage and the DC voltage can be set respectively. The DC couplingis used between the signal source and the amplification section and both of
the AC component and the DC component are output.
Only the DC voltage can be set; the AC voltage is fixed to zero. The DC
coupling is used between the signal source and the amplification section.
Table 3-8 The Description of the Signal Source

Signal source
Description
INT
The signal source is internal. Set the output voltage, output waveform, frequency,
output on phase, and output off phase through the control panel or the remotecontrol.
VCA
The signal source is internal. The output voltage can be controlled with theexternal DC input signal. The output voltage setting cannot be set through thecontrol panel or the remote control. All conditions except for output voltage
setting is same as INT.
SYNC
The signal source is internal. The frequency of the internal signal source is
synchronized with the external input signal or the power line. The frequency
setting cannot be set through the control panel or the remote control. All
conditions except for output frequency setting is same as INT.
EXT
The signal source is external. Outputs the amplified external input signal. Set thevoltage gain through the control panel or the remote control.
ADD
The signal source is the total of the external and the internal signal source. Set thevoltage gain for the external input signal, output voltage for the internal signal
source, output waveform, frequency, output on phase, and output off phasethrough the control panel or the remote control.

DP Series/DP Series Type R55

3. Basic Operation

Table 3-9 List of the Selectable Combinations of the AC/DC Mode and the Signal Source
Outputphase
configuration

AC/DC
mode

INT

VCA

SYNC

EXT

ADD

1P2W

AC
ACDC
DC
AC
ACDC*1DCAC
ACDC*1DC

AC-INT
ACDC-INT
DC-INT
AC-INT
ACDC-INT
AC-INT
ACDC-INT-

AC-VCA
DC-VCA
AC-VCA
AC-VCA-

AC-SYNC
ACDC-SYNC
AC-SYNC
ACDC-SYNC
AC-SYNC
ACDC-SYNC-

AC-EXT
ACDC-EXT-

AC-ADD
ACDC-ADD
-

1P3W

3P4W

Signal source*1: The DC voltage cannot be set in 1P3W or 3P4W of the ACDC mode.

Operation procedures using soft-keys

56

1.

Press the [Osc] soft-key and select [1:AC/DC].

2.

In the displayed selection box, select the desired AC/DC mode.

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

3.4 Using the Continuous Function

3.

Press the [Osc] soft-key and select [2:Source].

4.

In the displayed selection box, select the desired signal source.

Operation procedures by using shortcuts
1.

+

Switching the AC/DC mode

Press the SHIFT key to enter the shift state (the SHIFT LED illuminates). When you press the 7
key of the numeric keypad during the shift state, the AC/DC mode is switched in the following
order: AC, ACDC, DC, AC. Some modes may be skipped and cannot be selected depending on
the signal source.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

57

3. Basic Operation+2.

Switching the signal source

Press the SHIFT key to enter the shift state (the SHIFT LED illuminates). When you press the 8
key of the numeric keypad during the shift state, the signal source is switched in the following
order: INT, VCA, SYNC, EXT, ADD, INT. Some signal sources may be skipped and cannot be
selected depending on the AC/DC mode.

3.4.2 Setting the Output Range
You can select the 100 V range or 200 V range. Table 3-10 shows the setting range for each range.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------You cannot switch the output range in the output on state.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Table 3-10 The Setting Range per Output Range

SIN, CLP
ARB

100 V range−227.0 to +227.0
0.0 to 160.0
0.0 to 454.0

Setting Range
200 V range−454.0 to +454.0
0.0 to 320.0
0.0 to 908.0

Unit
V
Vrms
Vp-p

1P3W

SIN

0.0 to 320.0

0.0 to 640.0

Vrms

3P4W

SIN

0.0 to 277.2

0.0 to 554.2

Vrms

0.0 to 227.0

0.0 to 454.0

Times

Setting Item
DC voltage
Phase Voltage
AC
voltageLine
voltage

External Input Gain
Peak current limiter (positive)
Peak current limiter (negative)
RMS current limiter
Voltage Setting Limit

58

Refer to 10.13
Refer to 10.14

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

3.4 Using the Continuous Function

Operation procedures using soft-keys
1.

Press the [Osc] soft-key and select [3:Range].

2.

In the displayed selection box, select the desired output range.

Operation procedures using the RANGE key
The range is toggled between 100 V range and 200 V range every time you press the RANGE key.

3.4.3 Setting Waveforms
You can select a waveform of the internal signal source from sine wave (SIN), clipped sine wave
(CLP, three types available), and arbitrary waveform (ARB, 16 types available). See 4.6 for details
on the clipped sine wave, and 4.7 on the arbitrary waveform.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

59

3. Basic Operation-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The AC voltage setting (ACV) is common between SIN and CLP, but ARB is independent ofthese. When you switch the waveform selection among SIN, CLP, and ARB, the AC voltage
setting is also switched. The DC output voltage setting (DCV) is same regardless of the
waveform setting.
The waveform can be changed in the output on state, but the AC output voltage setting (ACV)
is also switched as described above if you switch the waveform selection between SIN, CLP,
and ARB. Set ACVs for SIN, CLP, and ARB in the output off state before you change thewaveform in the output on state.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Operation procedure
1.

Select the [Wave] item.

2.

In the displayed selection box, select the desired waveform (SIN, CLP, ARB).

3.

If you select CLP or ARB, the [Select] icon () is displayed next to it. When you hover the

cursor over the [Select] icon, the clip ratio or crest factor is displayed for the clipped sine wave,
or the arbitrary waveform data name for the arbitrary waveform. When you press the ENTER60

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

3.4 Using the Continuous Function

key, the setting window opens for the clipped sine wave or the selection window opens for thearbitrary waveform. In this window, set or select items as needed.

3.4.4 Setting the Output Voltage (Single-phase Output)
Set the AC component and DC component separately for the output voltage of the internal signal
source. For the AC component, set the output voltage in the ACV item.For the DC component, set it
inthe DCV item.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The output voltage setting is common between SIN and CLP, but ARB is independent of these.
When you switch the waveform setting among SIN, CLP, and ARB, the output voltage setting
is also switched.
In the ACDC mode, the voltage setting range limit is applied to the additional values of the ACvoltage setting (recalculated to a peak value) and the DC voltage setting. For details, see 4.1.3.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Operation procedures for setting the AC voltage
1.

Select the [ACV] item and then enter a numeric value. For how to enter values, see 3.3.5.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

61

3. Basic Operation-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Set the RMS values for the voltages of the sine wave (SIN) and the clipped sine wave (CLP)and the Peak-to-Peak value for the voltage of the arbitrary waveform (ARB).
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Operation procedures for setting the DC voltage
1.

Select the [DCV] item and then enter a numeric value. For how to enter values, see 3.3.5.

3.4.5 Setting the Output Voltage (Polyphase Output)
This section describes the operations in the balanced mode in a polyphase model and a polyphasesystem. In the balanced mode, the phase voltage and the line voltage are set for all phases at once.
To enter the balanced mode, select the [Osc] soft-key → [6: Phase Mode] to open the phase mode set
window, and select [1:Balance] in the Mode item. For details on the unbalanced mode, see 4.15.
Operation procedures for setting the phase voltage
1.

Check the icon in the output display area (see 5.1) isor single-phase three-wire system)/(single-phase three-wire model(three-phase model or three-phase system). If thedifferent icon is shown, press the [Osc] soft-key and select [5:Target Phs] → [4:All Phs]. Or
perform the Shortcut operation

62+

to switch to [All Phs].

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

3.4 Using the Continuous Function

2.

Select the [ACV] item and then enter a numeric value. For how to enter values, see 3.3.5.

Operation procedures for setting the line voltage
1.

Press the [Osc] soft-key and select [5:Target Phs] → [5:All Line]. Or perform the Shortcut
operation+

to switch to [All Line]. Check that the icon in the output display

area (see 5.1) is(single-phase three-wire model or single-phase three-wiresystem)/2.

(three-phase model or three-phase system).

Select the [ACV] item and then enter a numeric value. For how to enter values, see 3.3.5.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

63

3. Basic Operation-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The line voltage can be set only for the sine wave in the balanced mode.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

3.4.6 Setting the Output Frequency
Set the AC component frequency of the internal signal source.
Operation procedure
1.

Select the [Freq] item and follow the instructions in 3.3.5 to enter a value.

3.4.7 Setting the Output On/Off PhaseSet the phases when the output turns on/off. After the output-on operation, the voltage output isstarted from the output on phase. After the output off operation, the voltage output is completed
when it reaches the output off phase. The output off phase can be disabled. If disabled, the output isturned off immediately after the operation of output off.
Operation procedure1.

Press the [Osc] soft-key and select [4:On/Off Phs]. The output on/off phase setting window
opens.

64

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

3.4 Using the Continuous Function2.

Set the on and off phase in the [On Phase] item and [Off Phase] item respectively. If you want
to disable the off phase, select [Disable].

3.

Close the window. For how to close the window, see 3.3.4.

-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The output on/off phase setting is invalid for the Sequence and the Simulation.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

3.4.8 Turning the Output On or Off
Use the OUTPUT key to turn the output on or off. The OUTPUT LED illuminates in the output on
state.

-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------For how to turn the output on or off rapidly, see 4.21.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DP Series/DP Series Type R

65

3. Basic Operation

3.4.9 Using the Measurement Function
The measured values are displayed in the measured value area (see 5.1). The main measurement
functions of this product are shown in Table 3-11. For details of the display items of the measured
value, see 5.1.2.
Table 3-11 Main Measurement Functions
V
Vavg
Vmax
Vmin
I

Iavg
Imax

Output current averagevalue
Output current maximum
peak value

Imin

Output current minimum
peak value

Ipk-Hold

Output current peak-hold
value

P

S

66

Item
Output voltage effectivevalue
Output voltage averagevalue
Output voltage maximum
peak value
Output voltage minimum
peak value
Output current effective
value

Active power

Apparent power

Description
The effective (RMS) value of the output
voltage on the output terminal.
The average DC value of the output
voltage on the output terminal.
The maximum peak value of the output
voltage on the output terminal.
The minimum peak value of the output
voltage on the output terminal.
The effective (RMS) value of the output
current. When the line voltage display is
L1-L2/L2-L3/L3-L1, the phase current of
the L1/L2/L3 phase is displayed
respectively.
The average DC value of the output
current.
The maximum peak value of the output
current. When the line voltage display is
L1-L2/L2-L3/L3-L1, the phase current of
the L1/L2/L3 phase is displayed
respectively.
The minimum peak value of the output
current. When the line voltage display is
L1-L2/L2-L3/L3-L1, the phase current of
the L1/L2/L3 phase is displayed
respectively.
The hold value of Imax or Imin, either ofwhich the value is bigger. When the line
voltage display is L1-L2/L2-L3/L3-L1,
the phase current of the L1/L2/L3 phaseis displayed respectively.
The active power provided to the load.
The power of the phase is displayed whenin the phase voltage display. The total
power of all phases is displayed when in
the line voltage display.
[DP series Type R only]
When the reverse power flow is
occurring, the displayed value will be
negative.
The apparent power provided to the load.
The power of the phase is displayed whenin the phase voltage display. The total
power of all phases is displayed when in
the line voltage display.

Unit
Vrms
V
Vpk
Vpk
Arms

A
Apk

Apk

Apk

W

VA

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

3.4 Using the Continuous Function

Table 3-11 Main Measurement Functions (continued)
Q

Item
Reactive power

PF

Power factor

CF

Crest factor

F

Synchronization frequency

DP Series/DP Series Type R

Description
The reactive power provided to the load.
The power of the phase is displayed whenin the phase voltage display. The total
power of all phases is displayed when in
the line voltage display.
The power factor of the load. The power
factor of the phase is displayed when in
the phase voltage display in thepolyphase model and polyphase system.
It is not displayed when in the line
voltage display.
[DP series Type R only]
When the reverse power flow is
occurring, the displayed value will be
negative.
The crest factor of the output current(peak value/effective value). It is not
displayed for the line voltage display inthe polyphase model and polyphasesystem.
The measured frequency value of thesynchronization signal source when thesignal source is SYNC.

Unit
var

—

—

Hz

67

3. Basic Operation

3.4.10 Switching the Display Format (RMS/AVG/Peak) of the Measured ValueYou can switch the display format of the measured value (RMS/AVG/Peak) for the output voltage
and output current. The items which are displayed in each measuring mode are shown in Table 3-12.
Table 3-12 The Measuring Mode for the Measured Values of the Output Voltage andOutput Current
Measuring
mode
RMS
AVG
Peak

Items to be Displayed(Output Voltage, Output Current)
V, I, Ipk-Hold
Vavg, Iavg, Ipk-Hold
Vmax, Vmin, Imax, Imin, Ipk-Hold

Operation procedures using soft-keys

68

1.

Press the [Measure] soft-key and select [2:Measure]. The [Measure] window opens.

2.

Select the [Type] item. In the displayed selection box, select the desired measuring mode.

3.

Close the window. For how to close the window, see 3.3.4.

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

3.4 Using the Continuous Function

Operation procedures by using shortcuts
1.

+

Switching the display format of the measured values

Press the SHIFT key to enter the shift state (the SHIFT LED illuminates). When you press the 3
key of the numeric keypad during the shift state, the measuring mode is switched in thefollowing order: RMS, AVG, Peak, RMS. Some measuring modes may be skipped and cannot
be selected depending on the AC/DC mode.

3.4.11 Enlarge Display Letters for the Measured ValueYou can switch the measured value display mode between normal (normal) and the mode in which theletters are enlarged (simple) shown in Figure 3–14. In the Simple View mode, three types of measured
values are displayed. You can select the measured value being displayed in the Simple View mode.

Figure 3-14 The Normal View (left) and the Simple View Mode (right)

DP Series/DP Series Type R

69

3. Basic Operation-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------If the measured value display mode is changed to Peak in the Simple View mode, themaximum peak values (Vmax/Imax) are displayed instead of the voltage/current measured
value. Also, if the measured value display mode is changed to RMS/AVG from Peak, theeffective/average values are displayed instead of the maximum and minimum peak values.
If the AC/DC mode and the signal source are changed in the Simple View mode, the measured
voltage values are forced to be displayed instead of the items that are not displayed in the mode after
the change, such as the power factor or crest factor. If this operation is applied to multiple items, themeasured current value is displayed for the second item, and the current peak-hold value for the third.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Switching the measured value display mode (normal/simple)
The mode is toggled between normal and simple every time you perform the Shortcut operation with+

. You can also change the mode by following the steps below.

1.

Press the [Measure] soft-key and select [1:Mode].

2.

Select 1: Normal/2: Simple.

Selecting the measured value being displayed in the Simple View mode (procedure 1)
1.

In the Simple View mode, press the [Measure] soft-key and select [5:Disp Item]. The setting
window for display items opens.

70

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

3.4 Using the Continuous Function

2.

In the [Item1] to [Item3] items, select measured values to be displayed.

3.

Close the window. For how to close the window, see 3.3.4.

Selecting the measured value being displayed in the Simple View mode (procedure 2)
In the Simple View mode, hover the cursor over the measured value item and press the ENTER key.
The selection box for choosing display items opens.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

71

3. Basic Operation

3.4.12 Clearing the Output Current Peak-hold Value
The output current peak-hold value is the maximum absolute value of the measured output current
peak value, which is then updated appending signs and held. This held value can be cleared. Afterthe held value is cleared, it is updated with the value measured after that. The held value is cleared
when the power is turned off.
Operation procedures using soft-keys

72

1.

Press the [Measure] soft-key and select [2:Measure]. The [Measure] window opens.

2.

Move the cursor to [Exec] of the [Ipk-H Clr] item and press the ENTER key.

3.

Close the window. For how to close the window, see 3.3.4.

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

3.4 Using the Continuous Function

Operation procedures by using shortcuts
1.

+

Clearing the current peak-hold value

Press the SHIFT key to enter the shift state (the SHIFT LED illuminates). When you press the+/− key in the numeric keypad in the shift state, the output current peak-hold value is cleared.

DP Series/DP Series Type R73

3. Basic Operation

3.4.13 Switching the Target Phase of which the Measured Values are
Displayed (Polyphase Output)
You can switch the phase of which the measured values is displayed on the LCD screen in thepolyphase model and of L1 cabinet in the polyphase system. You can select the line voltage display.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Even if the line voltage display is selected, the phase voltage is displayed when Peak is
selected for the measuring mode. If L1-L2, L2-L3, or L3-L1 is selected, the maximum andminimum peak values of the phase voltage for L1, L2, or L3 is displayed respectively.
The line voltage display (RMS display) is not the line voltage value that is measured directly.
This is the value that is calculated based on the phase setting value and the measured phasevoltage value.
In the line voltage display, the measured output current value indicates the phase current. If
L1-L2, L2-L3, or L3-L1 is selected, measured values of the phase current for L1, L2, L3 isdisplayed.
In the line voltage display, the power factor and crest factor are not displayed.
In the line voltage display, the measured output power value indicates the output power of thephase when in the phase voltage display, and total output power of all phases when in the line
voltage display.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Operation procedures using soft-keys
1.

74

Press the [Measure] soft-key and select [2:Measure]. The [Measure] window opens.

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

3.4 Using the Continuous Function

2.

In the [Target Phs] item, select the phase of which the measured value is to be displayed. For
the line voltage, select L1-L2, L2-L3, or L3-L1.

3.

Close the window. For how to close the window, see 3.3.4.

Operation procedures by using shortcuts
1.

+

Switches the target phase of which the measured value is displayed

Press the SHIFT key to enter the shift state (the SHIFT LED illuminates). When you press the 2
key in the numeric keypad in the shift state, the phase is switched in the order of
L1→L2→L1-L2→L1 ... in the single-phase three-wire. In the three-phase, it is switched in theorder of L1→ L2→L3→L1-L2→L2-L3→ L3-L1→ L1 ...

DP Series/DP Series Type R

75

4. Advanced Operation
4.1

Using Limiter, Setting Limiter ······························· 78

4.2

Using Sequence Function ··································· 86

4.3

Using Power Fluctuation Testing (Simulation)
Function ························································ 118

4.4

Measuring Harmonic Current ···························· 143

4.5

Measuring Inrush Current ································· 145

4.6

Using Clipped Sine Wave ································· 147

4.7

Outputting Arbitrary Waveform ·························· 150

4.8

Using Memory Function ··································· 155

4.9

Using USB Memory Function ···························· 169

4.10 Using Monitor Function ···································· 170
4.11 Using Remote Sensing Function ························ 173
4.12 Using AGC Function ········································ 176
4.13 Using Autocal Function ···································· 179
4.14 Adjusting DC Offset ········································· 183
4.15 Using for Unbalanced Polyphase Output ············· 185
4.16 Using as DC Power Supply ······························· 187
4.17 Setting Voltage using External DC Input Signal ····· 189
4.18 Control Using External Control Function ·············· 192
4.19 Synchronizing the Output Frequency with thePower Line or the External Signal ······················ 200
4.20 Amplifying the External Signal Input ··················· 202
4.21 Turning the Output On or Off Rapidly ·················· 203
4.22 Enabling Automatic Output-On at Power-On ········· 205
4.23 Using the Emission CO2 Calculator ···················· 206
4.24 Power Unit Energization Setting (Using Under the
Restricted Rated Power) ·································· 208
4.25 Key Lock ······················································· 210
4.26 Beep ···························································· 210
4.27 Changing the Background Color and the Contrastof the Screen ·················································· 211
4.28 Restoring to the Factory Default Setting (Reset)···· 212
DP Series/DP Series Type R

77

4. Advanced Operation

4.1

Using Limiter, Setting Limiter4.1.1 Use Peak Current Limiter
Peak value of output current is limited by the peak current limiter. While the limiter is working, icon
is displayed and LIMIT LED illuminates.
Setting values of peak current limiter are variable, and kept independently for each of 100 V and 200
V ranges.
You can choose whether to make the output off or not upon the triggering of the peak current limiter.
If you choose to set the output off, specify the continuous operation time of limiter until the output
off becomes effective. Whether output off is set or not and the time setting are common regardlessof the output ranges.
For the default setting range, see 10.13.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Output current value may be limited by a value that is different from the setting value,depending on the load.
For an inductive load, overvoltage protection may be triggered due to the operation of peakcurrent limiter. Overvoltage protection may be avoided by lowering the limiter setting value
both for negative and positive values.
When the number of power units that are energized is increased or decreased based on the
power unit energization setting, the setting values of the peak current limiter are reset to thefactory default setting corresponding to the ratings output power (e.g. reset to the factory
default setting of 4.5 kVA model when only three units of 6 kVA model are in operation).
In the polyphase model and the polyphase system, the setting of the peak current limiter iscommon to all phases.
If the output off after the continuous operation of the limiter for the specified duration isenabled, the setting of output-off phase is ignored.
In the case that the peak current limiter operates when the setting value of the peak current
limiter is set as asymmetry between positive and negative in the AC mode, the DC component
is generated in the output. Although the function to remove the DC component of the output
works in the AC mode, when the peak current limiter operates intermittently, the DC
component may not be removed sufficiently, or the output waveform may be modified.
In the polyphase model, the neutral line current is not limited.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Operation procedure
1.

Push [Limiter] soft-key to select 1: Ipk Limiter (or push+). Opens the peakcurrent limiter set window.

78

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.1 Using Limiter, Setting Limiter2.

In the [+Iop]/[−Iop] item, set the peak current limiter value of positive/negative.

3.

Set the [Output OFF] item as [Enable] or [Disable]. When setting to [Enable], also set the timefrom the start of limiter operation to the output off.

4.

Close the window.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

79

4. Advanced Operation

4.1.2 Using RMS Current Limiter
Effective value of output current is limited by the RMS current limiter. While the limiter is working,icon

is displayed and LIMIT LED illuminates.

Setting values of RMS current limiter are variable, and kept independently for each of 100 V and
200 V ranges.
You can choose whether to make the output off or not upon the triggering of the RMS current
limiter. If you choose to set the output off, specify the continuous operation time of limiter until the
output off becomes effective. Whether output off is set or not and the time setting are common
regardless of the output ranges.
For the default setting range, see 10.13.
[DP series Type R only]
While the reverse power flow is occurring, the effective value of output current is not limited.
However, icon

is displayed and the LIMIT LED lights up to notify user when effective valueof output current exceeds the set limit value.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------It will take time from the limiter starts operation until the output current is restricted enough,because the RMS current limiter needs to calculate effective value. Use the peak current
limiter to limit the current quickly. For peak current limiter, see 4.1.1.
When the number of units is increased or decreased based on the power unit energization
setting, the setting is reset to the factory default setting corresponding to the capacity (e.g.
reset to the factory default setting of 4.5 kVA model when only three units of 6 kVA model arein operation).
In the polyphase model and the polyphase system, the setting of the RMS current limiter iscommon to all phases.
If the output off after the continuous operation of the limiter for the specified duration isenabled, the setting of output-off phase is ignored.
In the polyphase model, the neutral line current is not limited.
[DP series Type R only] While the reverse power flow is occurring, limiting the output current
may cause the output voltage rise and the load damaged, so the output current is not limited.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------CAUTION
For loads with very low impedance (e.g. output short circuit, etc.), the RMS current limitercannot sufficiently limit the output current and may exceed the rated current. Use within the
rated current range by checking the current measured value and using the peak current limiter
together etc.

80

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.1 Using Limiter, Setting Limiter

Operation procedure
1.

Push [Limiter] soft-key to select 2:Irms Limiter (or push I key). Opens the RMS current limiter
set window.

2.

Set the value of RMS current limiter in [Io] item.

3.

Set the [Output OFF] item as [Enable] or [Disable]. When setting to [Enable], also set the timefrom the start of limiter operation to the output off.

4.

Close the window.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

81

4. Advanced Operation

4.1.3 Using Voltage Setting Range Limit
For the Continuous function, when the signal source is INT, SYNC, or ADD, the range of the output
voltage setting value to the internal signal source can be limited. Even if trying to set a voltage thatexceeds the limit, the setting value is restricted to the limiting value. This can prevent mis-setting
when you do not want to set values outside the range.
As for the voltage setting range limiting values, each value is kept independently for the following
settings for 100 V and 200 V ranges respectively: SIN/CLP waveform in AC mode, ARB waveformin AC mode, ACDC mode, and DC mode.
In case of polyphase output, the setting of the voltage setting range limit is common to all phases,
and kept as the effective value of the phase voltage in this product. When the line voltage setting(effective value setting) is selected in balanced mode, it is converted into the effective value settingof the phase voltage according to the following formula and kept in this product.
Balanced three-phase output:

Phase voltage =1
3

× Line voltage

Balanced single-phase three-wire output:

Phase voltage =1
× Line voltage
2

The limiting value should be set using the effective value or the positive and negative peak value.
The effective value can be used only when in the AC mode and the waveform is a sine wave or aclipped sine wave. The limiting value can be set using the line voltage in polyphase output when in
AC mode and balanced mode, and the output voltage setting is a line voltage setting. In other cases,
set using the positive and negative peak values of phase voltage.
For the default setting range, see 10.14.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The voltage setting range limit is useful for the prevention of an excessive output when asetting value is rapidly increased or decreased by using the shuttle.
The limitation is applied to the additional values of the AC voltage setting (recalculated to apeak value) and the DC voltage setting.
The voltage setting range limit cannot be applied to the external signal source of EXT and ADD.
The Sequence and the Simulation function do not include the voltage setting range limiting
function.
The voltage setting range limit that does not include an output voltage already set cannot be set.
In polyphase output, the voltage setting range limit is common to all phases.
In ACDC mode, set the voltage setting range limit setting using the positive and negative peakvalues of the phase voltage regardless of the settings of the waveform, balanced/unbalanced
mode, phase voltage/line voltage.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

82

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.1 Using Limiter, Setting Limiter

Operation procedure
1.

Push [Limiter] soft-key to select 3: V/F Limiter (or push+). Opens the setting

window for the voltage/frequency setting range limit.

2.

The screen for the effective value setting or the peak value setting opens depending on thesignal source setting/output waveform settings made here. Set the voltage setting range limiting
value in the [V] item (effective value setting) and [+Vop]/[−Vop] item (peak value setting).
Effective Value Setting

3.

Peak value setting

Close the window.

4.1.4 Using Frequency Setting Range Limit
You can limit the range of the frequency setting value for the internal signal source by using thefrequency setting range limit. Even if trying to set a frequency that exceeds the limit, the setting
value is restricted to the limiting value. This can prevent mis-setting when you do not want to set
values outside the range.
The frequency setting range limiting value is common to both 100 V and 200 V ranges.
For the default setting range, see 10.14.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The frequency setting range limit is useful for the prevention of an unintended frequency
setting when a setting value is rapidly increased or decreased by using the shuttle.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DP Series/DP Series Type R

83

4. Advanced Operation

Operation procedure
1.

Push [Limiter] soft-key to select 3: V/F Limiter (or push+). Opens the setting

window for the voltage/frequency setting range limit.

2.

Set values in the [Freq Up]/[Freq Lo] item so that the upper value of the frequency setting range
limit is higher than or equal to the lower limit.

3.

84

Close the window.

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.1 Using Limiter, Setting Limiter

4.1.5 About Wattage Limiter
The wattage limiter operates when trying to output the power exceeding the rated power. When thewattage limiter operates, the output voltage is suppressed until the active power per phase is thevalue in Table 4-1 (reference value). While the limiter is working, icon

is displayed and

LIMIT LED illuminates.
[DP series Type R only]
While the reverse power flow is occurring, the wattage limiter does not operate. However, icon
is displayed and the LIMIT LED lights to notify user when the output power exceeds thevalue of wattage limiter (see Table 4-1).
When the reverse power flow satisfies one of the following condition, icon

is displayed andthe LIMIT LED flashes.
The reverse power exceeding 40% of the electric power capacity has lasted for 3 minutes.
The reverse power exceeding 40% of the electric power capacity has occupied 20% in duty
cycle.

CAUTION[DP series Type R only] If ambient temperature is 30°C or higher, do not let the reverse power
flow occur while the LIMIT LED flashing.
[DP series Type R only] Output may be shut off to protect the inside of this product if thereverse power flow exceeds specifications. Be aware that shut off in the reverse power flow may
cause voltage rise of the load.

Table 4-1 Wattage Limiter Value per Phase (Reference value, Unit: W)
Rated output
per phase

Single-phase model

Single-phase three-wire modelPower Input

Power Input

Power Input
100 V system 200 V system

Number of power units
per phase

100 V system 200 V system 100 V system 200 V system

Three-phase model

Note: Power input 100 V system is for single-phase input 170 V or less, 200 V system is for
single-phase input more than 170 V or three-phase three-wire input or three-phase four-wire
input.
Note: In DP series Type R, the rated output per phase is 9.0 kVA (Single-phase model), 4.5 kVA(Single-phase three wire model), or 3.0 kVA (Three-phase model) at maximum.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

85

4. Advanced Operation-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------If the wattage limiter operates, suppress the output wattage within the rated output power bylowering the output voltage setting value.
Active power (unit: W) is restricted by the wattage limiter, however, reactive power (unit: var)
is not restricted. Therefore, the apparent power (unit: VA) may exceed the rated power
depending on the power factor of the load. Set the output voltage so that the apparent power
does not exceed the rated power, regardless of the operation of the wattage limiter.
The value of the wattage limiter cannot be changed. To limit the output power to a value that islower than the rating, decrease the number of power units that are energized through the power
unit energization setting, or use the peak current limiter or the RMS current limiter.
When the power input voltage is single-phase input 170 V or less, the maximum output active
power of a model with the rated power of 6 kVA or higher is limited to 4.725 kW of maximum
output active power by the wattage limiter. However, for a single-phase three-wire model anda three-phase model, the maximum output active power per phase is limited to 4.725 kW/2 and4.725 kW/3.
[DP series Type R only] While the reverse power flow is occurring, the output active power is
not limited. If the limiter enabled, it raises output voltage to block the reverse power flow.
Therefore the limiter is disabled in order that the load may not be damaged by the raised
voltage.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4.2

Using Sequence Function

4.2.1 Basics
By using Sequence function, an output setting can be changed step-by-step according to the program(sequence) created beforehand. This section describes the basics for using the Sequence function.
AC/DC Mode and Signal Source
Sequence function keeps the selection of the AC/DC mode and a signal source, independently from
Continuous function/Simulation function. AC/DC mode can be selected from AC/ACDC/DC. A
signal source is fixed as INT.

86

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.2 Using Sequence Function

Keep a sequence setting
The sequence setting is kept per AC/DC mode. Every time AC/DC mode is changed, the sequence
setting that is already kept is loaded. The sequence setting is cleared when the power is turned off.
To save the setting, you need to save it in internal memory or USB memory (see 4.9).
Step
One sequence consists of a series of two or more steps. To use Sequence function, first set each step.
Step-control Parameters and intra-Step Parameters
There are the following two major types of parameters in Sequence function:
Step-control parameter
Parameter to control the flow between two or more steps. This defines duration of each stepand the next step to transition. Settings of step synchronous code and trigger output areincluded in step-control parameter for convenience.
Intra-Step parameter
Parameter to define output state in each step. This defines basic parameters such as a
waveform, frequency, and how they are changed in the step.

Icon
Step number
Step-control parameter

Intra-Step parameter

Figure 4-1 Step-control Parameters and intra-Step Parameters
Step No. 0
Step No. 0 is assigned to the stand-by state before the sequence starts. If the terminal specificationof the step other than No. 0 is End, the execution transitions to step No. 0 and enters into thestand-by state. Step Time and the Step Behavior setting of No. 0 specifies the action to transit to No.
0 at the end of a sequence.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

87

4. Advanced Operation

Step Behavior (Const, Keep, Sweep)
For the intra-Step parameter other than waveforms and phases, the following three patterns can be
set as the method to change values in the step.
Constant (Const)
Fixed to the value set in the step.
Keep
Keeping the value immediately before transitioning to the step. That is, the value is changed
depending on the status of the previous step. Although the parameter value can be set even if
the operation type setting is Keep, the parameter setting value is ignored when sequence is
executed.
Sweep
It changes linearly from the value immediately before transitioning to the value set in the step,
taking the Step Times. In other words, it reaches the setting value after the Step Time passes inthe step. The starting value is changed depending on the status of the previous step.

Step Behavior

Previous step

Next step

Previous step

Next step

Previous step

Next step
Setting
value

Keep
Const

Sweep

Settingvalue

Used as the setting
value in the next step

Keeps the final valueof the previous step

Changes from the final value ofthe previous step to the setting
value of the next step

Figure 4-2 Step Behavior-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The Step Behavior for the waveform and phase is always Constant (Const).
Keeps as many intra-Step parameter setting values as the number of phases in each step basedon the output phase configuration.
Cannot be set using line voltage in the single-phase three-wire output and three-phase output.
The rate of crest factor/clip ratio cannot be changed though a clipped sine wave can be selected
as an output waveform in Sequence function. Set these parameters beforehand using
Continuous function.
Sequence function displays the measured value in Sequence function, which is equivalent tothat of the Continuous function. However, harmonic current measurement (see 4.4) cannot be
displayed.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------88

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.2 Using Sequence Function

4.2.2 Parameters of Sequence Function
Table 4-2 shows the parameters of Sequence function. The common parameters are common to one
sequence. In Sequence function, signal source is fixed to INT. In each step, set the step-control
parameter and the intra-Step parameter. As for intra-Step parameter, the item and range that can be
set differ depending on the output range (100 V/200 V range) and output mode
(AC-INT/ACDC-INT/DC-INT) as in the case of Continuous function. This section describes
intra-Step parameters and step-control parameters separately.
Table 4-2 Parameters of Sequence Function
Commonparameter
Output range
AC/DC mode

Step-control parameter
Step Time
Jump-to step
Jump count (1 to 9999, or infinite)
Branch step
Step termination
Step sync code output (2bit)
Start Phase
Stop Phase
Trigger output

Intra-Step parameter
Frequency
WaveformPhase angle
AC phase voltage
DC voltage

Frequency (Freq), waveform (Wave), phase angle (Phase), AC phase voltage (ACV), DC
voltage (DCV)The setting for the output of each step. In polyphase model/polyphase system, AC phase voltage andphase angle can be set for each phase. In the phase angle, set the phase difference with the L1 phase.
Phase angle can also be set per step. The phase angle of L1 phase cannot be set, and is fixed as 0deg.
Step Time (Step Time)
Set the output time of that step. Unit can be selected from [s] or [ms].
Jump-to step (Jump To)
When selected, the destination step of the jump at the end of the step can be specified. By specifying
the Jump count ([Jump Cnt]), you can set up a loop to repeat the same step. After jumping for thetimes specified for one sequence, the action at the end of step follows the step termination setting.
If Jump-to is set to off, the action at the end of step follows the step termination setting.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------When the step termination is set as [Hold], the hold status is enabled before the jump.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DP Series/DP Series Type R

89

4. Advanced Operation

Jump count (Jump Cnt)
Number of times of jumps to jump to the step specified in Jump-to. This can be set when Jump-to([Jump To]) is selected. When the Jump count is set to 0, infinite times of jumps occur.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The number of times that a particular step is repeated is Jump count +1.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Branch step (Branch1, Branch2)
When the step is under execution or in the hold state, the step to transition when the branching
instruction through panel operation or CONTROL I/O is detected can be specified. There are twosystems of branch instructions (Branch1 and Branch2), and an instruction can be set for each.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Transition using branch is executed immediately after a branching instruction is detected. Step
Time, Stop Phase, and step termination setting are ignored.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Step termination (Step Term)
Specifies the action when the step completes. When [Continue] is selected, transitions to the step of
the next number. When [End] is selected, the sequence is terminated and the execution transitions tostep No. 0 and enter into the stand-by state. When [Hold] is selected, the output at the end of the stepis suspended, and the execution transitions to the step of the next number when Resume instruction
is detected.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------When [Step Term] is set to [Hold], the execution enters into hold state before jump. Jumps
when Resume instruction is detected.
When [Step Term] is set to [Hold], after the jumps repeated for the specified Jump count, theexecution transitions to the step of the next number when Resume instruction is detected inhold state.
While in the hold state due to the step termination in a step where step termination phase isenabled, the execution transitions to Jump-to step or the step of next number when Resume
instruction is detected, after the hold state is kept until Stop Phase.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Step sync code output (Code)State output to CONTROL I/O connector. Code to output while the execution of the step, which is
specified by 2-bit H/L.

90

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.2 Using Sequence Function

Start Phase (StartPhs)
Determines the phase of AC waveform of L1 phase when the step starts. The phase when a step
starts in L2 and L3 phase of polyphase model/polyphase system is the addition of the setting valueof intra-Step parameter Phase and the setting value of the step Start Phase.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Step Start Phase setting can be disabled. In that case, the phase when the phase starts becomesthe phase when the previous step ended.
In DC mode, the step Start Phase cannot be set.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Stop Phase (Stop Phs)
Determines the phase of AC waveform when the step ends. The phase when a step ends in L2 and L3
phase of polyphase model/polyphase system is the addition of the setting value of intra-Stepparameter Phase and the setting value of the step Stop Phase. When the stop phase setting is active,the execution waits for the Step Time that was set pass, and keeps the output setting until it reaches
the Stop Phase that was set, and then transitions to the next step. As the result, the actual step time islonger by one cycle at a maximum than the set Step Time. Figure 4–3 shows an example where boththe Stop Phase of the previous step and the Start Phase of the next step are set to 0°.

OPreviousÌXebstep
v

NextÌXstepebv

XebvÔ
I¹
WaitingXgbforvÊstopÒ¿phase

Step Time finished

Figure 4-3 Stop Phase-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------When the Step Behavior is set to [Sweep], output is constant while waiting for the step Stop
Phase after the Step Time passes.
Step Stop Phase setting can be disabled. In this case, when the set Step Time has passed, theexecution transitions to the next step without waiting for step Stop Phase.
In DC mode, the step Stop Phase cannot be set.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Trigger output (Trig Out)
State output to CONTROL I/O connector. This specifies whether the trigger output presents when
the step starts. Polarity and pulse width of the trigger output complies with the trigger output setting(see 4.2.5).

DP Series/DP Series Type R

91

4. Advanced Operation

4.2.3 Example of Output Using Sequence Function
As an example, consider the sequence that gradually changes DC voltage like Figure 4–4.
Set the output mode to DC-INT. Edit the sequence like Table 4-3. Parameters not included in thistable should be left as the factory default setting.

20s

Output voltage

{100V
o
dÍ
³

10s

15s

5s

Keep
Sweep

{50V

Const
Sweep

Hold

Ô

Time

0V
Step0

Step1

Step2

Step3

ì

Step0

ì

Start
Start
operation

StopStop
operation

Figure 4-4 Example of Sequence
Table 4-3 Example of Editing Sequence
Step Number
Step-control Step Time (Time)parameterJump-to (Jump To)
Step termination (Step Term)
Intra-Step
DC Voltage (DCV)
Parameter
Step Behavior

0
5s
—
—
0V
Sweep

1
20 s
OFF
Continue+100 V
Sweep

2
10 s
OFF
Continue(Optional)
Keep

3
15 s
OFF
Hold
+50 V
Const

-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Step Time and the Step Behavior of step No. 0 specifies the action after the transition to step
No. 0 at the end of a sequence.
Jump-to of step No. 0 cannot be specified. The execution always transitions to step No. 1 when
the sequence starts.
In the case that the step termination is set to [Hold] (No. 3), and when the execution is in theHold state, it transitions to step No. 0 and enters into the stand-by state if the Stop operation is
executed. If you perform Resume operation here, the execution transitions to the step of thenext number (No. 4).
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4.2.4 Process Flow in a Step
Figure 4–5 shows the process flow in one step. The transition such as Figure 4–6 occurs by branch
operation or stop operation, regardless of the flow in the step.

92

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.2 Using Sequence Function

開始
Start

Duringthe specified Step Time, output is performed according to
指定のステップ時間の間，ステップ動作種別設定に従い出力
theStep Behavior setting. When If Hold operation is executed on
します。途中でホールド操作が行われたら，リジューム操作
theway, output state is kept until Resume operation is executed.
が行われるまで出力状態を保持します。

Whenstep termination setting is Hold, output state is kept until
ステップ終端設定がホールドなら，リジューム操作が行われResumeoperation is executed.
るまで出力状態を保持します。

Ifステップ終了位相設定がオンなら，設定された終了位相に達stop phase setting is on, the output state is kept until the step
reachesthe specified Stop Phase.
するまで出力状態を保持します。

Ifジャンプ先設定がオンなら，指定のステップへ指定回数だけ
Jump-to setting is on, transitions to the specified step for the
specifiedtimes.
移行します。

ジャンプ先のTransitions
to theステップへ移行
Jump-tostep

When
not transition to the Jump-to step
ジャンプ先へ移行しないときTransitions
to the step of the next number or step No. 0, based on0
ステップ終端設定に従い，次番号ステップ又はステップNo.
thestep termination setting.
へ移行します。

（Continue，Hold）
次番号ステップへ移行
Transitions to the step of

the next number（End）
ステップNo.
0へ移行
Transitions to step
No. 0
＝シーケンス終了=Endof sequence

Figure 4-5 Process Flow in Sequence Step

When branch setting is on, the execution transitions to thespecified step according to the branch operation or the signal.

Transitions to thebranch step

When sequence stop operation is executed, the execution
transitions to step No. 0.

Transitions to step No. 0=End of sequence

Figure 4-6 Branch Operation/Stop Operation

DP Series/DP Series Type R

93

4. Advanced Operation

4.2.5 Edit a Sequence-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------A sequence being edited is kept per AC/DC mode. If AC/DC mode is changed, the edited
contents of sequence are loaded based on the change.
When the power is turned off, edited contents of the sequence are cleared, and all sequences
have the default setting values when it is started next time. To keep the edited contents ofsequence, save them in the Sequence Memory (see 4.2.8).
When the sequence is loaded from Sequence Memory, the sequence being edited at that time isdiscarded.
You can also turn the output on in the Sequence Edit View. In this case, the output will be set
to the state set in the Step No.0 when the sequence was last compiled (see 4.2.7).
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Transit to Sequence Edit View
Press the MENU key to open the root menu, then select [Sequence] (see 3.3.1). While the Sequence
Control View is displayed, if you push the [Edit] soft-key, the execution transitions to the Sequence
Edit View.

Sequence
icon

94

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.2 Using Sequence Function

Edit a sequence
1.

Push [Osc] soft-key on Sequence Edit View, then select AC/DC mode and 100 V/200 V range.
To edit the saved sequence, load the sequence (see 4.2.6).

2.

Set the parameter of each step. You can move between each step by changing [Step No.].

Step number

DP Series/DP Series Type R

95

4. Advanced Operation

3.

You can select s or ms as the unit of Step Time by selecting [Misc] soft-key → [1: TimeUnit].

4.

You can set polarity of trigger output and pulse width by selecting [Misc] soft-key → [2: Trig
Out].

96

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.2 Using Sequence Function

4.2.6 Load a Sequence-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------When the sequence is loaded, the sequence being edited at that time is discarded.
In Sequence Control View, a sequence cannot be loaded.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Load the sequence stored in the internal memory
1.

In Sequence Edit View, select [File] soft-key → [2: Recall]. Sequence Recall View is opened.

2.

In the [From] item, select [1: System].

DP Series/DP Series Type R

97

4. Advanced Operation

3.

Specify the memory number of the sequence to be loaded in [Memory No.] item, and then push
[Recall] soft-key.

4.

The confirmation window for loading the sequence opens. Select [OK]. The sequence with thespecified memory number is loaded.

98

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.2 Using Sequence Function

Load the sequence stored in the USB memory
For how to connect USB memory to this product, and how to disconnect from this product, see 4.9.
1.

In Sequence Edit View, select [File] soft-key → [2: Recall]. Sequence Recall View is opened.

2.

In the [From] item, select [2: USB].

DP Series/DP Series Type R

99

4. Advanced Operation

3.

From data list box, select the sequence to load.

4.

Push the [Recall] soft-key.

5.

The confirmation window for loading the sequence opens. Select [OK]. The specified sequence
data is loaded.

-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The number of sequence data files saved in a USB memory should be 500 or less. If thenumber of files exceeds this limit, this product cannot recognize the sequence data files in the
USB memory.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------100

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.2 Using Sequence Function

4.2.7 Execute a Sequence
The edited sequence can be executed after converted to executable program by compile operation.
Transition to Sequence Control View
When pushing [Compile] soft-key in the Sequence Edit View, the edited sequence is compiled, andthen the screen transitions to Sequence Control View. If output is turned on in the Sequence Edit
View, the output transitions to the state set in the step No.0 at the same time as compiling.

Sequence Edit View

Sequence Control View-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------If an improper setting is detected during compilation, an error message is displayed and thescreen does not transition to the Sequence Control View.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DP Series/DP Series Type R

101

4. Advanced Operation

Start/Terminate a sequence1.

If output is turned off in the Sequence Edit View, the sequence can be executed when output isturned on in the Sequence Control View. At this point, the output is in the state set in the step
No. 0. When a sequence is stopped, the2.

icon is displayed.

When pushing [Start] soft-key, the sequence is started. While the sequence is executed, icon
is displayed.

102

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.2 Using Sequence Function

3.

When [Stop] soft-key is pushed while sequence is executed, the execution transitions to the
output state that is set in the step No. 0, and then sequence is terminated. The output remainson.

-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------In the output off state, the sequence cannot be started.
Output on/off setting is not active in sequence.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Return to Sequence Edit View
If you push the [Edit] soft-key, the execution transitions back to the Sequence Edit View.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

103

4. Advanced Operation

Suspend a sequence
1.

When pushing [Hold] soft-key while a sequence is executed, the sequence is suspended. The
output state is kept while suspended. Icon

2.

is displayed.

To restart the sequence, push [Resume] soft-key. If you push [Stop] soft-key, the execution
transitions to step No. 0 and the sequence is terminated.

104

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.2 Using Sequence Function

Branch a sequence
If you push [Bran1] or [Bran2] soft-key while a sequence is executing, the execution transitions tothe branch step 1 or 2 that is set in the step being executed.

4.2.8 Save a Sequence-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------In Sequence Control View, a sequence cannot be saved.
All sequence data that are edited in each mode of AC/DC mode are saved as one memory
number/file by one save operation.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Save a sequence to internal memory
1.

In Sequence Edit View, select [File] soft-key → [1: Store]. Sequence Store View is opened.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

105

4. Advanced Operation

2.

In the [To] item, select [1: System].

3.

Specify the memory number of location to save in [Memory No.] item, and then push [Store]
soft-key.

4.

A window to confirm the save name opens. Enter the name, and then select [OK]. For how toenter a string, see 3.3.6.

106

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.2 Using Sequence Function

Save a sequence to USB memory
For how to connect USB memory to this product, and how to disconnect from this product, see 4.9.
1.

In Sequence Edit View, select [File] soft-key → [1: Store]. Sequence Store View is opened.

2.

In the [To] item, select [2: USB].

DP Series/DP Series Type R

107

4. Advanced Operation

3.

Push [New] soft-key to save for the first time. To overwrite the existing data, select the data to
be overwritten in data list box, and push [Store] soft-key.

4.

A window to confirm the store name opens. Enter the name, and then select [OK]. For how toenter a string, see 3.3.6.

-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The number of sequence data files saved in a USB memory should be 500 or less. If thenumber of files exceeds this limit, this product cannot recognize the sequence data files in the
USB memory.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------108

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.2 Using Sequence Function

4.2.9 Clear/Rename Sequence
Clear/Rename a sequence saved in internal memory
1.

In Sequence Edit View, select [File] soft-key → [1: Store]. Sequence Store View is opened.

2.

In the [To] item, select [1: System].

DP Series/DP Series Type R

109

4. Advanced Operation

3.

Specify the number of memory to be operated in [Memory No.] item.

4.

To clear, push [Clear] soft-key. Confirmation message is displayed. Select [OK]. In the cleared
number of the memory, the sequence data at factory shipment is stored.

110

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.2 Using Sequence Function

5.

To rename, push [Rename] soft-key. Rename window opens. Enter a new name and then select[OK]. For how to enter a string, see 3.3.6.

Delete/Rename a sequence saved in USB memory
For how to connect USB memory to this product, and how to disconnect from this product, see 4.9.
1.

In Sequence Edit View, select [File] soft-key → [1: Store]. Sequence Store View is opened.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

111

4. Advanced Operation

2.

In the [To] item, select [2: USB].

3.

Select the data that is the target of the operation in the data list box.

4.

To clear, push [Delete] soft-key. Confirmation message is displayed. Select [OK]. The
corresponding file in USB memory is deleted.

112

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.2 Using Sequence Function

5.

To rename, push [Rename] soft-key. Rename window opens. Enter a new name and then select[OK]. For how to enter a string, see 3.3.6.

4.2.10 Set so as the Sequence Function is Selected at Power-on
You can set so as the Sequence function is selected at power-on.
Operation procedure1.

Press the MENU key to move to the root menu, then select [System]. The system setting
window opens.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

113

4. Advanced Operation

2.

In [PwOn Mode] item, select [2: Seq].

-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------To set so as to Continuous function is selected at power-on, select [1: Cont] in [PwOn Mode]item.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4.2.11 Sequence Control by CONTROL I/O
CONTROL I/O enables to start/stop/suspend/branch a sequence and to recall the memory. For
details, see 4.18.1.

4.2.12 Screen Overview
The Sequence function view is broadly separated into the Sequence Edit View and the Sequence
Control View. It is Sequence Edit View that is displayed when sequence icon is selected from theroot menu. After pushing [Compile] soft-key in Sequence Edit View, the screen transitions to theSequence Control View.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------You cannot transition to root menu by pushing the MENU key in the Sequence Control View.
To transition to the root menu, first move to the Sequence Edit View and then push the MENU
key.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

114

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.2 Using Sequence Function

Sequence Edit View
Icon
Step number
Step-control parameter

Intra-Step parameter

Figure 4-7 Sequence Edit View

Sequence Control View (output off state/sequence stopped)
Icon
Measured Value
to be displayed

Output setting ofstep No.0

Figure 4-8 Sequence Control View (Output Off State)

Sequence Control View (output on state/sequence in execution)
Icon(HOLD while suspended)

Measured Value
to be displayed

Output setting ofexecuting step

Figure 4-9 Sequence Control View (Output On State/Sequence in Execution)

DP Series/DP Series Type R

115

4. Advanced Operation

Sequence Control View (output on state/sequence stopped)
Icon
Measured Value
to be displayed

Output setting ofstep No.0

Figure 4-10 Sequence Control View (Output On State/Sequence Stopped)

4.2.13 Change Output Parameter during Output ON
Frequency and voltage of step No.0 can be changed on Sequence Edit View and it can be used like
Continuous output function. Remote Sensing function and Autocal function can be enabled. See 4.11
and 4.13 for detail of Remote Sensing function and Autocal function.
1. Select frequency and voltage, input them in the Sequence Edit View step No.0 and turn ON output,
setting voltage will be output. Changing setting value, it will be applied soon.

Frequency setting

116

Voltage setting

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.2 Using Sequence Function

2. When pushing [Compile] soft key in the Sequence Edit View, moved to Sequence Control View.
You can check measurements in step No.0. When pushing [Start] soft-key, the sequence is started.

3. Remote Sensing function and Autocal function can be enabled in step No.0 in the Sequence Edit
View and the Sequence Control View.
■Turning on the Remote Sensing Function＋.
1. Open the AGC/Autocal set window by shortcut operation:
2. Use the [Rmt Sense] item to set the Remote sensing function to on or off.
3. Close the window.

Sequence Edit View

Sequence Control View

■Turning on the Autocal Function
1. Turn on the output.
2. Open the AGC/Autocal set window by shortcut operation:＋.
3. Use the [Rmt Sense] item to set the Remote sensing function to on or off if necessary.
4. Use the [Auto Cal] item to turn on the Autocal function. In case within operating range of Autocal
when [ON] is selected here, the calibration factor of the Autocal function is calculated, and thecalibration is started.
5. Close the window.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

117

4. Advanced Operation

Sequence Edit View

Sequence Control View-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The Remote Sensing Function or Autocal function can be set to on in the AC-INT, ACDC-INT
and DC-INT modes. However, for the AC or ACDC mode, it can be set to on only when the
waveform is a sine wave. If changing waveform to clipped sine wave or arbitrary wave when
Remote Sensing setting is ON, Remote Sensing and Autocal setting is forcibly turned off.
In ACDC mode Remote Sensing function and Autocal function cannot be enabled unless either
AC voltage setting value or DC voltage setting value is 0 V. Also when such a setting is madeby sequence memory recall, Remote Sensing and Autocal setting is forcibly turned off.
Remote Sensing and Autocal setting is turned off if changing Output function or AC/DC mode.
Turn on the setting if necessary.
If changing setting by sequence memory recall or memory clear, the screen display will bechanged, but the output will be applied after compile.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4.3

Using Power Fluctuation Testing (Simulation) Function

4.3.1 Basics
The Power fluctuation testing (Simulation) function allows you to edit and output voltage patterns
that simulate power line anomalies such as blackout, voltage rise, voltage drop, abrupt phase change,
and abrupt frequency change. This section describes the basics for using the Simulation function.
AC/DC Mode and Signal Source
Simulation function sets the AC/DC mode and a signal source, independently from Continuousfunction/Sequence function. The setting is fixed to ACDC-INT.
Keep simulation setting file
The simulation setting is cleared when the power is turned off. To save the setting, you need to saveit in internal memory or USB memory (see 4.9).

118

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.3 Using Power Fluctuation Testing (Simulation) Function

Step
The output by the Simulation function consists of six types of steps: Initial, Normal 1, Trans 1,
Abnormal, Trans 2, and Normal 2. Before the simulation starts, the DP series stands by at the Initial
Step. During the simulation, the step changes in the order of Initial, Normal 1, Trans 1, Abnormal,
Trans 2, and Normal 2. After the simulation ends, the DP series returns to the Initial Step and standsby.
Step parameter
Each parameter of Step Time, AC voltage, frequency, start phase, stop phase, trigger output, andsynchronization output can be set for each step. However, some parameters cannot be set in somesteps.
Initial Step
Initial Step is assigned to the stand-by state before the simulation starts. The DP series also moves tothe Initial Step and becomes stand-by state after the simulation ends, except when the repeat count is
specified to 0 (= infinite count).
Transition Step (Trans 1 and Trans 2)
The Step Times of Trans 1 and Trans 2 can be set to zero for simulating the abrupt voltage andphase changes. When the Step Time is set to the value other than zero, the set voltage and frequency
are swept linearly at the previous and next steps. Note that the AC voltage, frequency, start phase,and Stop Phase cannot be set in the Transition Steps.
Other issues
The Exit operation is available during the simulation. Performing the Exit operation moves tothe Initial Step. The output remains on.
You can set the repeat on/off and repeat count for the simulation. When the repeat is set to on
and the repeat count to zero (0), the testing repeats infinitely.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The Simulation function does not support the standard tests defined by organizations such as
IEC. Use this function for a preliminary testing.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DP Series/DP Series Type R

119

4. Advanced Operation

4.3.2 Simulation Function Parameters
Table 4-4 shows the parameters of Simulation function. The common parameters are common to one
simulation. In the Simulation function, the signal source is fixed to INT sine wave and the ACDC
mode to ACDC mode. When in polyphase, the balanced mode is always used. In each step, set the
step-control parameter and the intra-Step parameter. As for intra-Step parameter, the range that canbe set differ depending on the output range (100 V/200 V range) as in the case of Continuousfunction.
Table 4-4 Simulation Function Parameters
Commonparameter
Output range
AC/DC mode
(Fixed to ACDC)
Waveform(Fixed to sine
wave)

Step-control parameter

Intra-Step parameter

Step Time
Start Phase
Stop Phase
Trigger output
Step sync code output (2bit)
Repeat count (1 to 9999 or infinite)

Frequency
AC voltage

Relationship between each step and settable Step parameters

V1, F1

V1, F1
電圧・周波数はVoltageand
正常1と同じfrequency
aresame asNormal 1

V3, F3

Trigger
トリガ出力
outputSync
output
同期出力

Normal1
定常1

Trans1
移行1Abnormal
異常Trans2
移行2Normal2
定常2

T1

T2

T3

T4

T5

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

Figure 4-11 Simulation Function Steps120

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.3 Using Power Fluctuation Testing (Simulation) Function

Table 4-5 Simulation Function Steps and Settable Step Parameters
Step
Step time
AC voltage
Frequency
Start phase
Stop Phase

Initial—V0F0ON/OFF
P0
ON/OFF
Q0—

Normal 1
T1
V1
F1
ON/OFF
P1
ON/OFF
Q1
ON/OFF

Trans 1
T2————

Trigger output
ON/OFF
Sync code
S0
S1
S2
outputNote: "—" means that this parameter cannot be set.

Abnormal
T3
V3
F3
ON/OFF
P3
ON/OFF
Q3
ON/OFF

Trans 2
T4——

ON/OFF

Normal 2
T5—(=V1)—(=F1)
ON/OFF
P5
ON/OFF
Q5
ON/OFF

S3

S4

S5

—
—

Start phase (Start Phs)
ON or OFF can be selected for the start phase. When ON is selected, the step starts at the specified
start phase. When OFF is selected, the step starts at the phase in which the previous step ended.
When selecting ON, a numerical entry box in which you can specify the start phase opens.
The start phase can be set at the Normal 1, Normal 2, and Abnormal steps. For other steps, the startphase is fixed to OFF and cannot be specified.
Stop phase (Stop Phs)
ON or OFF can be selected for the stop phase. When ON is selected, the step ends at the specified
stop phase. If the phase is not the specified stop phase after the Step Time elapsed, the execution
continues the output of that step until reaching the specified Stop Phase, then performs the next step.
When OFF is selected, the step transitions to the next step when the Step Time has elapsed
regardless of the phase. When selecting ON, a numerical entry box in which you can specify the stop
phase opens.
The stop phase can be set at the Normal 1, Normal 2, and Abnormal steps. For other steps, the stop
phase is fixed to OFF and cannot be specified.
Trigger output (Trig Out)
State output to CONTROL I/O connector. This specifies whether the trigger output presents when
the step starts. Polarity and pulse width of the trigger output complies with the trigger output setting(see 4.3.5). At the Initial Step, the trigger output cannot be specified and thus no trigger is output.
Step sync code output (Code)State output to CONTROL I/O connector. Code to output while the execution of the step, which is
specified by 2-bit H/L. The step synchronization code can be specified also at the Initial Step.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

121

4. Advanced Operation

Repeat (Repeat)
You can set to repeat the simulation in a series from the Normal 1 step to the Normal 2 step. Specify
the ON or OFF of repeat and the repeat count. When Repeat is set to ON, the simulation repeats forthe specified count. The simulation in a series is repeated for the repeat count + 1. Setting the repeat
count to zero (0) means an infinite count. When Repeat is set to OFF, the DP series executes thesimulation only once and finishes it without performing the repeat operation.

4.3.3 Output Examples Using Simulation Function
Voltage dip simulation
In this simulation, the 50 Hz 100 V power source repeats a 70% voltage dip for 0.5 seconds threetimes at 10-second intervals as shown in Figure 4–12. For this case, set so that the total of Normal 1
and Normal 2 Step Times becomes 10 seconds and set the repeat count to 3. Set the Trans 1 andTrans 2 Step Times to zero (Table 4-6).

5 second
5秒

ディップ時
At
dipping

At 正常時normal

70 V

100 V

0.5秒
0.5
second

周波数: 50 Hz
Frequency:
50Hz

5 second
5秒

Repeat3 times
3回繰り返しFigure 4-12 Voltage Dip Simulation Example
Table 4-6 Voltage Dip Simulation Edit Example
Step
Step Time
AC voltage
Frequency
Start phase
Stop Phase
Repeat count122

Initial
—
100 V
50 Hz
OFF
OFF
2 times

Normal 1
5s
100 V
50 Hz
OFF
OFF

Trans 10s————

Abnormal
0.5 s
70 V
50 Hz
OFF
OFF

Trans 20s————

Normal 2
5s
—
—
OFF
OFF

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.3 Using Power Fluctuation Testing (Simulation) Function

Voltage change simulation
In this simulation, the 50 Hz 100 V power source repeats the voltage change three times at
10-second intervals, while the voltage drops to 70% and then linearly recovers in 0.5 seconds during
one cycle as shown in Figure 4–13. For this case, set so that the total of Normal 1 and Normal 2 Step
Times becomes 10 seconds and set the repeat count to 3. Set the Trans 1 Step Time to zero (Table
4-7).

At 正常時normal

At低下時
drop At
電圧
voltage
70 V 上昇時
rise

55秒
sec

0.02秒
0.02 sec

0.5
sec
0.5秒

Frequency:50Hz
周波数: 50 Hz

100 V

55秒
sec

3回繰り返しRepeat3 timesFigure 4-13 Voltage Change Simulation Example

Table 4-7 Voltage Change Simulation Edit Example
Step
Step Time
AC voltage
Frequency
Start phase
Stop Phase
Repeat countInitial
—
100 V
50 Hz
OFF
OFF
2 times

DP Series/DP Series Type R

Normal 1
5s
100 V
50 Hz
OFF
OFF

Trans 10s————

Abnormal
0.02 s
70 V
50 Hz
OFF
OFF

Trans 2
0.5 s
—
—
—
—

Normal 2
5s
—
—
OFF
OFF

123

4. Advanced Operation

4.3.4 Process Flow in a Step
Figure 4–14 shows the process flow in one step. The End operation causes the transition as shown in
Figure 4–15.
Start
開始

Ifステップ開始位相設定がオンなら，設定された開始位相から
the Start Phase is set to ON, the output starts with the set start phase.

出力を開始します。

Duringthe specified Step Time, output is performed according to the setting.
指定されたステップ時間の間，設定に従い出力します。

Ifステップ終了位相設定がオンなら，設定された終了位相に達stop phase setting is on, the output state is kept until the step reaches the
specified
Stop Phase.
するまで出力状態を保持します。

Transitions
to the next step
次ステップへ移行

Figure 4-14 Process Flow through Simulation Steps

When
simulation stop operation is executed, the execution transitions to Initial
電源変動試験終了操作が行われたら，初期ステップへ移行し
Step.
ます。

Transitions to the Initial Step
初期ステップへ移行= End of simulation＝電源変動試験終了

Figure 4-15 Stop Operation

4.3.5 Editing Simulation-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------When the power is turned off, edited contents of the simulation are cleared, and all simulations
have the default setting values when it is started next time. To keep the edited contents ofsimulation, save them in the Simulation Memory (see 4.3.8).
When a simulation is loaded from memory, the simulation you are editing is discarded.
You can also turn on output on the Simulation Edit View. In this case, the output will be set tothe state set in the initial step when Power Fluctuation Testing was last compiled (see 4.3.7).
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

124

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.3 Using Power Fluctuation Testing (Simulation) Function

Transition to Simulation Edit View
Press the MENU key to open the root menu, then select [Simulation] (see 3.3.1). While theSimulation Control View is displayed, if you push the [Edit] soft-key, the execution transitions to the
Simulation Edit View.

Simulation
icon

Creating (editing) a simulation
1.

In the Simulation Edit View, press the [Osc] soft-key, and then select 100 V or 200 V range. To
create a new simulation from an existing one, load the existing one (see 4.3.6).

2.

Set the parameter of each step. You can move between each step by changing [Step] item.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

125

4. Advanced Operation

3.

You can select s or ms as the unit of Step Time by selecting [Misc] soft-key → [1: TimeUnit].

4.

You can set polarity of trigger output and pulse width by selecting [Misc] soft-key → [2: Trig
Out].

5.

126

Press the [Clear] soft-key to clear all the steps you are editing and return to the factory default.

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.3 Using Power Fluctuation Testing (Simulation) Function

4.3.6 Loading a Simulation-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------When a simulation is loaded, the simulation you are editing is discarded.
Simulation cannot be loaded in the Simulation Control View.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Load the simulation stored in the internal memory
1.

In Simulation Edit View, select [File] soft-key → [2: Recall]. The Simulation Recall View opens.

2.

In the [From] item, select [1: System].

DP Series/DP Series Type R

127

4. Advanced Operation

3.

Specify the memory number of simulation to be loaded in [Memory No.] item, and then push
[Recall] soft-key.

4.

The confirmation window for loading the simulation opens. Select [OK]. The simulation withthe specified memory number is loaded.

Load the simulation stored in the USB memory
For how to connect USB memory to this product, and how to disconnect from this product, see 4.9.

128

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.3 Using Power Fluctuation Testing (Simulation) Function

1.

In Simulation Edit View, select [File] soft-key → [2: Recall]. The Simulation Recall View opens.

2.

In the [From] item, select [2: USB].

3.

In the data list box, select the simulation to load.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

129

4. Advanced Operation

4.

Push the [Recall] soft-key.

5.

The confirmation window for loading the simulation opens. Select [OK]. The specified
simulation data is loaded.

-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The number of simulation data files saved in a USB memory should be 500 or less. If thenumber of files exceeds this limit, this product cannot recognize the simulation data files in the
USB memory.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4.3.7 Executing Simulation
The edited simulation can be executed after converted to executable program by compile operation.
Transition to Simulation Edit View
When pushing [Compile] soft-key in the Simulation Edit View, the edited power fluctuation iscompiled, and then the screen transitions to Simulation Control View. If output is turned on in the
Simulation Edit View, the output transitions to the state set in the initial step, at the same time ascompiling.

130

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.3 Using Power Fluctuation Testing (Simulation) Function-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------If an improper setting is detected during compilation, an error message is displayed and thescreen does not transition to the Simulation Control View.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Starting/ending a simulation
1.

If output is turned off in the Simulation Edit View, the Power Fluctuation Test can be executed
when output is turned on in the Simulation Control View. At this point, the output is in the state
set in the Initial Step. When a simulation is stopped, the2.

icon is displayed.

Press the [Start] soft-key to start the simulation. While the simulation is executed, icon
is displayed.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

131

4. Advanced Operation

3.

When [Stop] soft-key is pushed while simulation is executed, the execution transitions to the
output that is set in the Initial Step, and then simulation is terminated.

-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------In the output off state, the simulation cannot be started.
The output on/off phase setting is invalid for the Simulation.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Returning to Simulation Edit View
If you push the [Edit] soft-key, the execution transitions back to the Simulation Edit View.

4.3.8 Saving Simulation-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Simulation cannot be saved in the Simulation Control View.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Saving the simulation in the internal memory
1.

In the Simulation Edit View, press the select the [File] soft-key - [1: Store]. The Simulation
Store View opens.

132

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.3 Using Power Fluctuation Testing (Simulation) Function

2.

In the [To] item, select [1: System].

3.

Specify the memory number of location to save in [Memory No.] item, and then push [Store]
soft-key.

4.

A window to confirm the save name opens. Enter the name, and then select [OK]. For how toenter a string, see 3.3.6.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

133

4. Advanced Operation

Saving the simulation in the USB memory
For how to connect USB memory to this product, and how to disconnect from this product, see 4.9.
1.

In the Simulation Edit View, press the select the [File] soft-key - [1: Store]. The Simulation
Store View opens.

2.

134

In the [To] item, select [2: USB].

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.3 Using Power Fluctuation Testing (Simulation) Function

3.

Push [New] soft-key to save for the first time. To overwrite the existing data, select the data to
be overwritten in data list box, and push [Store] soft-key.

4.

A window to confirm the save name opens. Enter the name, and then select [OK]. For how toenter a string, see 3.3.6.

-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The number of simulation data files saved in a USB memory should be 500 or less. If thenumber of files exceeds this limit, this product cannot recognize the simulation data files in the
USB memory.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DP Series/DP Series Type R

135

4. Advanced Operation

4.3.9 Clear/Rename Simulation
Clearing/renaming a simulation saved in internal memory
1.

In the Simulation Edit View, press the select the [File] soft-key - [1: Store]. The Simulation
Store View opens.

2.

136

In the [To] item, select [1: System].

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.3 Using Power Fluctuation Testing (Simulation) Function3.

Set the number of memory to be operated in [Memory No.] item.

4.

To clear, push [Clear] soft-key. Confirmation message is displayed. Select [OK]. In the cleared
number of the memory, the simulation data at factory shipment is stored.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

137

4. Advanced Operation

5.

To rename, push [Rename] soft-key. Rename window opens. Enter a new name and then select[OK]. For how to enter a string, see 3.3.6.

Erasing/renaming a simulation saved in USB memory
For how to connect USB memory to this product, and how to disconnect from this product, see 4.9.
1.

In the Simulation Edit View, press the select the [File] soft-key - [1: Store]. The Simulation
Store View opens.

138

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.3 Using Power Fluctuation Testing (Simulation) Function

2.

In the [To] item, select [2: USB].

3.

Select the data that is the target of the operation in the data list box.

4.

To clear, push [Delete] soft-key. Confirmation message is displayed. Select [OK]. The
corresponding file in USB memory is deleted.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

139

4. Advanced Operation

5.

To rename, push [Rename] soft-key. Rename window opens. Enter a new name and then select[OK]. For how to enter a string, see 3.3.6.

4.3.10 Set so as the Simulation Function is Selected at Power-on
You can set so as the Simulation function is selected at power-on.
Operation procedure1.

Press the MENU key to move to the root menu, then select [System]. The system setting
window opens.

140

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.3 Using Power Fluctuation Testing (Simulation) Function

2.

In [PwOn Mode] item, Select [3: Sim].

-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------To set so as to Continuous function is selected at power-on, select [1: Cont] in [PwOn Mode]item.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4.3.11 Simulation Control by CONTROL I/O
CONTROL I/O enables to start/stop a simulation and to recall the memory. For details, see 4.18.1.

4.3.12 Screen Overview
The Simulation function screen is broadly divided to the Simulation Edit View and the Simulation
Control View. The Simulation Edit View opens when you select the power fluctuation testing(Simulation) icon from the root menu. After pushing [Compile] soft-key in Simulation Edit View,
the screen transitions to the Simulation Control View.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------You cannot transition to root menu by pushing the MENU key in the Simulation Control View.
To transition to the root menu, first move to the Simulation Edit View and then push the
MENU key.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DP Series/DP Series Type R

141

4. Advanced Operation

Simulation Edit View
Icon
Step
explanation
diagram
RepeatStepselection
Step parameter

Figure 4-16 Simulation Edit View

Simulation Control View (output off state, simulation stopped)
Icon

Measured Value
to be displayed

Output settingof Initial Step

Figure 4-17 Simulation Control View (Output Off State, Simulation Stopped)

Simulation Control View (output on state, simulation running)
Icon

Measured Value
to be displayed

Output setting ofexecuting step

Figure 4-18 Simulation Control View (Output On State, Simulation Running)

142

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.4 Measuring Harmonic Current

Simulation Control View (output on state, simulation stopped)
Icon

Measured Value
to be displayed

Output settingof Initial Step

Figure 4-19 Simulation Control View (Output On State, Simulation Stopped)

4.4

Measuring Harmonic Current

4.4.1 Harmonic current
Some electric devices of AC power input have its input current waveform greatly distorted from thesine wave. When the power input section uses a capacitor input type rectifier circuit, the input
current typically distorts as shown in Figure 4–20. A waveform distorted like this contains many
harmonic components. If a current with many harmonic components is supplied to the power line inhigh volume, the line voltage is distorted, causing problems such as malfunction of devices andoverheated transformer which may result in accidents.

Current
電流
Voltage
電圧

Figure 4-20 Current Waveform Containing Many Harmonic Components

DP Series/DP Series Type R

143

4. Advanced Operation

4.4.2 Basics
Harmonic current measurement function is available only for the Continuous function, AC-INT, andset frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
The harmonic current components up to order 40 are displayed as the RMS and a percentage tofundamental wave component.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The Harmonic current measurement function does not support the standard tests defined byorganizations such as IEC. Use this function for a preliminary testing.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4.4.3 Measured Value Display Method
Operation procedure1.

In the Continuous function, select the [Measure] soft-key → [4: Harmonic].

2.

The view opens populated with the measured harmonic components of order 1 to 10.

144

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.5 Measuring Inrush Current

3.

Press the [Next] soft-key to display the measured values for order 11 to 20. Press the [Prev]
soft-key to return to the original view. Switch the view in the same manner for the measured
values over order 21.

4.

4.5

Press the CANCEL key to return to the Continuous function view.

Measuring Inrush Current

4.5.1 Inrush Current
On an electric device using a capacitor input type rectifier circuit for power input, an excessive
current in comparison to the Normal state may flow for a short period of time immediately after thestart of power supply. This current is called inrush current. If such a big current flows to the powerline, the supply voltage may drop due to the impedance of the power line. Therefore, the inrush
current is restricted below a certain level in some standards.
Figure 4–21 shows the inrush current waveform of a small electric drill. The inrush current flows at
14 A peak, which is about four times of the rated current of 3.5 A.

Voltage
電圧100V/div

Current
電流10A/div

Figure 4-21 Inrush Current Example

DP Series/DP Series Type R

145

4. Advanced Operation

It is necessary for an electric device with a large inrush current to use a power source with asufficient current supplying capability. With a power source that cannot supply a sufficient inrush
current, some electric devices may not start as they are not supplied with necessary power.
This product has the ability to supply peak current up to four times of the RMS rating. You canmeasure the maximum inrush current value using the current peak-hold function of the product.

4.5.2 Basics
Output current peak-hold function holds either a positive or negative peak value, whichever islarger in absolute value.
Current peak-hold value is displayed in all of the Average, RMS, and Peak measurement viewsin the Normal View.
Clearing function for the current peak-hold value is provided. The clear operation clears thecurrent peak-hold value (all phases) to 0 Apk.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The peak hold value starts to update again immediately after the clear operation. The clear
operation may not turn the current peak-hold value to 0 Apk even when no current is being
output, because of noise or other reasons.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4.5.3 Measurement Method
Operation procedure1.

Before turning on the output, clear the current peak-hold value. Following two methods areavailable.
(a) Shortcut operation:+(b) Select the [Measure] soft-key → [2: Measure]. Hover the cursor over [Exec] of the [Ipk-H
Clr] item and press the ENTER key.

146

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.6 Using Clipped Sine Wave2.

Turn on the power switch of the object to be measured.

3.

Turn on the output.

4.

Read current peak-hold value (Ipk-Hold). This is the maximum inrush current value.

4.5.4 Measurement Tips
You can see the difference among inrush currents at each power-on phase by changing thephase setting at output on (see 3.4.7) before turning on the output.
The object inrush current cannot be measured correctly when the maximum peak current
exceeds the one that can be supplied by this product or the peak current limiter is activated.
Correct peak value measurement may not be accomplished for a very small load impedance,such as when there is a short at the output terminal.

4.6

Using Clipped Sine Wave

Clipped sine wave is the waveform that has its sine wave peak clipped as shown in Figure 4–22. This
product can select the clipped sine wave as the output waveform.
Original sine
もとの正弦波wave

Clipped
クリップ
sine
正弦波
wave

Figure 4-22 Clipped Sine Wave

The depth of clip is set using the crest factor or clip ratio. Each of them is defined by the following
expression. The clip ratio is set in percentage.
Crest factor = Peak value/RMS value
Clip ratio = Clipped sine wave peak value/Original sine wave peak value
As shown in Table 4-8, the output voltage setting method differs depending on the clip depth setting
method. Therefore, a clip ratio less than 100% makes the output voltage smaller than the setting.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

147

4. Advanced Operation

Table 4-8 Different Output Voltage Settings Depending on Clip Depth Setting Method
Clip Depth Setting Method
Crest factor
Clip ratio

Output Voltage Setting Method
Sets the RMS of the clipped waveform
Sets the RMS of the sine wave before clipping-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------When the clipped sine wave is output in the AC mode, the clip of the output waveform may betilted by the DC component remove function in the AC mode. To avoid this, switch to the
ACDC mode.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Operation procedure1.

In the [Wave] item, select [CLP].

2.

Move the cursor to [Select], then select it. The clipped sine wave setting window opens.

148

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.6 Using Clipped Sine Wave

3.

In the [No.] item, select the clipped sine wave to load.

4.

In the [Type] item, select [1: Clip] (clip ratio) or [2: CF] (crest factor).

5.

In the [CF] (or [Clip]) item, enter the crest factor (or clip ratio).

DP Series/DP Series Type R

149

4. Advanced Operation

6.

To save the set content into memory, move the cursor to [Save], then press the ENTER key.

7.

Move the cursor to [Close], then press the ENTER key. The clipped sine wave setting windowcloses.

-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Executing [Save] saves all the settings from CLP1 to CLP3 into the internal memory.
Settings not saved in the internal memory are lost when the power is turned off.
The clip ratio setting value and the crest factor setting value are held independently of eachother. The setting value switch as the Type is changed. Each setting value is saved per
waveform when the settings are saved into the internal memory.
The clipped sine wave memory cannot be cleared (to the factory defaults). Manually set to thefactory default settings of Clip = 100%, CF = 1.41, Type = Clip, then save them.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4.7

Outputting Arbitrary Waveform

4.7.1 Basics
Arbitrary waveform can be selected as the output waveform with this product. Using the control
software Wave Designer in the attached CD-ROM, you can create, edit, and transfer arbitrary
waveforms to this product's internal memory through the USB interface. Alternatively, you cancreate and save the arbitrary waveform data in a USB memory and then transfer it to the internal
memory of this product through this product's panel operation. Up to 16 types of arbitrary
waveforms can be saved in the internal memory. For Wave Designer, see the instruction manual of
the control software.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Arbitrary waveform cannot be created and edited through the panel operation of this product.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

150

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.7 Outputting Arbitrary Waveform

4.7.2 Arbitrary Waveform Creation Procedure
See the instruction manual of the control software.

CAUTION
When outputting an arbitrary waveform in the polyphase model, pay attention not to allow
currents over the maximum current per phase to flow through the N terminal which is an output
terminal (see 10.5 and 10.6).

4.7.3 Arbitrary Waveform Creation Example
See the instruction manual of the control software.

4.7.4 Transferring Arbitrary Waveform
Transfer procedure using Wave Designer
See the instruction manual of the control software.
Transfer procedure using USB memory
1.

Save the waveform data file (extension ARB) created with Wave Designer, the control softwarein the attached CD-ROM, to the NF_TOOL\NF_DP\ARB_DATA folder of the USB memory.

-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------This product does not support the double-byte characters (e.g. kanji, hiragana). The file nameshould consist of one byte alphanumeric characters.
When the NF_TOOL\NF_DP\ARB_DATA folder does not exist in your USB memory, firstconnect the memory to this product. The NF_TOOL folder is automatically created containing
sub folders within it.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2.

Connect the USB memory that has the waveform data to this product.

3.

Press the MEMORY key, or press the MENU key to move to the root menu and then select[Memory], to move to the Memory View. Select ARB Copy.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

151

4. Advanced Operation

4.

In the [Direction] item, select [2: USB→SYS].

5.

In the [Memory No.] item, specify the transfer destination internal memory number.

6.

From the data list box, select the arbitrary waveform to transfer.

152

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.7 Outputting Arbitrary Waveform

7.

Push the Copy soft-key. The [Copy] window opens.

8.

In the [Name] item, enter the arbitrary waveform data name. Or, leave it as populated which issame as the file name in the USB memory.

9.

Move the cursor to [OK], then press the ENTER key. The window is closed.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

153

4. Advanced Operation

4.7.5 Outputting Arbitrary Waveform
Operation Method
1.

In the [Wave] item, select [ARB].

2.

Move the cursor to [Select], then select it. The setting window for the arbitrary waveform opens.

3.

From the data list box, select the arbitrary waveform to output.

154

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.8 Using Memory Function

4.

Move the cursor to [Close], then press the ENTER key. The arbitrary waveform setting windowcloses.

5.

Set the frequency and output voltage. Turn on the output. Set the arbitrary waveform output
voltage in the [ACV] item using Peak-to-Peak value.

-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ACV is the setting relative to the full scale amplitude of the arbitrary waveform data. Whenthe arbitrary waveform data amplitude is not at full scale, the output voltage amplitude
becomes smaller than the ACV setting.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4.8

Using Memory Function

Using the Memory function, you can access this product's internal memory and USB memory tosave, load, clear, and rename the basic setting, arbitrary waveform, sequence, and simulation.
Opening the Memory View
1.

Press the MENU key to move to the root menu, then select [Memory] (or press the MEMORY
key on the Continuous function screen).

DP Series/DP Series Type R

155

4. Advanced Operation

2.

The Memory View opens.

4.8.1 Basic Setting Memory
The Basic Setting Memory collectively stores the output-related settings in the Continuous function(e.g. AC/DC mode, signal source, output range, AC setting, DC setting, current limiter, setting range
limit). User is required to perform some operations to save these settings into the Basic Setting
Memory. Both the internal and USB memories can be selected as the Basic Setting Memory.
There are 31 internal Basic Setting Memories for each output phase configuration from No. 0 to
No. 30. The memory No. 0 stores the factory defaults. The internal memory No. 1 settings areloaded at power-on of this product. User can save the settings to the memories from No. 1 to No. 30.
Clearing a Basic Setting Memory resets it to the factory defaults (same as the one of No. 0).
Clearing a Basic Setting Memory in the USB memory deletes the applicable file in the USB
memory.
For the set content saved in the Basic Setting Memory and factory defaults, see 10.24.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The Basic Setting Memory content cannot be copied directly between the internal and USB
memories. To copy them, load them first, then save to a new destination.
No overwrite confirmation message is displayed when you attempt to save under the same
name as for the data that exists on the USB memory.
The number of basic setting data files saved in a USB memory should be 500 or less. If thenumber of files exceeds this limit, this product cannot recognize the basic setting data files in
the USB memory.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

156

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.8 Using Memory Function

Saving to a Basic Setting Memory (how to save the output-related settings in theContinuous function)
1.

Press the MEMORY key on the Continuous function screen or select [Memory] from the root
menu to move to the Memory View.

2.

Select Setting Store.

3.

For the [To] item, select the destination [1: System] (internal memory) or [2: USB] (USBmemory).

4.

Specify the destination.
(a) For the internal memory, specify the destination memory number in the [Memory No.] item,
then press the [Store] soft-key.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

157

4. Advanced Operation(b) In the case of USB memory, push [New] soft-key to save for the first time. To overwrite theexisting data, select the data to be overwritten in data list box, and push [Store] soft-key.

Internal memory5.

USB memory

A window to confirm the save name opens. Enter the name, and then select [OK]. For how toenter a string, see 3.3.6.

Loading from a Basic Setting Memory1.

158

In the Memory View, select [Setting Recall].

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.8 Using Memory Function

2.

In the [From] item, select the source [1: System] (internal memory) or [2: USB] (USB memory).

3.

Specify the data to load.
(a) For the internal memory, specify the memory number in the [Memory No.] item, then press
the [Recall] soft-key.
(b) For the USB memory, in the data list box, select the data to load, then press the [Recall]soft-key.

Internal memory
4.

USB memory

In the confirmation window that opens, select [OK].

DP Series/DP Series Type R

159

4. Advanced Operation

Clearing, erasing, or renaming a Basic Setting Memory
1.

In the Memory View, select [Setting Store].

2.

In the [To] item, select the object to operate [1: System] (internal memory) or [2: USB] (USBmemory).

3.

Specify the data to operate.
(a) For the internal memory, specify the memory number in the [Memory No.] item.
(b) For the USB memory, in the data list box, select the data.

Internal memory160

USB memory
PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.8 Using Memory Function

4.

To clear/delete, push [Clear]/[Delete] soft-key. Confirmation message is displayed. Select [OK].
Clearing the internal memory resets the data to the factory default (same as the one of theinternal memory No. 0). Erasing the basic setting data in the USB memory deletes theapplicable file.

5.

To rename, push [Rename] soft-key. Rename window opens. Enter a new name and then select[OK]. For how to enter a string, see 3.3.6.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

161

4. Advanced Operation

Loading the factory defaults
1.

In the Memory View, select [Setting Recall].

2.

In the [From] item, select [System].

3.

Push the [Factory] soft-key. In the confirmation window that opens, select [OK]. The factory
default basic setting data are loaded.

162

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.8 Using Memory Function

4.8.2 Arbitrary Waveform Memory
The user-created arbitrary waveform data can be saved into the Arbitrary Waveform Memory.
Both the internal and USB memories can be selected as the Arbitrary Waveform Memory. Creationof arbitrary waveform data and saving it to the Arbitrary Waveform Memory are performed using
Wave Designer, the control software in the attached CD-ROM. The Memory View enables you tocopy the arbitrary waveform data between the internal and USB memories, and clear/rename the
Arbitrary Waveform Memory.
The internal memory has 16 Arbitrary Waveform Memories from No. 1 to No. 16. In the factory
default, memories from No. 1 to No. 8 are for triangle wave and from No. 9 to No. 16 for squarewave. Clearing an Arbitrary Waveform Memory resets its data to the factory default.
Inside the USB memory, the NF_TOOL\NF_DP\ARB_DATA folder is the Arbitrary Waveform
Memory.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Inside the USB memory, the location that stores the arbitrary waveform data is the
NF_TOOL\NF_DP\ARB_DATA folder.
The number of arbitrary waveform data files saved in a USB memory should be 500 or less. If
the number of files exceeds this limit, this product cannot recognize the arbitrary waveform
data files in the USB memory.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Copying the arbitrary waveform data (from internal memory to USB memory)
The paragraphs below describe how to copy the arbitrary waveform data from the internal memory
to the USB memory. For how to copy from the USB memory to the internal memory, see 4.7.4.
1.

In the Memory View, select [ARB Copy].

DP Series/DP Series Type R

163

4. Advanced Operation

2.

In the [Direction] item, select [SYS→ USB].

3.

From the data list box, select the arbitrary waveform to copy.

4.

Push the [Copy] soft-key. A window to confirm the save name opens. Enter the name. Select[OK] to copy. For how to enter a string, see 3.3.6.

164

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.8 Using Memory Function-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------When the data is copied to the USB memory, any existing file with the same name in the
NF_TOOL\NF_DP\ARB_DATA folder is overwritten. No overwrite confirmation message isdisplayed.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Clearing, erasing, or renaming an Arbitrary Waveform Memory
1.

In the Memory View, select [ARB Copy].

2.

In the [Direction] item, select the object to operate.
SYS→ USB: Selects the internal memory as the target of the operation.
USB→ SYS: Selects the USB memory as the target of the operation.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

165

4. Advanced Operation3.

Select the data that is the target of the operation in the data list box.

Internal memory
4.

USB memory

To clear/delete, push [Clear]/[Delete] soft-key. Confirmation message is displayed. Select [OK].
Clearing the internal Arbitrary Waveform Memory resets the data to triangle wave for memories
from No. 1 to No. 8 and to square wave for memories from No. 9 to No. 16. Erasing an
Arbitrary Waveform Memory in the USB memory deletes the applicable arbitrary waveform
data file.

5.

To rename, push [Rename] soft-key. Rename window opens. Enter a new name and then select[OK]. For how to enter a string, see 3.3.6.

166

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.8 Using Memory Function-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------A file cannot be renamed in the USB memory if a file with the same name exists in the
NF_TOOL\NF_DP\ARB_DATA folder. An error message is displayed.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4.8.3 Sequence Memory
The user-created sequence can be saved into the Sequence Memory.
Both the internal and USB memories can be selected as the Sequence Memory. Creation and savingof a sequence are performed using the sequence menu (see 4.2) or the control software in theattached CD-ROM. For the content saved in the Sequence Memory, see Table 4-9.
The internal memory has 5 Sequence Memories from No. 1 to No. 5.
Table 4-9 Content Saved in Sequence Memory
Setting Item
Output range selection
Output mode selection
Parameters of Sequence Function

Factory default setting
100 V
AC-INT
Refer to 4.28

SEQ Store
In the Memory View, select [SEQ Store] to change to the Sequence Save View as below, allowing
you to save, clear, and rename the sequence. For the operation method, see 4.2.8 and 4.2.9.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

167

4. Advanced Operation

SEQ Recall
In the Memory View, select [SEQ Recall] to change to the Sequence Recall View as below, allowing
you to load the sequence. For the operation method, see 4.2.6.

4.8.4 Simulation Memory
The user-created simulation can be saved in the Simulation Memory.
Both the internal and USB memories can be selected as the Simulation Memory. Creation andsaving of a simulation are performed using the simulation menu (see 4.3) or the control software in
the attached CD-ROM. For the content saved in the Simulation Memory, see Table 4-10.
The internal memory has 5 Simulation Memories from No. 1 to No. 5.
Table 4-10 Content Saved in Simulation Memory
Setting Item
Output range selection
Simulation Function Parameters

Factory default setting
100 V
Refer to 4.28

SIM Store
In the Memory View, select [SIM Store] to change to the Simulation Save View as below, allowing
you to save, clear, and rename the simulation. For the operation method, see 4.3.8 and 4.3.9.

168

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.9 Using USB Memory Function

SIM Recall
In the Memory View, select [SIM Recall] to change to the Simulation Recall View as below,
allowing you to load the simulation. For the operation method, see 4.3.6.

4.9

Using USB Memory Function

This product supports the mass storage class USB memory. The arbitrary waveform data, sequencedata, simulation data, and Basic Setting Memory can be saved into and loaded from the USB
memory.
When you connect a USB memory to this product, a window opens with the confirmation message"USB Memory Connected," then closes after a while.
The root folder of the USB memory should have folders as shown in Figure 4–23. Otherwise, thesefolders are created automatically when the USB memory is connected to this product.
To remove the USB memory connected to this product, the eject operation is necessary as explainedin this section.

Arbitrary waveform data
任意波形データ
Basic Setting Memory data
基本設定メモリデータ
Sequence data
シーケンスデータ
Simulation data
シミュレーションデータ
System file
システムファイル

Figure 4-23 USB Memory Folder Structure

CAUTION
Do not connect anything other than a USB memory to the front USB memory connector.
Before removing the USB memory from this product, always perform the eject operation (see thenext section). Removing the USB memory while it is being accessed may damage the data.
Do not turn off this product while it is accessing the data in the USB memory.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

169

4. Advanced Operation-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------We do not guarantee that all USB memories can be operational with this product.
Use a FAT32-formatted USB memory. This product does not support the exFAT format whichbegan to be supported from Windows Vista SP1.
This product does not have the USB memory formatting function.
The file name should consist of one byte alphanumeric characters. A file name that contains
any double-byte character cannot be recognized correctly.
This product does not have the time information management function. Therefore, when the
save operation is performed for the USB memory, its time stamp is updated to "2008/1/1
00:00:00."
Loading by the external control function is not available.
Limit the number of files to save in one USB memory up to 500 for each of the basic setting,arbitrary waveform, sequence, and simulation data. If the number of files exceeds this limit,
this product cannot recognize the data files in the USB memory.
The BACKUP and SYSTEM folders in Figure 4–23 are not used by the users. Do not delete
these folders and files in them, as they are used for firmware updating of this product and otherpurposes.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Removing the USB memory from this product (eject operation)
1.

Perform the eject operation. Following two methods are available.
(a) Shortcut operation:+(b) Press the MENU key to move to the root menu, then select [System]. In the System menu
that opens, put the cursor on [Exec] next to the [USB Eject] item, then press the ENTER
key.
2.

The window opens with the confirmation message "USB Memory Disconnected." The windowcloses after a while.

3.

Remove the USB memory.

-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The eject operation cannot be performed in the following cases:
When the Memory View is open
When the data list box shows the files in the USB memory-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4.10

Using Monitor Function

The output voltage and current waveform can be monitored using an oscilloscope connected to themonitor terminal on the rear. For the monitor output specifications, see 10.24.

170

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.10 Using Monitor Function

Switching the monitor output
1.

Press the MENU key to move to the root menu, then select [System].

2.

Put the cursor on [Setup] of the [Monitor] item, then press the ENTER key.

3.

«Only for polyphase model and polyphase system» For the [Phs] item, select the desired phase.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

171

4. Advanced Operation

4.

For the [Type] item, select the output voltage or current.

5.

Put the cursor on [Close], then press the ENTER key.

-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------In a polyphase system, configure monitor setting for each of the phases using the L1 phasecabinet. Each cabinet's monitor output connector outputs the monitor voltage of that phase.
In a single-phase model, the [Phs] item is fixed to L1.
The output voltage monitor watches the voltage at the output terminal whether the remotesensing state is on or off.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

172

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.11 Using Remote Sensing Function

4.11

Using Remote Sensing Function

The Remote sensing function detects the output voltage at the sensing input terminal. When the
Remote sensing function is on, the measured value of voltage is the voltage at the sensing input
terminal, and the item symbol is displayed as "SV" on the panel display. The measured values ofpower (P, S, Q) and power factor (PF) are also the values that are calculated using the measured
voltage value at the sensing input terminal. However, their item symbols on the panel display are notchanged.
When the Remote sensing function is on, the output voltage at the sensing input terminal iscalibrated by the AGC or Autocal function. Thus, by combining the Remote sensing function with
the AGC/Autocal function, you can compensate the voltage drop due to wiring to the load.
The Remote sensing function can be set to on in the AC-INT, AC-VCA, AC-SYNC, DC-INT, and
DC-VCA modes. However, for the AC mode, it can be set to on only when the waveform is a sine
wave. When the Remote sensing function is on, the waveform cannot be changed to other than a sine
wave. When the mode is changed to ACDC mode, when the signal source is changed to EXT or
ADD, or when the Sequence or Simulation function is selected, the Remote sensing function is
forcibly set to off.
However, in case the stand-by state of sequence mode (step0) effective only for AC-INT,
ACDC-INT and DC-INT and when the waveform is sine wave or DC. Remote sensing cannot be
activated unless either AC voltage or DC voltage setting is 0 V for ACDC-INT. Also, Remotesensing is turned off once when you change ACDC mode from AC mode of DC mode even instand-by state. Turn ON it again when you need.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The on/off state of the Remote sensing function is kept even if the output range is changed.
When the Remote sensing function is forcibly set to off, the settings saved in the System
Setting Memory are not updated.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DP Series/DP Series Type R

173

4. Advanced Operation

Cable connection for remote sensing

WARNING
Before connecting the cable, turn off this product including its peripherals.

CAUTION
Pay attention to the withstand voltage of the cable to be connected.
Do not connect anything to the terminals that are not used.
Do not input a signal having a different electric potential from the output terminal (for example,
the signal at the secondary side of transformer) into the sensing input terminal.
For the polyphase model or the polyphase output of Multi-phase model, cables should beconnected to the sensing input terminals N1, N2, and N3 for each phase. These terminals do nothave the same electric potential within this product.

Connect the sensing input terminal to the output voltage detecting end (for example, load end) using
a cable. In the Multi-phase model, the sensing input terminal is common to each output phase
configuration (single-phase two-wire, single-phase three-wire, and three-phase four-wire). The
terminals to be used for each output phase configuration are shown in Figure 4–24. Do not connect
anything to the terminals that are not used.

Used for the single-phasetwo-wire output
単相2線出力で使用

単相3線出力で使用
Used for the single-phase
three-wire output
Used for the three-phasefour-wire output
三相4線出力で使用

Figure 4-24 Sensing Input Terminals in Multi-phase Model174

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.11 Using Remote Sensing Function

Turning on/off Remote sensing function
1.

Press the [Measure] soft-key, then select [2: Measure].

2.

Use the [Rmt Sense] item to turn on or off, if necessary.

3.

When the Remote sensing function is turned on, the item symbol of the output voltage measured
value is changed to "SV".

-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The Remote sensing function can be turned on/off also in the AGC/Autocal set window.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DP Series/DP Series Type R

175

4. Advanced Operation

4.12

Using AGC Function

The AGC (Automatic Gain Control) function calculates the ratio (calibration factor) of the output
voltage measured value (effective value) versus the output voltage setting value automatically andcontinuously while this function is on, and multiplies the gain of the output amplifier by thecalculated value, intending to match the output voltage with the setting value. With this function, theoutput voltage fluctuation can be suppressed even when the load is fluctuated. When the AGC
function is set to on, the icon

is displayed.

As the detected part of the output voltage calibrated by the AGC function, either the sensing input
terminal (the Remote sensing function is on) or the output terminal (the Remote sensing function isoff) can be selected. By combining the Remote sensing function with the AGC function, you cancompensate the voltage drop due to wiring to the load.
The AGC function can be set to on in the AC-INT, AC-VCA, AC-SYNC, DC-INT, and DC-VCA
modes. However, for the AC mode, it can be set to on only when the waveform is a sine wave.
When the AGC function is on, the waveform cannot be changed to other than a sine wave. When themode is changed to ACDC mode, when the signal source is changed to EXT or ADD, or when the
Sequence or Simulation function is selected, the AGC function is forcibly set to off. When the
Autocal function is on, the AGC function cannot be used.
For the specification of the AGC function, see 10.16.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------If the output voltage setting is out of the "Operation range" shown in 10.16, the calibration is
not performed while the AGC function setting remains on and the icon

is still

displayed.
If the difference is out of the "Calibration range" shown in 10.16, the AGC function is forcibly
set to off, and the icon

disappears.

If the limiter operates while the AGC function is on, the AGC calibration is not performed.
When the limiter operation is completed, the AGC calibration restarts. If the protection
function is activated, the output is turned off, but the AGC setting remains on.
The on/off setting of the AGC function is kept even if the output range is changed.
When the AGC function is forcibly set to off, the settings saved in the System Setting Memory
are not updated.
The AGC function updates the calibration factor continuously while the AGC function is on.
In contrast, the Autocal function continues to use the calibration factor obtained when Autocal
is turned on until Autocal is turned off. Therefore, in the AGC function, the output voltage iscalibrated properly even when the load is fluctuated, but there is the response time to reflect
the update of the calibration factor. Meanwhile, in the Autocal function, the output voltage
may not be calibrated properly when the load is fluctuated, but once Autocal is turned on,
there is no response time needed for calibration.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

176

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.12 Using AGC Function

Turning on the AGC function
1.

Turn on the output.

2.

Open the AGC/Autocal set window. Following two methods are available.
(a) Shortcut operation:+(b) Push the [Misc] soft-key and select [1: AGC/Auto Cal].

3.

Use the [Rmt Sense] item to set the Remote sensing function to on or off, if necessary.

4.

In the [AGC] item, select [2: ON]. If the output voltage setting is within the AGC operation
range, the AGC calibration is started when [ON] is selected here.

5.

Close the window.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

177

4. Advanced Operation

Turning off the AGC function
1.

Open the AGC/Autocal set window. Following two methods are available.
(a) Shortcut operation:+(b) Push the [Misc] soft-key and select [1: AGC/Auto Cal].

2.

In the [AGC] item, select [1: OFF]. When [OFF] is selected here, the AGC calibration finishes.

178

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.13 Using Autocal Function

3.

Use the [Rmt Sense] item to set the Remote sensing function to on or off, if necessary.

4.

Close the window.

4.13

Using Autocal Function

The Autocal (Automatic Calibration) function calculates the ratio (calibration factor) of the output
voltage measured value (effective value) versus the output voltage setting value when this function
is turned on, and multiplies the gain of the output amplifier by the calculated value, intending tomatch the output voltage with the setting value. The calculated calibration factor is used as a fixedvalue until the Autocal function is turned off. Therefore, even when the Autocal function is on, theoutput voltage fluctuation may occur if the load is fluctuated. When the Autocal function is set to on,
the iconis displayed.

As the detected part of the output voltage calibrated by the Autocal function, either the sensing input
terminal (the Remote sensing function is on) or the output terminal (the Remote sensing function isoff) can be selected. Combining the Remote sensing function with the Autocal function, you cancompensate the voltage drop due to wiring to the load.
The Autocal function can be set to on in the AC-INT, AC-VCA, AC-SYNC, DC-INT, and DC-VCA
modes. However, for the AC mode, it can be set to on only when the waveform is a sine wave.
When the Autocal function is on, the waveform cannot be changed to other than a sine wave. Whenthe mode is changed to ACDC mode, when the signal source is changed to EXT or ADD, or when
the Sequence or Simulation function is selected, the Autocal function is forcibly set to off. When the
AGC function is on, the Autocal function cannot be used.
However, in case the stand-by state of sequence mode (step0) effective only for AC-INT,
ACDC-INT or DC-INT and when the waveform is sine wave or DC. Autocal cannot be activatedunless either AC voltage or DC voltage setting is not 0 V for ACDC-INT. Also, Autocal is turned
off once when you change ACDC mode from AC mode of DC mode even in stand-by state. Turn
ON it again when you need.
For the specification of the Autocal function, see 10.17.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

179

4. Advanced Operation-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------When the Autocal function is on, the calibration factor is always used to perform thecalibration as a multiplier.
If the conditions for setting the [Acal] to [ON] shown in 10.17 are not satisfied, the Autocal
function cannot be turned on. However, if any one of the conditions required for setting [Acal]
to [ON] becomes disabled while the Autocal function is on, the ON setting of the Autocal
function is retained.
If the difference is out of the "Calibration range" shown in 10.17, the Autocal function is
forcibly set to off
If the limiter operates while the Autocal function is on, the Autocal calibration is still applied,but the limit is applied on the output. If the protection function is activated, the output isturned off, but the Autocal setting remains on.
When the output range is changed, the Autocal function is forcibly set to off.
When the Autocal function is forcibly set to off, the settings saved in the System Setting
Memory are not updated.
The Autocal function continues to use the calibration factor obtained when Autocal is turnedon until Autocal is turned off. In contrast, the AGC function updates the calibration factor
continuously while the AGC function is on. Therefore, in the Autocal function, the output
voltage may not be calibrated properly when the load is fluctuated, but once Autocal is turned
on, there is no response time needed for calibration. Meanwhile, in the AGC function, theoutput voltage is calibrated properly even when the load is fluctuated, but there is the responsetime to reflect the update of the calibration factor.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Turning on the Autocal function
1.

Turn on the output.

2.

Open the AGC/Autocal set window. Following two methods are available.
(a) Shortcut operation:+(b) Push the [Misc] soft-key and select [1: AGC/Auto Cal].

180

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.13 Using Autocal Function

3.

Use the [Rmt Sense] item to set the Remote sensing function to on or off, if necessary.

4.

Use the [Auto Cal] item to turn on or off the Autocal function. When [ON] is selected here, thecalibration factor of the Autocal function is calculated, and the calibration is started.

5.

Close the window.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

181

4. Advanced Operation

Turning off the Autocal function
1.

Open the Autocal set window. Following two methods are available.
(a) Shortcut operation:+

The window is toggled between the AGC setting window and the Autocal setting window
every time you press the keys.
(b) Push the [Misc] soft-key and select [1: AGC/Auto Cal].

2.

In the [Auto Cal] item, select [1: OFF]. When [OFF] is selected here, the Autocal calibration
finishes, and the calibration factor is cleared.

182

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.14 Adjusting DC Offset

3.

Use the [Rmt Sense] item to set the Remote sensing function to on or off, if necessary.

4.

Close the window.

4.14

Adjusting DC Offset

Even when the output voltage is set to 0 V, the DC offset voltage from several mV to several tens
mV may exist in the output. The DC offset adjustment function can reduce such DC voltage close to
zero.
For the DC offset adjustment, four types of values are retained for each output voltage range and
AC/DC mode. For the polyphase model and polyphase system, the values need to be set for eachphase. The setting range of the DC offset adjustment value is shown in Table 4-11.
Table 4-11 Setting Range of DC Offset Adjustment Value
AC/DC mode

Minimum
Maximum
Resolution
Initial value
value
value
AC
+50.0
0.1
0.0
−50.0
ACDC, DC
+250
1
0
−250
Note: The setting range is common to 100 V range and 200 V range.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

Unit
mV
mV

183

4. Advanced Operation

Operation procedure1.

Press the [Misc] soft-key and select [2:DC Adjust]. The DC offset adjustment window opens.

2.

«Only for the polyphase model, the polyphase output of the Multi-phase model, or thepolyphase system» In the [Target Phs] item, specify the phase to perform the DC offset
adjustment. In this example, the single-phase model is used, so this item is not specified (leave
it as "L1").

184

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.15 Using for Unbalanced Polyphase Output

3.

While checking the DC offset of the output voltage, adjust the value in the [DC Adj] item sothat the DC offset gets close to zero.

4.

4.15

Close the window.

Using for Unbalanced Polyphase Output

For the polyphase model and polyphase system, you can set the phase voltage and the phase to beunbalanced. For the polyphase model, the phase can be set to be unbalanced by ±35 degrees to thebalanced state. Also for the polyphase system configured by connecting the configurable
single-phase models, the phase can be set to be unbalanced from 0.0 to 359.9 degrees for both L2phase and L3 phase.
Operation procedure1.

Press the [Osc] soft-key and select [6: Phase Mode]. The setting window for the phase mode
opens.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

185

4. Advanced Operation

2.

In the [Mode] item, select [1: Unbalance]. The mode is switched to the unbalanced mode.

3.

To unbalance the phase, set the phase in the [L1-L2] and [L1-L3] items. When the setting iscompleted, close the window.

4.

To unbalance the phase voltage, press the [Osc] soft-key and select [5: Target Phs], and thenselect the phase to set the phase voltage. Or perform the Shortcut operation+

toswitch the phase to set. Set the phase voltage in [ACV].

186

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.16 Using as DC Power Supply-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------When the unbalanced mode is switched to the balanced mode, the AC voltage of each phasebecomes equal to the setting value of the L1 phase. The phase setting value is the value of thebalanced mode (180 degrees for single-phase three-wire output, and 120 degrees and 240
degrees for three-phase output).
Switching between the unbalanced mode and balanced mode is possible even in the output on
state.
Depending on combined condition of the phase angle setting and load, an error message (ID:53 Power Unit DCPS Overvoltage) may be displayed and the output may be turned off.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4.16

Using as DC Power Supply

You can use this product as a DC power supply by switching from the AC/DC mode to the DC modeor the ACDC mode. For the voltage setting range, see 10.6.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The polyphase model and polyphase system cannot be used as a DC power supply. The DC
mode cannot be used. The DC voltage (DCV) of the ACDC mode also cannot be set.
The signal sources that can be combined with the ACDC mode are INT, SYNC, EXT, andADD.
The signal sources that can be combined with the DC mode are INT and VCA.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DP Series/DP Series Type R

187

4. Advanced Operation

Operation Method
1.

Enter the ACDC mode or the DC mode. Following two methods are available.
(a) Shortcut operation:+

Every time you press the keys, the mode is switched to AC, ACDC, and DC in this order.
(b) Press the [Osc] soft-key and select [1:AC/DC]. From the opened menu, select [2: ACDC] or[3: DC].

2.

188

Set the output DC voltage in the [DCV] item.

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.17 Setting Voltage using External DC Input Signal

4.17

Setting Voltage using External DC Input Signal

In the AC-VCA mode, you can use the external DC input signal to set the AC output voltage of theinternal signal source. In the DC-VCA mode, you can use the external DC input signal to set the DC
output voltage of the internal signal source. The external DC signal is input to this product throughthe external signal input connector. When the signal source is VCA, the specifications except theoutput voltage setting are same as when the signal source is INT.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------For VCA, the external signal input is detected with the interval of about 100 ms.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4.17.1 Using External Signal in AC-VCA ModeIn the AC-VCA mode, the peak value of the output AC voltage (ACV) is set according to thefollowing figure, by using the gain setting value and the voltage of the external DC signal.
ACV (Vpk) = Gain x External DC signal voltage (V)For the specifications of the gain setting range and the external DC signal input voltage range, see
10.22.2.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The gain setting value is retained for each of 100 V/200 V ranges and for each of AC/DC
modes.
Within the same range and the same mode, the same value is retained for the gain setting value,
regardless of the combination of the signal sources (VCA, EXT, ADD).
For the polyphase model, the polyphase system, and the polyphase output of the Multi-phasemodel, the ACV setting using VCA is common to all phases.
When the switching from AC-VCA mode to ACDC mode, the signal source is forcibly set to
INT.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Examples
1.

When the waveform is SIN, the gain is 100, and the external DC signal voltage is 1 V, theoutput will be a sine wave of which amplitude is 100 Vpk (= 70.7 Vrms).

2.

When the waveform is SIN, the gain is 100, and the external DC signal voltage is 1.41 V, theoutput will be a sine wave of which amplitude is 141 Vpk (= 100 Vrms).

DP Series/DP Series Type R

189

4. Advanced Operation

Operation procedure
1.

Turn off the output, and enter the AC mode. Following two methods are available.
(a) Shortcut operation:+

Every time you press the keys, the mode is switched to AC, ACDC, and DC in this order.
(b) Press the [Osc] soft-key and select [1:AC/DC]. From the opened menu, select [1: AC].

2.

Press the [Osc] soft-key and select [2:Source]. From the opened menu, select [2: VCA].

3.

Set the [Freq], [Wave], and [Gain] items.

4.

Supply a DC voltage to the external signal input connector.

5.

Turn on the output.

190

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.17 Setting Voltage using External DC Input Signal

4.17.2 Using External Signal in DC-VCA ModeIn the DC-VCA mode, the setting value of the output DC voltage (DCV) is set according to thefollowing figure, by using the gain setting value and the voltage of the external DC signal.
DCV (V) = Gain x External DC signal voltage (V)For the specifications of the gain setting range and the external DC signal input voltage range, see
10.22.2.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The gain setting value is retained for each of 100 V/200 V ranges and for each of AC/DC
modes.
Within the same range, the same value is retained for the gain setting value, regardless of the
combination of the signal sources (VCA, EXT, ADD).
When the switching from DC-VCA mode to ACDC mode, the signal source is forcibly set to
INT.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Examples
When the gain is 100, and the external DC signal voltage is 1 V, the output will be a DC voltage of
100 V.
Operation procedure
1.

Turn off the output, and enter the DC mode. Following two methods are available.
(a) Shortcut operation:+

Every time you press the keys, the mode is switched to AC, ACDC, and DC in this order.
(b) Press the [Osc] soft-key and select [1:AC/DC]. From the opened menu, select [3: DC].

DP Series/DP Series Type R

191

4. Advanced Operation

2.

Press the [Osc] soft-key and select [2:Source]. From the opened menu, select [2: VCA].

3.

Set the [Gain] item.

4.

Supply a DC voltage to the external signal input connector.

5.

Turn on the output.

4.18

Control Using External Control Function

The following functions can be selected.
Item
Description
DisableDisable the control input of the CONTROL I/O. The status output signal is output(See 4.18.1).
EnableEnable the CONTROL I/O (See 4.18.1).
DevCtrl
You can control DIP (See 4.18.2).

192

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.18 Control Using External Control Function

4.18.1 Using CONTROL I/O
You can control the output on/off and the starting/stopping of Sequence by inputting the logic signal
or the non voltage contact signal. You can also get the product state by using the logic signal. The
polarity of state output can be switched. The connector to be used is DBLC-J25SAF-10L9E (D-sub,25-pin, M2.6 mm screw) manufactured by JAE. For the specification of I/O signals, see 10.26, andfor the pin assignment of the CONTROL I/O connector, see Table 4-12. For the multi-phase model
only, attach the provided ferrite core (large) to the product side of the cable connected to theconnector. If the cable is thin, bind the cable and ferrite core with the provided cable tie.

Cable tie

Ferrite core (large)
CONTROL I/O cable-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------We recommend that when the external control function is not used, the function is set to[1: Disable] to avoid malfunctioning due to any exogenous noise.
It is not able to use CONTROL I/O with control of DIP at the same time.
The external control input signal is ignored when the product is remote controlled via thecommunication interface.
The memory 1 and 2 inputs are the inputs for specifying the memory number. For No. 1 to No.
4 memory, specify the 2 bit memory number of the Basic Setting Memory in the Continuousfunction, or of the Sequence Memory in the Sequence function, or of the Simulation Memoryin the Simulation function.
When the memory recall input is changed from high to low, this loads the data of the Basic
Setting Memory in the Continuous function, or of the Sequence Memory in the Sequencefunction, or of the Simulation Memory in the Simulation function which has the number
specified by the memory 1 and 2 inputs. For the Sequence and Simulation function, thecompile is also performed.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DP Series/DP Series Type R

193

4. Advanced Operation

Table 4-12 CONTROL I/O Pin Assignment
pin
1

I/O
OutputFunction
Power On/Off

Remarks
Low: Off, High: On
Low: On, High: Off (Negative)2
Output Output On/Off*
Low: Off, High: On (Positive)
Low: Active, High: None (Negative)3
Output Protection operation*
Low: None, High: Active (Positive)
Low: Active, High: None (Negative)4
Output Limiter operation*
Low: None, High: Active (Positive)
Low: On, High: Off (Negative)5
Output AGC/Autocal setting state*
Low: Off, High: On (Positive)
Low: Busy, High: Ready (Negative)6
Output Software busy*
Low: Ready, High: Busy (Positive)
7
Output Output range
Low: 200 V, High: 100 V
8
Output —Unused9Output Step sync code 1 (bit 0)High level or Low level(see Table 4-13)
10Output Step sync code 2 (bit 1)
11
Output Trigger
Positiveor Negative
12
Output —Unused13
Input
Output Off
Falling Off
14
Input
Output On
Falling On
15
Input
Sequence start/resume
Falling Start
16
Input
Stop of sequence
Falling Stop
17
Input
Sequence is in the Hold status
Falling Hold18
Input
Sequence branch 1
Falling Branch start
19
Input
Sequence branch 2
Falling Branch start
20
Input
Memory recall (+ compile)
Falling Recall
21
Input
Memory specification 1
Specify 0 to 3
(See Table 4-14, equivalent to memory 1
22
Input
Memory specification 2
to 4, respectively)
23
Input
Clear the current peak-hold value Falling Clear
24
—
GND
—
25 Reserved Do not connect anything
Do not connect anything
Note 1: The polarity of state output marked with asterisk (*) can be switched.
Note 2: At 25th pin, +5 V is output for test in manufacturing, and the pin is not assumed to be usedby user. Do not connect this pin to anything, or the product might become unstable.

Table 4-13 Step Sync Code
bit
0
1

LL
Low
Low

Step sync code
LH
HL
High
Low
Low
High

HH
High
High

Table 4-14 Memory Specification

Specify
Memory specification 1
Memory specification 2

194

1
0
Low
Low

Memory No.
2
3
4
1
2
3
High Low HighLow High HighPROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.18 Control Using External Control Function

Enabling/disabling external control function
1.

Press the MENU key to move to the root menu, then select [System]. The system setting
window opens.

2.

In the [Ext Control] item, select [1: Disable] or [2: Enable]. See 4.18.2 about [3: DevCtrl].

DP Series/DP Series Type R

195

4. Advanced Operation

Setting the polarity of the state output
1.

Press the MENU key to move to the root menu, then select [System]. The system setting
window opens.

2.

196

In the [ExtOut Pol] item, select [1: Negative] or [2: Positive].

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.18 Control Using External Control Function

Setting the trigger output
1.

Press the MENU key to move to the root menu, then select [System]. The system setting
window opens.

2.

Move the cursor to [Setup] next to the [Trig Out] item, and select it. The trigger output setting
window opens.

3.

Set the polarity (Positive/Negative) in the [Polarity] item, and set the pulse width in the [Width]
item.

4.

Move the cursor to [OK], then press the ENTER key. The trigger output setting window is
closed.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

197

4. Advanced Operation

4.18.2 Control of DIP
Set external control function to DevCtrl and you can control DIP.
Connect between the CONTROL I/O connector of this product and the CONTROL SIGNAL
connector of DIP with the attached control cable (25 pin-37 pin +BNC) and connect the BNC
connector of the control cable to the QUICK CHANGE SYNC INPUT connector. The quick changesync signal is output from this product.
After the connection turn ON this product and set external control function to DevCtrl, and then turn
ON DIP.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------It is not able to use CONTROL I/O with control of DIP at the same time.
You cannot control DIP if you turn ON before this product. First of all turn ON this product.
You cannot control DIP if you turn ON not setting external control function of this product to
DevCtrl. After setting to DevCtrl, restart DIP.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------■Setting external control function to DevCtrl
1. Press the MENU key to move to the root menu, then select [System]. The system setting window
opens.

198

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.18 Control Using External Control Function

2. In the [Ext Control] item, select [3: DevCtrl].

Connection of DIP
Connect the input terminal of DIP and the output terminal of this product. For detail on how toconnect DIP, refer to the instruction manual of DIP. However, in case of connection with this product,
feedback cable is not used. Figure 4-25 shows the control cable connection diagram of DP030S andDP4172 (DIP) output for reference.

WARNING
Turn off this product including its peripherals before connecting or disconnecting the cable. Be
sure to turn off this product and switch off the breaker at the distribution board. Otherwise, anelectric shock might occur and it may damage the load and this product.

CAUTION
Place DIP near this product.
The cable connecting between the output terminal of this product and the input terminal of DIP
should be as short as possible (3 m or less) and use twisted or parallel.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

199

4. Advanced Operation

CONTROL SIGNAL
connector
Control cable(25 pin-37 pin+BNC)
Included in DIP

CONTROL I/O
connector

QUICK CHANGE SYNC
INPUT connector

DP030S

DP4172(DIP)

Figure 4-25 The Control Cable Connection of DP030S and DP4172(DIP)

4.19

Synchronizing the Output Frequency with the Power Line or
the External Signal

When you select SYNC for the signal source, you can synchronize the frequency of the internalsignal source with the power line or the external signal. The iconinternal signal source is synchronized with the external signal. The icon

is displayed when theis displayed when

the synchronization is not performed. The measured synchronization frequency value is displayed in
the measured value area on the screen. See 10.11 for the measurement specification of thesynchronization frequency and 10.22.1 for the interface specification of the external
synchronization signal.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The output on phase/off phase setting (3.4.7) is valid in SYNC also.
You cannot make the output on if synchronization is not performed.
When the switching from AC-SYNC or ACDC-SYNC mode to DC mode, the signal source isforcibly set to INT.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------200

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.19 Synchronizing the Output Frequency with the Power Line or the External Signal

Operation procedure1.

If you want to synchronize the internal signal source with the external signal, input thesynchronization signal by using the external signal input connector. If you want to synchronize
it with the power line, this step is not necessary.

2.

Press the [Osc] soft-key and select [3:SYNC] from [2:Source].

3.

In the [Source] item, select [Line] (power input) or [Ext] (external input signal) as thesynchronization signal source.

4.

When the internal signal source is synchronized with the external signal or the power line, theicon

is displayed.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

201

4. Advanced Operation

4.20

Amplifying the External Signal Input

When you select EXT for the signal source, you can output the amplified external signal. Also, when
you select ADD for the signal source, you can output the amplified external signal after the internalsignal is added. For the specifications of the gain setting range and the input voltage range, see
10.22.3.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The gain setting value is retained for each of 100 V/200 V ranges.
Within the same range, the same value is retained for the gain setting value, regardless of the
combination of the AC/DC mode and the signal sources (VCA, EXT, ADD).
If the voltage after the external signal is amplified, or if the total voltage of the amplified
external signal and the internal signal exceeds ±227 V (100 V range)/±454 V (200 V range),
the output voltage is clipped at that value.
If the signal source is set to EXT, the calculation is carried out in certain intervals by themeasurement function of this product. Therefore, the measurement operation cycle may
become inappropriate depending on the external signal frequency, resulting in the instablemeasured value display. In that case, set [ADD] for the signal source and configure the settings
as below. When the signal source is set to [ADD], the measurement calculation is performed in
optimum interval for the frequency which is set for the internal signal source. This may solve
the instability of the measured value display.
Set the frequency for the internal signal source so that it is equal to the one for the external signal.
Set zero for ACV and DCV.
You cannot amplify the external signal in the polyphase model or polyphase system. Also, you
cannot select EXT or ADD for the signal source.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Operation procedure
1.

Input the signal to be amplified from the external signal input connector.

2.

Press the [Osc] soft-key and select [2: Source], then : select [4:EXT] or [5:ADD].

202

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.21 Turning the Output On or Off Rapidly

Set the gain in the [Gain] item.

3.

4.21

Turning the Output On or Off Rapidly

In the factory default settings, the internal output relay of this product is activated linking to the
output on/off. In the output off state, the internal circuit, output terminal, and the outlet of thisproduct are physically separated. On the other hand, if the output relay chattering causes any
problem, or if you want to turn the output on or off rapidly, you can disable the activation of theoutput relay. In that case, the output relay is fixed to the on state and the operation to turn the output
on/off is performed by the semiconductor device. The output off state means the state of highimpedance. Table 4-15 shows the list of the output terminal impedance (reference values in the rear
output terminal) in the output off state when the output relay control is disabled.
Table 4-15 The Output Terminal Impedance in the Output Off State whenthe Activation of the Output Relay is Disabled
Single-phase/Polyphase
Model

OutletType
For Japan/North
America
NEMA 5-15

Single-phase model(Hi to Lo)
For Europe
CEE 7

AC/DC mode

100 V range

200 V range

AC and ACDC
modes

200 kΩ
4N + 3200 kΩ
2N + 1

DC mode200 kΩ
4N + 1200 kΩ
2N + 1

AC and ACDC
modes

200 kΩ
4N + 3200 kΩ
2N + 3

DC mode200 kΩ
4N + 1200 kΩ
2N + 1200 kΩ
4N + 1200 kΩ
2N + 1

Polyphase model (L1 to N, L2 to N, L3 to N)
Note 1: The reference value of output terminal at rear panel.
Note 2: N indicates the number of the power units energized.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

203

4. Advanced Operation-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Even when the activation of the output relay is disabled, the relay is turned off if the protection
function is activated. While the error message appearing when the protection function is
activated displays "Press Enter Key," pressing the ENTER key clears the message and turns on
the output relay again although the output remains off.
The output relay is in the off state during the wait time at power-on or after changing thepower unit energization setting even if the activation of the output relay is disabled.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Operation procedure1.

Press the MENU key to move to the root menu, then select [System]. The system setting
window opens.

2.

In the [Relay Cntrl] item, select [2:Enable] or [1:Disable]. If you select [Enable], the activationof the output relay is enabled. If you select [Disable], the output relay is fixed to the on state
and the operation to turn the output on/off is performed by the semiconductor device rapidly.

204

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.22 Enabling Automatic Output-On at Power-On

4.22

Enabling Automatic Output-On at Power-On

You can set the automatic output-on after power-on. If you set the output-on at power-on setting to[ON], the message window as shown in Figure 4-26 is displayed for about 10 seconds after you turnon the power and the self check at start-up, until the output becomes on automatically. If you press
the ENTER key in the control panel, CANCEL key, or the soft-key under the [Cancel] button in themessage window during this process, the output-on at power-on setting is set to off and the output is
not enabled automatically. If you do not perform this key operation, the output on is enabled
automatically after the message window is closed.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The output-on at power-on setting is valid only in the Continuous function. If you set so that
the Sequence or the Simulation function is selected at power-on (see 4.2.10 and 4.3.10), theoutput is not turned on automatically when turning on the power even if the output-on at
power-on setting is set to on.
If the unit is in the Remote state immediately after the start-up, the output-on at power-on
setting is set to off and the output is not turned on automatically. The message window shownin Figure 4-26 is not displayed.
If the unit enters the Remote state while the message window shown in Figure 4-26 isdisplayed, this message window closes and the output-on at power-on setting is set to off,
therefore the output is not turned on automatically.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Figure 4-26 The Message Window to be Shown Before the Automatic Output-On Afterthe Power-On
Operation procedure1.

Press the MENU key to move to the root menu, then select [System]. The system setting
window opens.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

205

4. Advanced Operation

2.

In the [PwON Output] item, select [2:ON] or [1:OFF]. When you select [ON], the automatic
output-on at power-on is enabled.

4.23

Using the Emission CO2 Calculator

This is the function for calculating and displaying the weight of the carbon dioxide (CO2) emission
based on the measured value of the internal loss or the output power of this product. Following two
measuring modes are available: Instantaneous (Unit: kgCO2/h) and Integration (Unit: tCO2). Users
can change the coefficient for the calculation. For the specification of the emission CO2 calculator,
see 10.11.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------In the polyphase system, the emission CO2 of the cabinet is displayed on the LCD panel ofeach cabinet.
The emission coefficient (see 4.28) is not restored to the factory default setting even if you
reset this product. To restore the emission coefficient to the factory default setting, follow theprocedure below. For the default setting value, see 10.11.
[DP series Type R only] Instantaneous values are not displayed while the reverse power flow is
operating. Also, integration operation stops.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Operation procedure
1.

206

Press the [Measure] soft-key and select [3:CO2 View]. The [CO2 View] window opens.

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.23 Using the Emission CO2 Calculator

2.

The window shows the measured CO2 emissions. The "Loss" represents the internal loss and the"Output" represents the output power. "Rate" represents the instantaneous and "Total"
represents the integration.

3.

You can change the emission coefficient in the [Coef] item.

4.

If you select [Clear], the measured value in the [Total] item is cleared.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

207

4. Advanced Operation

4.24

Power Unit Energization Setting (Using Under the Restricted
Rated Power)

You can enable or disable the energization for each power unit (1.5 kVA per unit) within thisproduct. If the smaller power is needed for handling the load, you can disable the energization forsome power units to reduce the power consumption of this product.
If there is a power unit on which the energization is disabled, the rated power icon is displayed
inverted. For details on the rated power icon, see 3.2.6 and 5.1.1.
You can disable the energization for the power unit that may have a failure while continuing
operation of this product by using the remaining power units. For details, see 8.1.3.
Operation procedure1.

Press the MENU key to move to the root menu, then select [System]. The system setting
window opens.

2.

Put the cursor on the [Setup] next to the [PU-ON] item, then press the ENTER key. The power
unit energization setting window opens.

208

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.24 Power Unit Energization Setting (Using Under the Restricted Rated Power)

3.

4.

Enable/Disable the energization. The power unit on which the energization is enabled/disabled
is represented by/switch between

andrespectively. Move the cursor to/and press the ENTER key to.

Select [OK]. The energization is enabled or disabled and the window is closed.

-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The maximum current, current monitor gain, current measurement full scale, and the power
measurement full scale are set to the values corresponding to the rated output power which isdetermined by the number of power units to be energized. However, the applied current
measurement accuracy and the power measurement accuracy are the values under thecondition where all power units are enabled for energization.
If the number of the energized power units is changed, the setting values of the peak current
limiter and the RMS current limiter are restored to the factory default settings corresponding to
the rated power which is determined by the number of the power units to be energized.
If you select [OK] without changing the energization settings in the power unit energization
setting window, the energization settings of all power units are disabled once and enabledagain. The setting values of the peak current limiter and the RMS current limiter are restored
to the factory default settings corresponding to the rated power which is determined by the
number of the power units to be energized.
For a polyphase system, the number of power units on which the energization is enabled mustbe same on all phases.
If a failure occurs in a power unit for some reason, you can disable the energization for that
unit to restart using this product with the remaining power units. For details, see 8.1.3.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DP Series/DP Series Type R

209

4. Advanced Operation

4.25

Key LockIf the key lock is enabled, the operations using keys, jog, or the shuttle are not accepted. The
acceptable operations are for enabling the output off and the key lock only. This function helps to
avoid the incorrect user operations during running. The icon

is displayed when the key lockis enabled.
Operation procedure
The Shortcut operation

4.26

+

toggles between on/off of the key lock.

Beep

You can set whether or not the beep sounds when performing key operations. If the protection
function is activated, the unit beeps regardless of the settings.
Operation procedure1.

Press the MENU key to move to the root menu, then select [System]. The system setting
window opens.

2.

210

Use the [Beep] item to turn the beep sound on or off.

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.27 Changing the Background Color and the Contrast of the Screen

4.27

Changing the Background Color and the Contrast of the
ScreenYou can change the background color and the contrast of the liquid crystal display (LCD) screen on
the panel. As the background color, you can select the blue tone or the white tone. You can also
adjust the contrast in 100 steps. For the setting specifications, see 10.23.
Operation procedure
1.

Open the window for adjusting the LCD. Following two methods are available.
(a) Shortcut operation:+(b) Press the MENU key to move to the root menu, then select [System]. The system setting
window opens. Put the cursor on [Setup] next to the [LCD] item, then press the ENTER
key.

2.

In the [Color] item, select [1: Blue] (blue tone) or [2: White] (white tone).

DP Series/DP Series Type R

211

4. Advanced Operation

3.

In the [Contrast] item, set the contrast value.

4.

Close the window.

-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The L2 and L3 cabinets in a polyphase system accept the Shortcut operation+

for this function. In this case, if other window such as the Emission CO2 Calculator window isbeing displayed, that window closes and the window for adjusting LCD opens only on thecabinet on which you performed the operation. To open the previous window after adjusting
LCD, close the window displayed in the L1 cabinet and reopen it.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4.28

Restoring to the Factory Default Setting (Reset)

If you reset this product, the setting items marked within Table 4-16 are restored to the factory

default settings. Ensure that you reset this product in the output off state.
Table 4-16 Setting Items to be Reset
Setting Item
Output on/off
Output range
AC/DC mode
Signal source
External synchronization signal (LINEor EXT)
AC voltage setting
Frequency
Output waveform
Output on phase
Output off phase
Phase voltage/Line voltage setting
selectionLine voltage setting

212

Reset
×

Factory default setting
Off
100 V range
AC mode
INT
LINE
0V
50 Hz
Sine wave
0.0 deg
Enabled, 0.0 deg
Phase voltage
0V

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.28 Restoring to the Factory Default Setting (Reset)

Table 4-16 Setting Items to be Reset (Continued)
Setting Item
Phase angle setting
Balanced/Unbalanced
DC voltage setting
Current limiter
Setting range limit
External input gain
Phase to be measured
Output function
DC offset
Measurement display mode
Measurement unit selection
Power unit energization setting
Remote sensing
AGC
AutocalCO2 internal loss integration value
CO2 output power integration value
Emission CO2 coefficient
LCD display
Beep
Key lock
Output relay control
Output setting at power-on
Trigger output setting
Time unit
Monitor output target
External interface
External control
Clipped sine wave
Arbitrary Waveform Memory

DP Series/DP Series Type R

Reset

×

×

×
×
×
×

×
×

×

Factory default setting
Single-phase three-wire: 180 deg
Three-phase: 120, 240 deg
Balanced
0V
Refer to 10.13
Refer to 10.14
0
L1
Continuous
0 mV
Normalrms
All enabled (energization)
Off
Off
Off
0.000000 tCO2
0.000000 tCO2
0.000555 tCO2/kWhBlue tone
On
Off
EnableOff
Negative, 10 mssCurrent (L1 phase)USB
DisableClip ratio specified
Clip ratio: 100%
Crest factor: 1.41
ARB1 to 8: Triangle wave
ARB9 to 16: Square wave

213

4. Advanced Operation

Table 4-16 Setting Items to be Reset (Continued)
Setting Item
Sequence parameters

Reset
×

Simulation parameters×

Factory default setting
Output range: 100 V
AC/DC mode: AC-INT
Step Time: 0.1000 second
Intra-Step behavior: ConstantWaveform: SIN Frequency: 50 Hz
DC voltage: 0 V AC phase voltage: 0 V
Start phase: Disabled, 0 deg
Stop phase: Disabled, 0 deg
Phase angle: Single-phase three-wire 180 deg
Three-phase 120, 240 deg
Step termination: Continue
Jump count: 1
Jump-to step specification: OFF
Step sync output: LL
Branch step specification: OFF
Trigger output: Off
Output range: 100 V
Step Time: 0.1 second
Frequency: 50 Hz AC voltage: 0 V
Start phase: Disabled, 0 deg
Stop phase: Disabled, 0 deg
Step sync output: LL
Trigger output: Off
Repeat count: Disabled 1

Operation procedure1.

Press the MENU key to move to the root menu, then select [System]. The system setting
window opens.

214

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

4.28 Restoring to the Factory Default Setting (Reset)2.

Put the cursor on [Exec] next to the [Reset] item, then press the ENTER key. The reset
operation is performed.

-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------If you reset the product, the content in the Basic Setting Memory will not be cleared. Once
restarted, the setting of the Basic Setting Memory No.1 is recalled. To reset the setting after
restart to the factory default setting, see 4.8.1 to clear the content of the Basic Setting Memory
No.1.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DP Series/DP Series Type R

215

5. Description of Screen and Menu

DP Series/DP Series Type R

5.1

Screen Configuration ······································· 218

5.2

Menu Composition ·········································· 222

217

5. Description of Screen and Menu

5.1

Screen Configuration

Figure 5–1 shows the basic screen configuration. It consists of display areas marked as "a" to "i".
The description of each area is shown in Table 5-1.
a

b

c

d

e

f

g

i

h

Figure 5-1 Component Name (Display Areas on the Screen)
Table 5-1 Component Name (Display Areas on the Screen)
Symbolabc

Screen title
Output range
Output moded

Output phase
configurationeStatus iconfMeasured value
area
Output display
area
Soft-keyfunction
Windowghi218

Area name

Description
Title of the currently displayed screen.
Current output range.
Current output mode. It is displayed in the format of"AC/DC mode - Signal source."
Current output phase configuration in the system.
1P2W: Single-phase two-wire/1P3W: Single-phase
three-wire/3P4W: Three-phase four-wire
The area where an icon is displayed when the productenters the specific state, for example, when the limiter isactivated.
The measured values are displayed. In the Simple View,
three items are enlarged.
The output setting is displayed. Make the output settings
in this area.
Shows the functions assigned to the soft-keys below.
The window where the confirmation message isdisplayed or you change the settings. It is displayed asneeded.

Refer
to
—
3.4.2
3.4.1
1.2

5.1.1

3.4.10,3.4.11
3.4
3.3.3
3.3.4

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

5.1 Screen Configuration

5.1.1 Status Icon
Table 5-2 shows icons displayed in specific states and their meanings.
Table 5-2 Status Icons
Icon

Name
Rated power

Meaning

Running

Indicates the maximum output power. If the
rated power is restricted by the power unit
energization setting, the icon is displayed
inverted (Example:).
The AGC setting is on.
The Autocal is on.
The product does not accept key operations
for changing the setting as it is performing
the internal processing. Please wait for a
moment.
The RMS current limiter is activated while
power running.
[DP series Type R only]
The RMS current limiter is detected while
the reverse power flow is operating.
The peak current limiter is activated while
power running.
The wattage limiter is activated while power
running.
[DP series Type R only]
The wattage limiter is detected while thereverse power flow is operating.
With SYNC, the internal signal source is
synchronized with the external signal or the
power line.
With SYNC, the internal signal source is
not synchronized with the external signal or
the power line.
The key lock is enabled.
In the Remote control state.
The edit view for the sequence or simulation
is displayed.
The sequence or simulation is running.

Stand byThe sequence or simulation stands by.

Sequence suspended

The sequence is suspended.

Unadjusted

Unadjusted. This icon means the abnormal
state of the product. Contact us or our agent.

AGC
AutocalBusy

RMS current limiter
RMS current limiter

Peak current limiter
Wattage limiter
Wattage limiter

Synchronization

Asynchronous

Key lock
RemoteEditing

DP Series/DP Series Type R

Refer to
3.2.6,
4.24

4.12
4.13
—

4.1.2
4.1.2

4.1.1
4.1.5
4.1.5

4.19

4.19

4.25
6.
4.2.12,4.3.124.2.12,4.3.124.2.12,4.3.124.2.12,4.3.12—219

5. Description of Screen and Menu

5.1.2 Measured Value Display Items
The items displayed in the measured value area are shown in Table 5-3.
Table 5-3 Measured Value Display Items
Item
Icon

Description
Represents the phase and type of the measured voltage display.
Output voltage of the single-phase two-wirePhase voltage of the single-phase three-wire L1 phase
Phase voltage of the single-phase three-wire L2 phase
Line voltage between the single-phase three-wire L1 and L2 phases *1
Phase voltage of the three-phase L1 phase
Phase voltage of the three-phase L2 phase
Phase voltage of the three-phase L3 phase
Line voltage between the three-phase L1 and L2 phases *1
Line voltage between the three-phase L2 and L3 phases *1
Line voltage between the three-phase L3 and L1 phases *1
V
Effective value of the output voltage on the output terminal
Vavg
The average DC value of the output voltage on the output terminal
Vmax
Maximum peak value of the output voltage on the output terminal
Vmin
Minimum peak value of the output voltage on the output terminalSV
Effective value of the voltage on the sensing terminal
SVavg
Average DC value of the voltage on the sensing terminal
SVmax
Maximum peak value of the voltage on the sensing terminal
SVmin
Minimum peak value of the voltage on the sensing terminal
I *2
Output current effective value
Iavg *4
Average DC value of the output current
Imax *2
Maximum peak value of the output current
Imin *2
Minimum peak value of the output current
Ipk-Hold *2 Output current peak-hold value
F
Synchronization signal source frequency
P *3
Output active power
S *3
Output apparent power
Q *3
Output reactive power
PF *4
Power factor of the output power
CF *4
Output current crest factor*1: Displays the measured phase voltage value in the Peak display format of the measured value.
Displays the L1 phase voltage in the L1-L2 line voltage display, the L2 phase voltage in theL2-L3 line voltage display, and the L3 phase voltage in the L3-L1 line voltage display.
*2: Displays the phase current in the phase voltage display for the measured output voltage,theL1 phase current in the L1-L2 line voltage display, the L2 phase current in the L2-L3 line
voltage display, and the L3 phase current in the L3-L1 line voltage display.
*3: Displays the phase output power in the phase voltage display for the output voltage
measurement, and the all-phase total output power in the line voltage display.
*4: Displays the phase measured value in the phase voltage display for the measured output
voltage. Displays nothing in the line voltage display.

220

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

5.1 Screen Configuration

5.1.3 Output Setting Display Items
The items displayed in the output setting display area are shown in Table 5-4.
Table 5-4 Output Setting Display Items
Item
Icon

Freq
Wave
ACV
DCV
Gain
SourceDescription
Represents the phase to be configured.
Output of the single-phase two-wire
All phases in the balanced mode single-phase three-wire, phase voltage setting
All phases in the balanced mode single-phase three-wire, line voltage setting
L1 phase in the unbalanced mode single-phase three-wire
L2 phase in the unbalanced mode single-phase three-wire
All phases in the balanced mode three-phase, phase voltage setting
All phases in the balanced mode three-phase, line voltage setting
L1 phase in the unbalanced mode three-phase
L2 phase in the unbalanced mode three-phase
L3 phase in the unbalanced mode three-phase
Frequency of the output AC voltage
Waveform of the output AC voltage
Output AC voltage
Output DC voltage
Gain of the external signal
Synchronization signal source

5.1.4 Warning and Error Display
If a warning or error occurs, an error message is displayed in the measured value area and the output
display area. For details on error messages, see 8.1.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

221

5. Description of Screen and Menu

5.2

Menu Composition

The menu composition of this product is shown in Figure 5–2. Press the MENU key to move to theroot menu.
RootContinuous－Osc－Measure－Misc－Limiter

Sequence

Simulation－Sequence Edit
－Sequence Control－Simulation Edit
－Simulation Control

MemorySystem－Setting Store－Setting Recall－ARB Copy－SEQ Store－SEQ Recall－SIM Store－SIM Recall－Reset－PwON Mode
－PwON Output
－Beep
－LCD
－Monitor－Ext Control－Remote－Relay Cntrl－USB Eject－Trig Out
－PU-ON－Information－ExtOut Pol

Figure 5-2 Menu Composition

5.2.1 Menus of the Continuous Function
The menus of the Continuous function are shown in Table 5-5. You can open each menu by using asoft-key.
Table 5-5 Menus of the Continuous Function
Osc

MeasureMenu
1: AC/DC
2: Source
3: Range
4: On/Off Phs
5: Target Phs
6: Phs Mode
1: Mode2: Measure
3: CO2 View
4: Harmonic
5: Disp Item

Misc

222

1: AGC/Acal
2: DC Adjust

Description
Switches the AC/DC mode.
Switches the signal source.
Switches the output voltage range.
Makes the on/off phase settings.
Switches the phase to be configured.
Sets the phase mode in the case ofpolyphase output.
Switches the measured value display mode.
Makes the measured value display settings.
Displays and sets the CO2 emission.
Displays the harmonic current measured
values.
Selects display items in the Simple
measured value display mode.
Makes the AGC/Autocal function settings.
Sets the DC offset adjustment.

Refer to
3.4.1
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.7
3.4.5
4.15
3.4.11
3.4.10,3.4.12,
3.4.134.21
4.4
3.4.11
4.12,4.13
4.14

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

5.2 Menu Composition

Table 5-5 Menus of the Continuous Function (Continued)
LimiterMenu
1: Ipk Limiter
2: Irms Limiter
3: V/F Limiter

Description
Makes the peak current limiter settings.
Makes the RMS current limiter settings.
Sets the voltage/frequency setting range
limit.

Refer to
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3,4.1.4

5.2.2 Menus of the Sequence Function
The menus of the Sequence function are shown in Table 5-6. You can open each menu by using asoft-key. For how to use the Sequence function, see 4.2.
Table 5-6 Menus of the Sequence Function
Sequence Edit

Menu
Osc
Misc
File

Range
AC/DC
Time Unit
Trig OutStore
RecallClear
CompileSequence Control

Start
Stop
Hold
ResumeBran1
Bran2
MeasureEdit

DP Series/DP Series Type R

Description
Switches the output voltage range.
Switches the AC/DC mode.
Switches the time unit between ms and s.
Sets the trigger output.
Saves to, clears, and renames the Sequence
Memory.
Recalls the Sequence Memory.
Resets the edited sequence to the factory default
settings.
Compiles the edited sequence and moves to theSequence Control View.
Starts the sequence. It is displayed in the output on
and sequence stopped states.
Ends the sequence. It is displayed in the sequencerunning state.
Suspends the sequence. It is displayed in thesequence running state.
Resumes the suspended sequence. It is displayed in
the sequence suspended state.
Branches to a step of the branch 1. It is displayed in
the sequence running state.
Branches to a step of the branch 2. It is displayed in
the sequence running state.
Makes the measured value display settings. It isdisplayed in the sequence stopped state.
Displays the Sequence Edit View. It is displayed in
the output off state.

223

5. Description of Screen and Menu

5.2.3 Menus of the Simulation Function
The menus of the Simulation function are shown in Table 5-7. You can open each menu by using asoft-key. For how to use the Simulation function, see 4.3.
Table 5-7 Menus of the Simulation Function
Simulation Edit

Menu
Osc
Misc
File

Range
Time Unit
Trig OutStore
RecallClear
CompileSimulation Control

Start
Stop
MeasureEdit

Description
Switches the output voltage range.
Switches the time unit between ms and s.
Sets the trigger output.
Saves to, clears, and renames the Simulation
Memory.
Recalls the Simulation Memory.
Resets the edited simulation to the factory default
settings.
Compiles the edited simulation and moves to the
Simulation Control View.
Starts the simulation. It is displayed in the output
on and simulation stopped states.
Ends the simulation. It is displayed in the
Simulation running state.
Makes the measured value display settings. It isdisplayed in the simulation stopped state.
Moves to the Simulation Edit View. It is displayedin the output off state.

5.2.4 Menus of the Memory Function
The menus of the Memory function are shown in Table 5-8. For how to use the Memory function,
see 4.8.
Table 5-8 Menus of the Memory Function
Menu
Setting Store
Setting Recall
ARB Copy
SEQ Store
SEQ Recall
SIM Store
SIM Recall

224

Description
Saves to, clears, and renames the Basic Setting Memory.
Recalls the Basic Setting Memory.
Copies the arbitrary waveform data between the internal memory and the USB
memory, and clears and renames it.
Saves to, clears, and renames the Sequence Memory.
Recalls the Sequence Memory.
Saves to, clears, and renames the Simulation Memory.
Recalls the Simulation Memory.

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

5.2 Menu Composition

5.2.5 System Menus
The System menus are shown in Table 5-9.
Table 5-9 System Menus
Menu
Reset
PwOn Mode
PwON Output
Beep
LCD
Monitor
Ext Control
RemoteRelay Cntrl
USB Eject
Trig Out
PU-ON
Information
ExtOut Pol

Description
Resets the system.
Selects the output function(Continuous/Sequence/Simulation) at power-on.
Enables/disables the function to turn on the output at
power-on.
Turns the beep sound on or off.
Sets the screen color and the contrast.
Makes the Monitor function settings.
Switches the control by the external control function to
Enable/Disable/DevCtrl.
Makes the communication interface settings.
Enables/disables the output relay to coordinate with theoutput on/off.
Disconnects the USB memory before removing it.
Makes the trigger output settings in the Sequence and theSimulation.
Makes the power unit energization settings.
Displays the system information.
Specifies the external control state output polarity.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

Refer to
4.28
4.2.10,4.3.10
4.22
4.26
4.27
4.10
4.18
6.1
4.21
4.9
4.2,4.3
4.24
9.4
4.18.1225

6. Remote Control

DP Series/DP Series Type R

6.1

Communication Interface ·································· 228

6.2

Remote/Local State Switching ··························· 237

227

6. Remote Control

6.1

Communication Interface

This product is provided with the USB and RS232 communication interfaces as standard and isremote-controllable by a computer. Also, either GPIB or LAN communication interface can bechosen when ordering. The remote control allows almost all the operations available on the control
panel to be performed. In addition, it can read the internal state such as setting values and errors.
The command language is compliant with the SCPI Specification 1999.0.
Regardless of which communication interface is used, you can create and use a program that uses
the Virtual Instrument Software Architecture (VISA) library. If you do not have a license to use
VISA library, you need to obtain one (generally, it requires some cost).
For details of the remote control commands and programming, see "Instruction Manual (Remote
Control)" in the attached CD-ROM.

6.1.1 USB
This product is compliant with the USB Test and Measurement Class (USBTMC). Normally, theUSBTMC class driver supports the sub class USB488 and can perform almost the same controls as
GPIB on USB.
Preparation
The computer used for control needs a USBTMC class driver installed on it. The USBTMC classdriver is included in the hardware and software product of each company that provides the VISA
library.
Operation procedure1.

Press the MENU key to move to the root menu, then select [System]. The system setting
window opens.

228

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

6.1 Communication Interface

2.

Put the cursor on [Setup] next to the [Remote] item, then press the ENTER key. The remotesetting window opens.

3.

In the [Interface] item, select [USB].

4.

The window shows [Terminator] and [USB ID]. For the USB ID, see the explanation in the next
section. Select [OK] to close the window.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

229

6. Remote Control

5.

Use a commercially available USB cable (Type A to B) to connect this product to the computer.
USB connector is available on the rear of this product. For the multi-phase model only, attach
the provided ferrite core (small) to the product side of the cable.

Ferrite core (small)
USB cable-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Avoid use in a place under electrically noisy environment.
It is recommended to use a fully-shielded, short cable.
The use of USB hub may cause the product not to communicate properly.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------About USB ID
Used for a system connected with multiple DP series programmable AC power sources through USB,
to enable the application identify each source. The USB ID is represented in the following format.
USB0::[Vendor number]::[Product number]::[Serial number]::INSTR

230

Vendor number:

Fixed to 3402 (0x0D4A)

Product number:

Fixed to 26 (0x001A)

Serial number:

A unique number (serial number) has been set for each product.

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

6.1 Communication Interface

6.1.2 RS232
For the interface specifications, see 10.27.
Operation procedure1.

Press the MENU key to move to the root menu, then select [System]. The system setting
window opens.

2.

Put the cursor on [Setup] next to the [Remote] item, then press the ENTER key. The remotesetting window opens.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

231

6. Remote Control

3.

In the [Interface] item, select [RS232].

4.

Set each item.

5.

Use a D-sub 9-pin cross cable to connect this product to the computer. The connector is on therear of this product. For the multi-phase model only, attach the provided ferrite core (large) tothe product side of the cable. If the cable is thin, bind the cable and ferrite core with theprovided cable tie.
Cable tie

Ferrite core (large)
RS232 cable

232

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

6.1 Communication Interface-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Avoid use in a place under electrically noisy environment.
Turn off this product and the computer before connecting or disconnecting the cable.
Binary transmission is not supported.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

6.1.3 GPIB
This product is compliant with the GPIB IEEE Standard 488.1-1987. The GPIB-based remotecontrol is available. For the interface specifications, see 10.27.
Operation procedure1.

Press the MENU key to move to the root menu, then select [System]. The system setting
window opens.

2.

Put the cursor on [Setup] next to the [Remote] item, then press the ENTER key. The remotesetting window opens.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

233

6. Remote Control

3.

In the [Interface] item, select [GPIB].

4.

In the [Address] item, set the address. [Terminator] is fixed to "LF".

5.

Use a GPIB cable to connect this product to the computer. The connector is on the rear of thisproduct. Turn off this product and the computer before connecting or disconnecting the cable.

-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Avoid use in a place under electrically noisy environment.
Before connecting or disconnecting the cable, turn off the power to all devices on the bus.
When using the GPIB, turn on the power to all devices on the bus.
Ensure that the total cable length is within 20 meters.
Ensure that the length of one cable is within 4 meters.
Do not set the same address as the one used for any other device connected to the same bus.
Otherwise, the product cannot communicate properly.
Binary transmission is not supported.
Query for the main unit status byte using a serial poll is not supported.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

234

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

6.1 Communication Interface

6.1.4 LANFor the interface specifications, see 10.27.
For how to set LAN interface, refer to the Instruction Manual (Remote Control).
Operation procedure
1. Connect this product and computer with LAN cable. LAN connector is available on the rear of thisproduct. Turn off this product and the computer before connecting or disconnecting the cable.
2. Press the MENU key to move to the root menu, and then select [System]. The system setting
window opens.

3. Put the cursor on [Setup] next to the [Remote] item, then press the ENTER key. The remote setting
window opens.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

235

6. Remote Control

4. In the [Interface] item, select [LAN].

5. The current [MAC Address], [IP Address], [Subnet mask] and [Gateway] are displayed. When notusing fixed IP, *** is displayed because it is uncertain except for MAC Address immediately after
interface switching. After assignment, the display such as IP Address will be updated. Refer to thematters for IP address setting etc. For details, refer to “Instruction Manual (Remote Control)"contained in the CD-ROM.

236

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

6.2 Remote/Local State Switching

MAC Address： Device-specific address (physical address). It cannot be changed. It is 8 bit
delimited, hexadecimal notation.
IP Address：

In IP (Internet Protocol), you can check the address (logical address) for
identifying the device. The range from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255 is a
private IP address that you can freely use in a small local network (Class C).

Subnet mask：

You can check the mask that separates the upper network address and the lower
host address from the IP address.

Gateway：

When accessing an external network, you can check the IP address of thegateway (repeater) to use implicitly.

-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Avoid use in a place under electrically noisy environment.
Turn off this product and the computer before connecting or disconnecting the cable.
Binary transmission is not supported.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

6.2

Remote/Local State Switching

6.2.1 Remote StateIn the Remote state, the control panel key operations are not accepted. However, the output off(OUTPUT key) and the switching to the Local state (+) are accepted.

Switching to the Remote state
When communication is established after the command is sent from the computer to this product,
this product switches to the Remote state.

6.2.2 Local State
Control panel key operations are accepted.
Switching to the Local state
The Shortcut operation

DP Series/DP Series Type R+

switches to the state to Local.

237

7. Options

DP Series/DP Series Type R

7.1

Remote Controller ········································· 240

7.2

System Cable (for Polyphase System) ················ 240

7.3

Rack-Mount Adapter ······································ 241

7.4

Replacement Air Filter ···································· 242

7.5

Power Cable ·················································· 243

7.6

Cable Holder ················································· 244

239

7. Options

7.1

Remote Controller

A remote controller with the numeric keypad, jog, and shuttle. It supports almost all the operations
available on the main unit control panel. This option can be requested at the time of order or added
after the purchase. For the remote controller operations, see the instruction manual that comes withthe remote controller.
Model name: DP008
Product name: Remote Controller

Figure 7-1 Remote Controller External View

7.2

System Cable (for Polyphase System)

This cable is used to configure the polyphase system by connecting the configurable single-phasemodels. This option can be requested at the time of order or added after the purchase. For how to
configure the polyphase system, see 2.5.4. Note that the System Cable cannot be used in theMulti-phase model.
Model name: PA-001-1720
Product name: System Cable (1P3W)
Model name: PA-001-1721
Product name: System Cable (3P4W)

240

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

7.3 Rack-Mount Adapter

7.3

Rack-Mount Adapter

The rack-mount adapter is a set of brackets used to mount the product on the EIA or JIS standard
compliant rack. This option can be requested at the time of order or added after the purchase.
Table 7-1 Rack-Mount Adapter Model Names
Model name
PA-001-1728

Product nameRack-mount adapter (inch) Type 1

PA-001-1729

Rack-mount adapter (inch) Type 2

PA-001-1730

Rack-mount adapter (inch) Type 3

PA-001-1731

Rack-mount adapter (inch) Type 4

PA-001-1732

Rack-mount adapter (mm) Type 1

PA-001-1733

Rack-mount adapter (mm) Type 2

PA-001-1734

Rack-mount adapter (mm) Type 3

PA-001-1735

Rack-mount adapter (mm) Type 4

DP Series/DP Series Type R

Supported model
DP015S, DP030S, DP030D,
DP015RS
DP045S, DP045T, DP045M,
DP060S, DP060D,
DP030RS, DP030RD,
DP045RS, DP045RT
DP075S, DP090S, DP090D, DP090T,
DP060RS, DP060RD
DP090M, DP105S, DP120S, DP120D,
DP075RS, DP090RS,
DP090RD, DP090RT
DP015S, DP030S, DP030D,
DP015RS
DP045S, DP045T, DP045M,
DP060S, DP060D,
DP030RS, DP030RD,
DP045RS, DP045RT
DP075S, DP090S, DP090D, DP090T,
DP060RS, DP060RD
DP090M, DP105S, DP120S, DP120D,
DP075RS, DP090RS,
DP090RD, DP090RT

241

7. Options

7.4

Replacement Air Filter

A set of replacement air filters on the front grill. This option can be requested at the time of order oradded after the purchase. As shown in Figure 7–2, there are two types of front grill - Front grill 1 forthe top row and Front grill 2 for lower ones. There are two types of replacement air filter for thesetypes. Each set consists of two filters. For instance, if you want to replace all the air filters of theDP060x, you need one set for the Front grill 1 and three sets for the Front grill 2. For how to replace
the air filters, see 9.2.
Table 7-2 Replacement Air Filter Model Names
Model name
PA-001-1736
PA-001-1737

Product name
Replacement air filter 1
Replacement air filter 2

Description
For the Front grill 1. Two-filter set.
For the Front grill 2. Two-filter set.

フロントグリル
Front grill 1

フロントグリル
Front
grill 2

Figure 7-2 Front Grills

242

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

7.5 Power Cable

7.5

Power Cable

Cables for the power input. They vary in cross sectional area depending on the power input and therated output as shown in Table 7-3. A crimp-type terminal is attached to each cable on the end whichis to be connected to the input terminal of this product. The length of the cable is 3 m.
On the power cable, the end which is to be connected to the distribution board has no terminal
attached. Use a crimp-type terminal appropriate for the terminal screw diameter of the
distribution board to connect the cable firmly.
The power cable is dedicated only to this product. Do not use it with any other product.
Table 7-3 Power Cable Model Names
Model namePower input

Rated output

PA-001-3251
PA-001-3252

Single-phase
input(1P2W)

1.5 kVA
3.0 kVA
4.5 kVA
6.0 kVA
7.5 kVA
9.0 kVA
10.5 kVA
12.0 kVA
4.5 kVA
6.0 kVA
7.5 kVA
9.0 kVA
10.5 kVA
12.0 kVA
4.5 kVA
6.0 kVA
7.5 kVA
9.0 kVA
10.5 kVA
12.0 kVA

PA-001-3253
PA-001-3254
PA-001-3255
PA-001-3256

Three-phase
three-wire
input(3P3W)

PA-001-3257
PA-001-3263
PA-001-3264

Three-phasefour-wire
input(3P4W)DP Series/DP Series Type R

Maximum
power
consumption
2.25 kVA
4.50 kVA
6.75 kVA
9.00 kVA
11.25 kVA
13.50 kVA
15.75 kVA
18.00 kVA
6.75 kVA
9.00 kVA
11.25 kVA
13.50 kVA
15.75 kVA
18.00 kVA
6.75 kVA
9.00 kVA
11.25 kVA
13.50 kVA
15.75 kVA
18.00 kVA

Terminal
size

Nominal crosssectional area

M6

5.5 mm2 approx
14 mm2 approx

M8

22 mm2 approx
38 mm2 approx

M6

5.5 mm2 approx
14 mm2 approx

22 mm2 approx
5.5 mm2 approx
14 mm2 approx243

7. Options

7.6

Cable Holder

This option is used to fix the power cable or output cable. It can be requested at the time of order oradded after the purchase. The different cable holders are used for each model. Please refer to thecorrespondence table (Table 7-5).
Table 7-4 Cable Holder Model Names
Model name
PA-001-3245
PA-001-3246
PA-001-3247
PA-001-3248
PA-001-3249

Product name
Cable holder
Cable holder
Cable holder
Cable holder
Cable holder

Identification number
1
2
3
4
5

The contents are as follows. Refer to Figure 7-3 and assemble the cable holders.
①

Cable holder (base) ·································································· 1 pc②

Cable holder (holder) ································································ 1 pc③

Screws for base (with spring lock washer, cross recessed pan head) ········· 2 pcs④

Screws for holder (cross recessed binding head) ································ 2 pcs

Polyphase output side
(Only for multi-phase model)

Power input side

Identification number (1 to 5)

Output side

Figure 7-3 Assembly Diagram of Cable Holder

244

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

7.6 Cable Holder

Table 7-5 Cable Holder Correspondence List
Cable holder
Main unit
DP015S, DP015RS
DP030S, DP030RS
DP045S, DP045RS

DP060S, DP060RS

DP075S, DP075RS

DP090S, DP090RS

DP105S

DP120S

DP030D, DP030RD
DP060D, DP060RD

DP090D, DP090RD

DP120D

DP045T, DP045RT

DP090T, DP090RT

DP045M

DP090M

Power input
1P2W
1P2W
1P2W
3P3W
3P4W
1P2W

3P3W
3P4W
1P2W
3P3W
3P4W
1P2W
3P3W
3P4W
1P2W
3P3W
3P4W
1P2W
3P3W
3P4W
1P2W
1P2W

3P3W
3P4W
1P2W
3P3W
3P4W
1P2W
3P3W
3P4W
1P2W
3P3W
3P4W
1P2W
3P3W
3P4W
1P2W
3P3W
3P4W
1P2W
3P3W
3P4W

DP Series/DP Series Type R

Power input side

Output side

PA-001-3246
PA-001-3247
PA-001-3247
PA-001-3245

PA-001-3245
PA-001-3245
PA-001-3249

DP060S
PA-001-3247
DP060RS
PA-001-3249
PA-001-3249
PA-001-3245
PA-001-3248
PA-001-3249

PA-001-3249

Poly-phase
output side
(Only for multi-phasemodel)

PA-001-3248

PA-001-3248
PA-001-3249

PA-001-3248

PA-001-3248
PA-001-3249

PA-001-3248

PA-001-3248
PA-001-3249

PA-001-3248

PA-001-3247
DP060D
PA-001-3247
DP060RD
PA-001-3249
PA-001-3249
PA-001-3245
PA-001-3248
PA-001-3249

PA-001-3245
PA-001-3245

PA-001-3248
PA-001-3249

PA-001-3249

PA-001-3247
PA-001-3245

PA-001-3245

PA-001-3248
PA-001-3249

PA-001-3245

PA-001-3247
PA-001-3245

PA-001-3249

PA-001-3245

PA-001-3248
PA-001-3249

PA-001-3248

PA-001-3245

PA-001-3249

245

8. Troubleshooting

DP Series/DP Series Type R

8.1

Error Messages and Error Handling ···················· 248

8.2

When a Failure is Suspected····························· 255

247

8. Troubleshooting

8.1

Error Messages and Error Handling

8.1.1 Error Message Screen
An error message screen opens as shown in Figure 8–1, for example, in case that the protection
function is activated. The description of each item is shown in Table 8-1.

a

a

b

b

c
d

c
d

e
f

Figure 8-1 Error Message Screen Example
Table 8-1 Description of the Error Message Screen
Symbola

Name
Screen titlebProtection typecde

Error ID
Message
Press Enter Key

f

Soft-key[PU-ON]

Description
System Lock: An error whose protection type is System
Lock
Warning: An error whose protection type is Output Off
System Locked: System Lock
Output OFF: Output Off
The number to identify an error.
Describes the error details.
Displayed for an error whose protection type is Output
Off.
Displayed for an error that occurred on the power unit.
This key opens the power unit energization setting
window, enabling you to disable the energization of thepower unit that repeatedly generates the error.

Refer to
8.1.4

8.1.4
8.1.5
8.1.5
8.1.2
8.1.3

8.1.2 If An Error Message is Displayed
If an error message is displayed, handle it by the following procedure. When the error occurs
repeatedly, handle it according to 8.1.3.
Handling procedure
1.

Check on the error content and remove the reason of the error. For each message and its
handling method, see 8.1.5.

2.

When the protection type says System Locked, cycle the power of the product.

3.

When the protection type says Output OFF, press the ENTER key. The error message
disappears.

4.

248

Now the product is available.

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

8.1 Error Messages and Error Handling

8.1.3 If An Error Occurs Repeatedly
If an error message repeatedly appears even though you removed the cause of the error, the error
may be resolved by restarting the power unit.
If the error still exists, the product or the power unit in the product may be faulty. Repair is neededin this case. Contact the seller (NF Corporation or our agent) from whom you purchased the product.
Even though one of the power units is faulty, the product can be used by disconnecting the faulty
power unit and using the rest of them.
The following shows how to restart and disconnect the power unit in the case of an error.
-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The following procedure is available only when the [PU-ON] soft-key is displayed on the error
message window. Stop using the product in the case of a repeating error without the [PU-ON]
soft-key.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Operation procedure1.

In the error message window, press the [PU-ON] soft-key. The power unit energization setting
window opens.

2.

The power unit with an error is marked with "E" like

. Check on the power unit that has anerror. First, leaving the energization setting as is, select OK. All the power units are restarted.
3.

When the error message window is displayed again, press the ENTER key.

4.

If the error still exists, press the [PU-ON] soft-key again to open the power unit energization
setting window.

5.

Check on the power unit that has an error. If the same power unit still has an error, it may be
faulty. Move the cursor to this power unit, then press the ENTER key. The check mark on thispower unit is removed, showing. If a different power unit has an error, leave the check

mark as is. Select [OK].
6.

The power unit energization setting is updated, and only the power units with the check markare restarted. When the error message window is displayed again, press the ENTER key.

7.

Repeat the step 4 and later ones until errors are resolved. After the error is resolved, the productcan be continuously used using the power units with the check mark.

DP Series/DP Series Type R249

8. Troubleshooting-------- Notes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The E mark does not mean it is faulty but indicates the protection operation was activated. In
some cases such as the protection operation was activated in a chain-reaction manner, the E
mark may appear on a normal power unit. A power unit is judged as faulty by checking
whether the error repeats or not after the power unit is restarted as described in the step 2.
When the error message is "ID:54 Power Unit DCPS Undervoltage" or "ID:52 Power Unit
DCPS Error," the error is quite likely to be resolved after the power unit is restarted as
described in the step 2.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

8.1.4 Protection Operation Types
When the protection function is activated or an error is detected, the product applies one of thefollowing five types of protection operation and error message, according to the error level.
System Lock
The output turns off. No operations are accepted on the control panel and the remote controller. The
panel says "System Locked." To operate the product again, it is necessary to cycle the power of it.
Output Off
The output turns off. The panel says "Output OFF" and "Press Enter Key." When you press the
ENTER key, you will return to the previous window for further operations if the cause of the error
has been removed. Otherwise, the error message window will be displayed again.
When the [PU-ON] soft-key is displayed on the error message window, pressing the soft-key opens
the power unit energization setting window. If an error repeatedly occurs, you can disable theenergization of the power unit that has the error to continue to use the product with the rest of thepower units. For details, see 8.1.3.
Message display only
The output state remains unchanged. The panel shows the error message window. Press the ENTER
key to return to the previous screen for further operations.
Limiting action
The output is limited. The panel shows the icon indicating the limiting action, without an error
message. In addition, the LIMIT LED illuminates on the front panel. The output turns off after agiven period according to the limiter setting. In this case, an error message appears after the output
off.
Icon display
The output state remains unchanged. The panel shows an icon instead of an error message. The
panel operation is available as usual.

250

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

8.1 Error Messages and Error Handling

8.1.5 Error Message List
Error messages are listed in Table 8-2.
Table 8-2 Error Message ListID
2

Message

Protection
type
Messagedisplay only
Messagedisplay only

3

Invalid in This Output
Mode
Invalid with Output ON

4

Invalid with Output OFF

Messagedisplay only

5

Busy

Messagedisplay only

6

Invalid with Remote
Control

Messagedisplay only

10

Sync Frequency Error

Messagedisplay only

13

Auto Cal Disabled

15

AGC Disabled

20

Invalid24

USB Memory
Unconnected
USB Memory Removed
illegally

Messagedisplay only
Messagedisplay only
Messagedisplay only
Messagedisplay only
Messagedisplay only

25
26
27

USB Memory Access
Error
Too Many Files

Messagedisplay only
Messagedisplay only29

Sync Frequency Unlocked

Messagedisplay only

30

Remote Controller Error

Messagedisplay only

31

Internal Memory Error

Messagedisplay only

DP Series/DP Series Type R

Cause or Necessary action
This output mode does not allow the setting(execution). Change the output mode.
The output on state does not allow thesetting (execution). Turn the output off, thenset (execute).
The output off state does not allow thesetting (execution). Turn the output on, thenset (execute).
The busy state does not allow the setting(execution). Execute after the busy icon
disappears.
The remote control state does not allow thesetting (execution). Bring the state to local
control, then set (execute).
The external synchronization signal
frequency is out of the range, which does
not allow the setting (execution). Enter thesignal frequency within the range.
The Autocal setting becomes off because ofout of the calibration range.
The AGC setting becomes off because ofout of the calibration range.
The condition cannot be set (executed).
No USB memory is connected. Connect a
USB memory.
The USB memory was removed before theeject operation. Perform the eject operation
before removing a USB memory.
The USB memory has an access error.
There are too many files in the USB
memory. Each folder can contain 500 files
or less.
The output cannot be turned on because of
not locking to the synchronization
frequency.
Communication with the remote controller
cannot be made. Make sure the remotecontroller cable is connected properly.
The internal memory has an error.

251

8. Troubleshooting

Table 8-2 Error Message List (Continued)
ID

Message

32

Calibration Data Error ME

33

Line Overvoltage

34

Line Undervoltage

36

Communication Failure
PU

SystemLock
SystemLock
SystemLock

37

Communication Failure
ME

SystemLock

38

Communication Failure SC System
Lock

40

Polyphase Connection
Timeout

System
Lock

41

46

Mismatched Firmware
Versions
Mismatched Pw Unit
Versions
Unsupported Pw Unit
VersionMismatched Cabinet
Connect
Inhibited Cabinet Connect

SystemLock
SystemLock
SystemLock
SystemLock
SystemLock

47

No Available Power Unit

48

Output Overvoltage

SystemLock
Output Off

43
44
45

252

Protection
type
Messagedisplay only

Cause or Necessary action
The adjustment data is abnormal. Cycle thepower. If it still occurs, contact the seller(NF Corporation or our agent) from whom
you purchased the product.
The power input voltage is excessive. Checkif the power input is appropriate.
The power input voltage is insufficient.
Check if the power input is appropriate.
There is a communication error between thefirmware and the power unit. Cycle thepower. If it still occurs, contact the seller(NF Corporation or our agent) from whom
you purchased the product.
There is a communication error between thefirmware and the output measurement
section. Cycle the power. If it still occurs,
contact the seller (NF Corporation or our
agent) from whom you purchased the
product.
The polyphase system communication isabnormal. Make sure the System Cable isconnected properly.
In the polyphase system, the connection
destination cannot be recognized in thespecified time. Make sure the System Cableis connected properly, then turn on the
power of all the cabinets in 20 seconds. A
single-phase model connected to apolyphase model also generates this error.
In the polyphase system, the main firmware
versions of the cabinets do not match.
All power unit versions do not match.
A power unit of unsupported version isconnected.
In the polyphase system, the output
capacities of the phases do not match.
Polyphase models are connected with the
System Cable. Use a polyphase model
alone.
There is no power unit that can be started.
The output voltage is excessive. This may
occur at an abrupt change in the output
current due to the inductive load.

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

8.1 Error Messages and Error Handling

Table 8-2 Error Message List (Continued)
ID

Message50

Output Overcurrent [RMS]

Protection
type
Output Off

51

Output Overcurrent [Peak]

Output Off

52

Power Unit DCPS Error

Output Off

53

Power Unit DCPS
Overvoltage

Output Off

54

Power Unit DCPS
Undervoltage

Output Off

55

Overheat

Output Off

56

Sensing Voltage Error

Output Off

57

Sync Frequency Error

Output Off

58

Current Limiter [RMS]

Output Off

59

Current Limiter [Peak]

Output Off

60

Power Unit Internal Error

Output Off

61

Limiting
actionLimiting
actionLimiting
action

62
63
64
68

Limiting
actionPU-ON Setting Updated

DP Series/DP Series Type R

Messagedisplay only

Cause or Necessary action
The output current RMS value is excessive
on a module in the power unit. This may
occur when the output terminal isshort-circuited.
The output current peak value is excessive.
The DC power supply in the power unit isabnormal, or see the notes in "8.1.3,
Operation procedure."
The voltage of the DC power supply in the
power unit is excessive.
In DP series, this may occur when the
power flows back from the load.
In DP series Type R, this may occur if thereverse power flow exceeds specifications.
The voltage of the DC power supply in the
power unit is insufficient, or see the notes in"8.1.3, Operation procedure." This may
occur when the overload output activatedthe protection function on the DC power
supply.
The temperature in the power unit isabnormally high. Check if the ambient
temperature is appropriate. Check the filtersfor clogging. For filter cleaning, see 9.2.
The sensing voltage is abnormal. Make surethe cable is properly connected to thesensing input terminal.
The frequency went out of thesynchronizable range, and thus the output
turned off.
The RMS current limiter was activated, andthus the output was turned off according to
the setting.
The peak current limiter was activated, andthus the output was turned off according to
the setting.
This is a power unit internal error. If it
occurs repeatedly, contact the seller (NF
Corporation or our agent) from whom you
purchased the product.
The wattage limiter is activated.
The RMS current limiter is activated.
The peak current limiter is activated.
The internal operation differs from that for
ID 64.
The peak current limiter is activated.
The internal operation differs from that for
ID 63.
The power unit energization setting was
updated.
253

8. Troubleshooting

Table 8-2 Error Message List (Continued)
ID
69

Message
Polyphase Connection
Updated70,
71
75

Calibration Data Error SH

77

USB Memory Connected78

USB Memory
Disconnected

82

Sequence Compile Error

83

Simulation Compile Error

84

87

System Updated Please
RebootSystem Updated Please
RebootUnbalanced Line Voltage-200

EXECUTION ERROR

85

254

Protection typeMessagedisplay only
Icon
display
Messagedisplay only
Messagedisplay only
Messagedisplay only
Messagedisplay only
Messagedisplay only
System Lock

Cause or Necessary action
A phase configuration is detected that isdifferent from the previous one.
The power unit or the system has notbeen adjusted.
The adjustment data is abnormal.
A USB memory was inserted.
The USB memory eject operation was
performed, and thus the USB memory
can be removed now.
Sequence compilation failed.
Simulation compilation failed.
The firmware was updated.

System Lock

The firmware was updated.

System LockIn the polyphase system, there is acabinet with a different power supply
voltage. Use the same power supply
voltage.
The panel operation (or remotecommand) could not be executed.

Messagedisplay only

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

8.2 When a Failure is Suspected

8.2

When a Failure is Suspected

When a symptom occurs that suspects a failure, take an action according to Table 8-3. If it does not
solve the problem, contact the seller (NF Corporation or our agent) from whom you purchased the
product.
Table 8-3 Actions When a Failure is Suspected
Category
Problem at
power
on/offSymptom
The product does
not start
operating when
the power switch
is turned on.
The product does
not stop
immediately
when the powerswitch is turnedoff.
LCD shows
nothing (fan isrotating).

Problem atkey
operation

Problem at
outputsetting

Panel operations
cannot be
performed.
Numerical
values cannot beentered throughthe numeric
keypad.
At start-up, theprevious settings
are not kept.
The output
voltage range
cannot be
switched.
The output
voltage cannot
be set.

The output
frequency cannot
be set.

Possible Cause
The power is notconnected.
The power supply is outof the rated range.
The internal fuse isblown.
It is not abnormal. The
product automaticallystops after the internal
voltage decreases to a
sufficiently safe level.

Necessary Actions
Connect the product to the power
supply. →2.4
Use the power supply within the
rated range. →2.4
Ask us or our agent for repair.

The LCD contrast is
low. The ambient
temperature may bechanged from the time
when the contrast was
adjusted.

Increase the LCD contrast. If the
LCD display is completely
invisible, perform the Shortcut+
tooperation
adjust the contrast. Then, the digit
cursor is placed on the tenths
place. →4.27
Set the key lock to off. →4.25

The key lock is set toon.
Keys or dials are
deteriorated.
It is in the shift state(the SHIFT key LED
illuminates).

Ask us or our agent for repair.
Press the SHIFT key to exit fromthe shift state. →3.3.7

They are not saved in
the setting memory No.
1.
The output is on.

At start-up, the settings in thesetting memory No. 1 are recalled.
→4.8.1
Turn the output off before
switching the output voltage
range. →3.4.2

The signal source is set
to EXT or VCA.
You are trying to set avalue that is out of thesetting range.
The signal source is set
to EXT or SYNC.

Change the signal source. →3.4.1

You are trying to set avalue that is out of thesetting range.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

Please wait for a moment. It willstop in about five seconds.

Check for the voltage setting
range limit. →4.1.3
This value cannot be set when thesignal source is EXT and SYNC.
Change the signal source. →3.4.1
Check for the frequency setting
range limit. →4.1.4

255

8. Troubleshooting

Table 8-3 Actions When a Failure is Suspected (Continued)
Category
Problem at
output setting

Symptom
The line
synchronization
cannot be set.
The output on
state cannot be
achieved.

Possible Cause
The signal source is not
set to SYNC.
An error message ison-screen.

Output-related The output
The state is the output
problemvoltage does not off (the OUTPUT key
come up.
LED illuminates)
The output voltage is
set to zero.
The external signal
source is notconnected.
The external input gain
is zero.
There is no
output from theoutlet on thefront.

When theexternal signal
is amplified on
EXT or ADD,
the waveform is
distorted andthe intended
output is notprovided.
The measured
voltage isdifferent fromthe setting
value.

256

The output coupling
mode is the DC mode.

Necessary Actions
Set the signal source to SYNC andthe external synchronization
signal source to LINE. →4.19
The output cannot be turned on
while there is an error message. If
the protection function is
activated, remove the cause.
→8.1.2Press the ENTER key to clear theerror message. When the message
says "System Locked", cycle thepower.
Press the OUTPUT key to turn the
output on.
Check for the output voltage
setting. →3.4.4, 3.4.5
When the signal source is EXT,
ADD, or VCA, connect the signal
source to the external signal input
terminal, and set the external input
gain appropriately.
→4.17, 4.20
The front output outlet can beused only in the AC mode or
ACDC mode. The output does notappear in the DC mode.

The output voltage
range is 200 V.

The Japan/North America typeoutlet can be used only in the 100
V range. The output does notappear in the 200 V range.

The output coupling
mode is the AC mode.

In the AC mode, the waveform
may be distorted as the DC
component removal function
works. Use in the ACDC mode.

Unnecessary items areset (for example, theAC voltage setting
remains for the DC
output).
The limiter is activated(the limiter icon isdisplayed).

Check for the setting again. In the
ADD mode, check on the external
input signal and gain setting as
well. →4.20
For a load with lower impedance,
the limiter is activated to make theoutput lower than the setting
value. Check on the limiter
setting. →4.1

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

8.2 When a Failure is Suspected

Table 8-3 Actions When a Failure is Suspected (Continued)
Category
Output-related
problem

Symptom
The measured
voltage is different
from the setting
value.

Possible Cause
The waveform is set
to CLP (clippedsine wave) and theType is set to Clip
(specified clip ratiomode).

An error message
is displayed.

The protection
function was
activated due tooverload.
Excessive signal
level of the signal
generator.
The ambient
temperature is high.

[DP series Type R
only]

Measurement
function-related
problem

Output turns off
immediately after
start of the reverse
power flow
operation.
The measured
voltage or current
is not displayedcorrectly.
The measured
value is displayed
as "----".

DP Series/DP Series Type R

Air filters are
clogged.
Around the front
panel air inlet orrear panel air outlet,
there is something
blocking the airflow.
The reverse power
flow exceeds
specifications.
Air filters are
clogged.

Necessary Actions
In the specified clip ratio mode,the output voltage setting means avalue for the waveform before
being clipped. To set a value forthe clipped waveform, set the Typeto the specified crest factor mode
(Type: CF). →4.6
Connect a load within the
maximum output range or decrease
the output voltage setting.
When the signal source is EXT or
ADD, lower the level of theconnected signal generator or
decrease the external input gain.
Decrease the ambient temperaturewhen using the product. The
maximum current may decreaseover 40 °C.
Clean the air filters by referring to
9.2.
Install the product so as to satisfy
the installation conditions
described in 2.2.

Do not turn off the power switch,please wait for a while without thereverse power flow.
Clean the air filters by referring to
9.2.

The display
selection is not
right.

Select RMS for AC. Otherwise, thecorrect value is not displayed.

It is out of thesynchronization
frequency
measurement
display range.

Set the synchronization signal
source frequency to a value within
the synchronization frequency
measurement display range.
→10.11257

8. Troubleshooting

Table 8-3 Actions When a Failure is Suspected (Continued)
Category
Measurement
function-related
problem

Symptom
The measured
value fluctuates.

Possible Cause
The signal source is
set to EXT.

A low frequency(less than 10 Hz) is
set.
Limiter/setting
range
limitationrelated problem

Remote sensing
problem258

The output
current
peak-hold value(measured) islarger than thepeak current
limiter setting
value.
The Remotesensing function
cannot be turnedon.

The output current
overshoot occurred
for the limit value.

The output mode isincorrect.
The waveformsetting is incorrect.
The mode is not theContinuous mode.
The mode is not thestand-by state ofSequence mode.
In the stand-by stateof Sequence mode
(step0) and ACDC
mode either AC
voltage or DC
voltage setting is not
0 V.

Necessary Actions
In EXT, the measurement cycle isfixed, and thus the difference fromthe external signal cycle may
fluctuate the measured value. On
the other hand, in the ADD mode,
the appropriate measurement
cycle is decided according to theinternal signal source frequency
setting. Therefore, if you know thefrequency of the external signal touse, change the signal source to
ADD, set the internal signal
source frequency to the externalsignal frequency, and set theinternal signal source output
voltage to zero. →4.20
For a frequency lower than 10 Hz,
the measurement cycle is a fixedvalue and thus the measured value
may not be stable.
While the peak current limiter isactivated, the overshoot may
occur depending on the load.
→4.1.1The Remote sensing function canbe set to on in the AC-INT,
AC-VCA, AC-SYNC, DC-INT,and DC-VCA modes. For the ACmode, it can be set to on only
when the waveform is a sine
wave. It is turned off when the
Sequence or Simulation function
is selected. However it can be set
to ON in the AC-INT, ACDC-INT
and DC-INT modes and the
waveform is a sine wave or DC incase the stand-by state ofSequence mode (step0). In the
ACDC mode it cannot be set to
ON unless either AC voltage or
DC voltage setting is 0 V.
→4.11

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

8.2 When a Failure is Suspected

Table 8-3 Actions When a Failure is Suspected (Continued)
Category
Problem ofAGC
function

Problem of
Autocalfunction

Problem of
remotecontrol
Problem of
CONTROL
I/O

Problem ofUSB
memorySymptom
The AGC
function cannot
be turned on.

Possible Cause
The output mode isincorrect.
The waveform setting isincorrect.
The mode is not theContinuous mode.

Necessary Actions
The AGC function can be set toon in the AC-INT, AC-VCA,
AC-SYNC, DC-INT, and
DC-VCA modes. However, for
the AC mode, it can be set to on
only when the waveform is a sine
wave. It is turned off when the
Sequence or Simulation function
is selected. →4.12
The Autocal function is When the Autocal function is on,on.
the AGC function cannot be used.
Turn off the Autocal function.
→4.13
The Autocal
The output mode is
The Autocal function can be set tofunction cannot
incorrect.
on in the AC-INT, AC-VCA,
be turned on.
The waveform setting is AC-SYNC, DC-INT, and
DC-VCA modes. However, forincorrect.
the AC mode, it can be set to on
The mode is not the
only when the waveform is a sine
Continuous mode.
wave. It is turned off when the
The mode is not theSequence or Simulation function
stand-by state ofis selected. However it can be set
Sequence mode.
to ON in the AC-INT, ACDC-INTIn the stand-by state ofand DC-INT modes and when the
Sequence mode (step0)
waveform is a sine wave or DC inand ACDC mode eithercase the stand-by state of
AC voltage or DC
Sequence mode (step0). In thevoltage setting is not
ACDC mode it cannot be set to
0 V.
ON unless either AC voltage or
DC voltage setting is 0 V.
→4.13
The AGC function is on. When the AGC function is on, theAutocal function cannot be used.
Turn the AGC function off.
→4.12
See "Instruction Manual (Remote Control)" in the attached CD-ROM.
The productcannot becontrolled by the
CONTROL I/O.

The external control isdisabled.
The Remote state is set
by the communicationinterface.
USB eject operation was
performed.

Files in the USB
memory do notappear on thescreen.

One folder contains over
500 files.
The format is illegal.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

Enable the external control.
→4.18
The external control is disabled in
the Remote state.
Perform the USB eject operation(→4.9) again just in case, andremove the USB memory.
Reconnect the USB memory andmake sure the file names are
displayed.
Reduce the number of files in afolder to 500 or less.
Use a FAT32-formatted USB
memory.

259

8. Troubleshooting

Table 8-3 Actions When a Failure is Suspected (Continued)
Category
Problem atdriving an
inductive
load (e.g.,transformer)

Symptom
The current
waveform isabnormal (e.g.,
asymmetrical orexcessive) when
the transformer
is connected as
the load and theAC voltage is
output.
The output
overvoltage error
occurs for an
inductive load(e.g.,
transformer).

Possible Cause
The output offset
voltage (DC component)
caused the loadtransformer core toreach the magnetic
saturation.

Necessary Actions
In the AC mode, the control
function works to eliminate theoffset voltage (DC component).
When the product is used in the
ACDC mode, switch it to the AC
mode. →3.4.1
If it does not bring much
improvement, adjust the DC
offset. →4.14

An abrupt change in the
output current generated
a back electromotive
force.

Memoryfunctionrelated
problemSequence/
Simulationrelated
problem

The memory
cannot berecalled.

The output is on.

When the output is off or the peakcurrent limiter is activated, theload current may change abruptly,
which generates a backelectromotive force to cause theoutput overvoltage error. To avoid
the abrupt current change, reduce
the setting value of the peakcurrent limiter sufficiently for asmaller output current, or
conversely set it to a sufficiently
large value to disable the limiterto be activated, or sufficiently
reduce the amplitude before
turning off the output. →4.1.1
The output on state does not allow
the recall. Turn the output off.

The Sequence
cannot be
started.
The specified
Step Time isexceeded.

The output is off.

Turn on the output, then start thesequence.

The Stop Phase isenabled.

Problem ofpolyphasesystemThe polyphasesystem is notrecognized atstart-up.

The System Cable is notconnected properly.

When the stop phase setting is
active, the execution waits for the
Step Time that was set pass, andkeeps the output setting until itreaches the Stop Phase that wasset, and then transitions to thenext step. As the result, the actual
step time is longer than the set
Step Time. To move to the next
step immediately after the Step
Time, disable the Stop Phase.
→4.2
Check the System Cable
connection for any disconnectedconnector, and so on.

260

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

9. Maintenance

DP Series/DP Series Type R

9.1

Preface ······················································· 262

9.2

Daily Maintenance ········································· 262

9.3

Storage, Repackaging, Transportation ··············· 265

9.4

Checking Firmware Version ······························ 265

261

9. Maintenance

9.1

PrefaceThis chapter describes:
daily maintenancecautions and storing for nonuse over a long period
cautions and repackaging for transportation.
checking firmware version
For the simple operation check, see 2.7.

9.2

Daily Maintenance

The product shall be installed in a location that satisfies the installation conditions (see 2.2).
When the panel or case is dirty
Wipe it with a soft cloth. If the dirt is heavy, wipe it with a cloth wrung out with diluted neutral
detergent solution.

CAUTION
Do not use solvents (thinners, benzine, etc.) or wipes. Otherwise, the surface may be altered or
the coatings may be peeled off.

When the front grill air filters are dirty
A front grill is provided with air filters for removing dust or dirt from the intake air. Clogged air
filters deteriorate the ventilation, resulting in excessive high temperature inside the product. This
may activate the overheat protection, affecting the operation, or damage the internal parts, resulting
in failure. Regularly check the air filters for dirt, about once a month. If air filters are found dirty,
rinse with water to remove the dirt, dry completely, then remount them. You can optionally request
additional air filters for replacement (see 7.4).

CAUTION
Do not install the product in a place with a large amount of extremely fine dust (e.g., powders).
The air filters may not fully work.
Do not install the product in a damp place prone to dew. The air filters are more likely to be
clogged.

WARNING
Before removing the air filters and the front grill, be sure to cut the power to the distribution
board. Otherwise, an electric shock might occur.

262

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

9.2 Daily Maintenance

The air filters can be removed by the steps described below. In order to remount them later, checkon the top and bottom of the front grill and the mounting position of the air filters as you remove
them.
1.

Loosen the screw at the bottom of the front grill holder by turning it clockwise. Slide the front
grill holder downward to dismount it.

2.

Flip up the control panel to its maximum angle.

3.

Dismount the front grills in turn from the top. The topmost front grill is fixed at the bottom left
and right to the chassis, and hung at the top on the hook of the chassis. Hold the front grill at thebottom left and right sides, and pull it out toward you to release it. Move the front grill upward
and toward you. Unhook and remove it as letting the control panel through it.

DP Series/DP Series Type R263

9. Maintenance

4.

Each of the other front grills is fixed at the bottom left and right to the chassis. Hold it at the left
and right sides, and pull it out toward you to remove it.

5.

Remove the air filters from the back of each front grill. Be careful with the small claws on thefront grill that hold the air filters.

GAtB^ðøÁ|¯Ä¢éËNÉÓµÜ·

Mind the claws
that hold the air
filterst Filter'sBoutside^notchedÌØèside
«ª
faces
 éûªO¤Å·

6.

Rinse the removed air filters with water to remove dirt and clog. Dry them completely.

7.

Remount them in reverse order of steps 1 to 5.

264

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

9.3 Storage, Repackaging, Transportation

WARNING
While removing the air filters and the front grill, do not supply the power from the distribution
board. Otherwise, an electric shock might occur.

9.3

Storage, Repackaging, Transportation

This product shall be stored in a location that satisfies the installation conditions (see 2.2).
Storage when unused for a long time
Remove the power cable from the distribution board and the product.
Store the product in a place with no falling object or dust. If it may be covered with dust, put
the cover, such as cloth and polyethylene sheet, on it.
Avoid a place exposed to rapid temperature change or direct sunlight. Store it under a normal
temperature environment wherever possible. For the storage condition, see 10.30.
Repackaging and transportation
Follow the instructions below when repackaging the product due to transfer or repair.
In order for the main unit to be sufficiently protected from impact during transportation, packit with a shock absorber such as AirCap.
When requesting transportation, instruct the carrier that this product is a precision equipment.
Be sure to include the instruction manual at transportation.

9.4

Checking Firmware Version

Operation procedure1.

Press the MENU key to move to the root menu, then select [System]. The System menu opens.

DP Series/DP Series Type R265

9. Maintenance2.

Put the cursor on [View] next to the [Information] item, then press the ENTER key.

3.

The Information window opens. The firmware version is shown at the [Firmware Version] item.

Note: This is a screenshot with firmware version 2.30.

266

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

10. Specifications

10.1 Output Function ·············································· 269
10.2 Output Range ················································ 269
10.3 AC/DC Mode ················································· 269
10.4 Signal Source ················································ 270
10.5 AC Output ····················································· 271
10.6 DC Output ····················································· 275
10.7 Output Voltage Stability ···································· 276
10.8 Distortion of Output Voltage Waveform ················ 276
10.9 Power Input ··················································· 277
10.10 Withstand Voltage and Insulation Resistance ········ 277
10.11 Measurement Function ···································· 278
10.12 Power Unit Energization Setting ························ 283
10.13 Current Limiter ··············································· 284
10.14 Setting Range Limit Function ···························· 286
10.15 Remote Sensing ············································· 287
10.16 AGC ···························································· 287
10.17 Autocal (Output Voltage Compensation) ·············· 288
10.18 Sequence ····················································· 289
10.19 Simulation ····················································· 290
10.20 Clipped Sine Wave·········································· 291
10.21 Arbitrary Wave ··············································· 291
10.22 External Signal Input ······································· 292
10.23 General Function ············································ 293
10.24 Memory Function ············································ 294
10.25 Self-diagnosis/Protection Function ····················· 295
10.26 External Control Function ································· 295
10.27 External Interface ··········································· 297
10.28 USB Memory Interface ····································· 298
10.29 Waveform Monitor Output ································· 298
10.30 Safety, EMC, and RoHS ··································· 299
10.31 Operation Environment ···································· 299
10.32 Externals, Weight, and Terminal Block ················ 300
10.33 Option ·························································· 302
10.34 Outline Dimensional Drawing ···························· 305

DP Series/DP Series Type R

267

10. Specifications

Specifications are valid under the following settings and conditions and after a warm-up period of
30 minutes at least, unless otherwise noted.
Load:

Resistive load, power factor = 1.

Signal source:

INT (internal signal source).

Output voltage waveform:

sine.

Remote sensing:

off.

AGC/Autocal:

off.

Current limiter:factory default setting.

Output terminal:

output terminal block on the rear panel.

[set] indicates a setting value, and [rdg] indicates a read value.
The description noted with "/" indicates that the specification changes by the output range, such as"100 V range specification / 200 V range specification."
The input voltage is noted as line voltage in three-phase four-wire input, unless otherwise noted.

A value with the accuracy is the guaranteed value of the specification. However, an accuracy
noted as reference value shows the supplemental data for reference when the product is used, andis not under the guarantee. A value without the accuracy is the nominal value or representativevalue (shown as typ.).

The DP series and DP series Type R, other than single-phase three-wire models (DP030D,
DP060D, DP090D, DP120D, DP030RD, DP060RD, DP090RD), corresponds to Clause 2 (8)Frequency converter, Appendix 1 of Export Trade Control Ordinance of Japan. The permission forexportation of the Japanese Administration is necessary for export outside Japan.

Notes on Polyphase System
Single-phase three-wire (1P3W) system can be configured by connecting 2 single-phase models.
Three-phase four-wire (3P4W) system can be configured by connecting 3 single-phase models inthe same way. These are called as polyphase system. Refer to Table 1-3 to Table 1-5 for the
combination of the single-phase models which can configure the polyphase system.
Firmware discriminates power capacity and polyphase type at the start-up process just after
turning on the system connected with an optional system cable (either 1P3W or 3P4W type), andthe system starts to operate as that power capacity and polyphase type.
Output Lo terminals connected together become a neutral point (N terminal) in both the 1P3W and
3P4W system. Hi terminals are called L1, L2, and L3, respectively (L3 exists only in 3P4W
system). The cabinet to which the L1 connector of the System Cable is connected operates as
master. The cabinets to which L2 and L3 is connected operate as slave. Output voltage is definedwith phase voltage (L1, L2, and L3 to N) in this document unless otherwise noted.
268

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

10.1 Output Function

10.1

Output Function
All models

Output function

10.2

Continuous, Sequence, Simulation

Output Range
All models

Output range

10.3

100 V range, 200 V range

AC/DC Mode
Single-phase and Multi-phase models

Polyphase models and Polyphasesystems
AC, ACDC

AC/DC mode

AC, ACDC, DC

AC

Description
The signal source and amplification section of this product are AC-coupled, andthe DC component is canceled.
Only the AC output setting of 40 Hz or higher is available.
The signal sources that can be combined are INT, VCA, SYNC, EXT, and ADD.
When the waveform superimposed with DC is amplified using EXT and ADD(using external signal sources), it may not be an intended output because the DC
component is canceled. In this case, select the ACDC mode.

ACDC

The signal source and amplification section of this product are DC-coupled, andthe DC component is also amplified.
The AC and DC output settings of 1 Hz or higher are available.
The signal sources that can be combined are INT, SYNC, EXT, and ADD.
In the polyphase model, polyphase system, and polyphase output of theMulti-phase model, only the AC setting is available.
Fixed to this mode in the Simulation.
Select this mode when you want to amplify a signal including DC, to superimpose
DC (DC offset), or output a frequency of 40 Hz or lower. Also select this mode
when the DC component temporally occurs, for example, by sudden change ofvoltage or phase.

DC

The signal source and amplification section of this product are DC-coupled.
Only the DC setting is available.
The signal sources that can be combined are INT and VCA.
It is unavailable for the polyphase model, the polyphase system, and polyphase
output of the Multi-phase model.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

269

10. Specifications

10.4

Signal Source
Single-phase and Multi-phase models

Signal source

INT, VCA, SYNC, EXT, ADD

INT

Uses the internal signal source.

Polyphase models and Polyphasesystems
INT, VCA, SYNC

Description
Sets the output voltage, output waveform, frequency, output on phase, and output
off phase by using the panel or the external interface such as USB.
Fixed to INT in the Sequence and Simulation.
VCA

Uses the internal signal source.
Controls the output voltage setting of the internal signal source with the DC
signal which is input to the external input terminal. The output voltage setting
cannot be set from external interfaces such as the panel or USB. All conditions
except for output voltage setting are same as INT.
In the polyphase model, polyphase system, and polyphase output of theMulti-phase model, the setting is common to all the phases.
Cannot be selected in the ACDC mode.

SYNC

Uses the internal signal source.
Synchronizes the frequency of the internal signal source with the signal (EXT)from the external synchronization signal input terminal (also used as the external
input terminal) or the power supply input frequency (LINE) of the product. The
frequency setting cannot be set from external interfaces such as the panel or USB.
All conditions except for output frequency setting are same as INT.
Cannot be selected in the DC mode.

EXT

Uses the external signal source.
Amplifies the signal from the external input terminal by the specified
gain(variable), and outputs it.
Cannot be selected for the polyphase model, the polyphase system, and polyphase
output of the Multi-phase model.
Cannot be selected in the DC mode.

ADD

Uses both the internal and external signal sources.
Amplifies the signal from the external input terminal by the specified gain like
EXT, and adds the internal signal source component to it.
Cannot be selected for the polyphase model, the polyphase system, and polyphase
output of the Multi-phase model.
Cannot be selected in the DC mode.

270

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

10.5 AC Output

10.5

AC Output[V]=Vrms, [A]=Arms, unless otherwise noted.
DP series
DP series Type R
Mode
Setting mode
*1
Rated output voltage
Voltage setting range*2

Setting resolution
Voltage accuracy *3
Maximum current *4
Maximum peakcurrent*5
Reverse power flow
(only for Type R) *6
Power capacity*7
Load power factor

Frequency
setting range
Setting resolution
Frequency accuracy
Frequency stability*8
Voltage frequency
characteristic*9
Output waveform
Output on phasesetting range*10
Setting resolution
Output off phasesetting range*10
Setting resolution
Phase angle
setting range*1(Unbalanced mode)
Setting resolution
Phase angle accuracy*11
DC offset*12Single-phase model and Single-phase output of Multi-phase model
045S
090S
015S
030S
060S
075S
105S
120S
045M
090M
015RS 030RS 045RS 060RS 075RS 090RS
Single-phase two-wireFloating output, the Lo terminal can be grounded.
Balanced mode, Unbalanced mode
100 V / 200 V
Phase voltage setting (for all phases in balanced mode and each phase inunbalanced mode)
0.0 V to 160.0 V / 0.0 V to 320.0 V
0.0 Vp-p to 454.0 Vp-p / 0.0 Vp-p to 908.0 Vp-p (arbitrary wave)
Line voltage setting (balanced mode and sine wave only)
0.0 V to 320.0 V / 0.0 V to 640.0 V (1P3W)
0.0 V to 277.2 V / 0.0 V to 554.2 V (3P4W)
Phase voltage setting: 0.1 V, Line voltage setting: 0.2 V±(0.5 % of set + 0.6 V / 1.2 V)
15 Α /
30 Α /
45 Α /
60 Α /
75 Α /
90 Α /
105 Α / 120 Α /52.5 Α 60 Α
7.5 Α
15 Α
22.5 Α 30 Α
37.5 Α 45 Α
Peak value (Apk) which is four times of the maximum current
40 % (continuous, 30 °C to 40 °C) of maximum current (phase current, RMS)
50 % (continuous, lower than 30 °C) of maximum current (phase current, RMS)
100 % (reverse power flow time ≤ 180 s, reverse power flow duty ≤ 0.2, 40 °C or
lower) of maximum current (phase current, RMS)
1.5 kVA 3 kVA
4.5 kVA 6 kVA
7.5 kVA 9 kVA
10.5kVA 12 kVA

DP series
0 to 1 (Phase lead or phase lag, 45 Hz to 65 Hz, external power injection orregeneration are not available.)DP series Type R−1 to +1 (Phase lead or phase lag, 45 Hz to 65 Hz)
40.00 Hz to 550.00 Hz (AC mode)
1.00 Hz to 550.00 Hz (ACDC mode)
0.01 Hz±0.01 % of set (23 °C±5 °C)±0.005 %±1 %sine wave, arbitrary wave (16 types), clipped sine wave (3 types)
0.0° to 359.9° variable
0.1°
0.0° to 359.9° variable (active/inactive selectable)
0.1°
L2 phase: 0° to 359.9° (1P3W)
L2 phase: 0° to 359.9°, L3 phase: 0° to 359.9° (3P4W)

*1:

0.1°
45 Hz to 65 Hz: ±1.0°
40 Hz to 550 Hz: ±2.0°
Within ±20 mV (typ., fine adjustment available.)
Only when polyphase system is configured with single-phase model.

*2:Line voltage setting only when polyphase system is configured with single-phase model.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

271

10. Specifications*3:

In the case of 10 V to 150 V / 20 V to 300 V, sine wave, no load, 45 Hz to 65 Hz, DC voltage
setting 0 V, 23 °C±5 °C.

*4:

If the output voltage is higher than the rated value, this is limited (lowered) to satisfy the power
capacity. If there is the DC superimposition, the active current of AC+DC satisfies the maximum
current. In the case of 40 Hz or lower or 400 Hz or higher, and that the ambient temperature is
40 °C or higher, the maximum current may decrease.

*5:

For the capacitor input type rectified load (crest factor=4), the rated output voltage, and 45 Hz to
65 Hz.

*6:

In the case rated output voltage, 50 Hz or 60 Hz, power factor −1. It may reduce the reverse
power flow if ambient temperature is 40 °C or higher. If the output voltage is higher than the
rated value, power capacity is limited to 40 % (continuous, 30 °C to 40 °C), 50 % (continuous,
lower than 30 °C), and 100 % (reverse power flow time ≤ 180 s, reverse power flow duty ≤ 0.2,
40 °C or lower). About duty, see Figure 10-1. Only for DP series Type R, the reverse power flow
is supported.

Reverse power flow time t1 ≤ 180 s
Reverse power flow duty = t1/(t1+t2)≦0.2
Reverse power flow or sink current

Under 100 %

Tim

t1

t2

Figure 10-1 Reverse Power Flow Duty or Sink Time Duty
*7:

In the case that the power input is single-phase 170 V or lower, models with 6 kVA or higher
have the limit on the power capacity in the power running.

*8:

For 45 Hz to 65 Hz, the rated output voltage, no load and the resistance load for the maximum
current, and the operating temperature.

*9:

For 40 Hz to 550 Hz, sine wave, the rated output voltage, the resistance load for the maximum
current at 55 Hz, and 55 Hz reference.

*10: Set for the L1 phase. The component of the phase angle setting is added for the other phases.
*11: In the case of 50 V or higher, sine wave, and same load condition and voltage setting for allphases.
*12: In the case of the AC mode and 23 °C±5 °C.

272

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

10.5 AC Output

DP series
DP series Type R
Mode

Setting mode
Rated output voltage(Phase voltage)
Voltage setting range

Setting resolution
Voltage accuracy(Phase voltage) *13
Maximum current(Phase current) *14
Maximum peakcurrent(Phase current) *15
Reverse power flow
(only for Type R) *16
Power capacity *17
Load power factor

Frequency
setting range
Setting resolution
Frequency accuracy
Frequency stability*18
Voltage frequency
characteristic*19
Output waveform
Output on phasesetting range*20
Setting resolution
Output off phasesetting range*20
Setting resolution
Phase angle
setting range(Unbalanced mode)
Setting resolution
Phase angle accuracy*21
DC offset*22

Polyphase model and Polyphase output of Multi-phase model
030D
060D
045T
090T
090D
120D
045M
090M
045M
090M
030RD
060RD
090RD
045RT
090RT
Three-phase four-wireSingle-phase three-wire(Y-connection)
Floating output, the N terminal can be grounded.
Balanced mode, Unbalanced mode
100 V / 200 V
Phase voltage setting (for all phases in balanced mode and each phase inunbalanced mode)
0.0 V to 160.0 V / 0.0 V to 320.0 V
0.0 Vp-p to 454.0 Vp-p / 0.0 Vp-p to 908.0 Vp-p (arbitrary wave)
Line voltage setting (balanced mode and sine wave only)
0.0 V to 277.2 V /0.0 V to 320.0 V / 0.0 V to 640.0 V
0.0 V to 554.2 V
Phase voltage setting: 0.1 V, Line voltage setting: 0.2 V±(0.5 % of set + 0.6 V / 1.2 V)
15 Α /
7.5 Α

30 Α /
15 Α

45 Α /
22.5 Α

60 Α /
30 Α

15 Α /
7.5 Α

30 Α /
15 Α

Peak value (Apk) which is four times of the maximum current
40 % (continuous, 30 °C to 40 °C) of maximum current (phase current, RMS)
50 % (continuous, lower than 30 °C) of maximum current (phase current, RMS)
100 % (reverse power flow time ≤ 180 s, reverse power flow duty ≤ 0.2, 40 °C or
lower) of maximum current (phase current, RMS)

3 kVA
6 kVA
9 kVA
12 kVA
4.5 kVA
9 kVA
DP series
0 to 1 (Phase lead or phase lag, 45 Hz to 65 Hz, external power injection orregeneration are not available.)DP series Type R−1 to +1 (Phase lead or phase lag, 45 Hz to 65 Hz)
40.00 Hz to 550.00 Hz (AC mode)
1.00 Hz to 550.00 Hz (ACDC mode)
0.01 Hz±0.01 % of set (23 °C±5 °C)±0.005 %±1 %sine wave, arbitrary wave (16 types), clipped sine wave (3 types)
0.0° to 359.9° variable
0.1°
0.0° to 359.9° variable (active/inactive selectable)
0.1°
L2 phase: 180.0°±35.0°

L2 phase: 120.0°±35.0°
L3 phase: 240.0°±35.0°

0.1°
45 Hz to 65 Hz: ±1.0°
40 Hz to 550 Hz: ±2.0°
Within ±20 mV (typ., fine adjustment available.)

DP Series/DP Series Type R

273

10. Specifications*13: In the case of 10 V to 150 V / 20 V to 300 V, sine wave, no load, 45 Hz to 65 Hz, 23 °C±5 °C.
*14: If the output voltage is higher than the rated value, this is limited (lowered) to satisfy the power
capacity. In the case of 40 Hz or lower or 400 Hz or higher, and that the ambient temperature is
40 °C or higher, the maximum current may decrease.
*15: For the capacitor input type rectified load (crest factor=4), the rated output voltage, and 45 Hz to
65 Hz.
*16: In the case rated output voltage, 50 Hz or 60 Hz, power factor −1. It may reduce the reverse
power flow if ambient temperature is 40 °C or higher. If the output voltage is higher than the
rated value, power capacity is limited to 40 % (continuous, 30 °C to 40 °C), 50 % (continuous,
lower than 30 °C), and 100 % (reverse power flow time ≤ 180 s, reverse power flow duty ≤ 0.2,
40 °C or lower). About duty, see Figure 10-1. Only for DP series Type R, the reverse power flow
is supported.
*17: In the case that the power input is single-phase 170 V or lower, models with 6 kVA or higher
have the limit on the power capacity in the power running.
*18: For 45 Hz to 65 Hz, the rated output voltage, no load and the resistance load for the maximum
current, and the operating temperature.
*19: For 40 Hz to 550 Hz, sine wave, the rated output voltage, the resistance load for the maximum
current at 55 Hz, and 55 Hz reference.
*20: Set for the L1 phase. The component of the phase angle setting is added for the other phases.
*21: In the case of 50 V or higher, sine wave, and same load condition and voltage setting for allphases.
*22: In the case of the AC mode and 23 °C±5 °C.

274

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

10.6 DC Output

10.6

DC Output

Only single-phase model and single-phase output of the Multi-phase model. [V]=Vdc, [A]=Adc,unless otherwise noted. The polarity is relative to the Lo terminal.
Single-phase model and Single-phase output of Multi-phase model
DP series
045S
090S
015S
030S
060S
075S
105S
120S
045M
090M
DP series Type R
015RS 030RS 045RS 060RS 075RS 090RS
Mode
Floating output, the Lo terminal can be grounded.
Rated output voltage 100 V / 200 V
Voltage setting range −227.0 V to +227.0 V / −454.0 V to +454.0 V
Setting resolution 0.1 V
Voltage accuracy *23 ±(|0.5 % of set| + 0.6 V / 1.2 V)
Maximum source
15 Α /
30 Α /
45 Α /
60 Α /
75 Α /
90 Α /
105 Α / 120 Α /current*24 7.5 Α
15 Α
22.5 Α 30 Α
37.5 Α 45 Α
52.5 Α 60 Α
Maximum
instantaneous source Peak value (Apk) which is four times of the maximum current
current*25
Sink current*26 40 % (continuous, 30 °C to 40 °C) of maximum source current(only for Type R)
50 % (continuous, lower than 30 °C) of maximum source current
100 % (sink time ≤ 180 s, sink time duty ≤ 0.2, 40 °C or lower) of maximum
source current
Power capacity *27 1.5 kW 3 kW
4.5 kW 6 kW
7.5 kW 9 kW
10.5kW 12 kW*23: In the case of −212 V to −10 V, +10 V to +212 V / −424 V to −20 V, +20 V to +424 V, no load,
AC setting 0 V, 23 °C±5 °C.
*24: If the output voltage is higher than the rated value, this is limited (lowered) to satisfy the power
capacity. If there is the AC superimposition, the active current of DC+AC satisfies the maximum
current. In the case that the ambient temperature is 40 °C or higher, the maximum current may
decrease.
*25: Instantaneous = within 2 ms, at the rated output voltage.
*26: In the case rated output voltage. It may reduce sink current if ambient temperature is 40 °C or
higher. If the output voltage is higher than the rated value, power capacity is limited to 40 %(continuous, 30 °C to 40 °C), 50 % (continuous, lower than 30 °C), and 100 % (sink time ≤ 180 s,
sink time duty ≤ 0.2, 40 °C or lower). About duty, see Figure 10-1. Only for DP series Type R,
sink current is supported.
*27: In the case that the power input is single-phase 170 V or lower, models with 6 kVA (6 kW) or
higher have the limit on the power capacity in the power running.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

275

10. Specifications

10.7

Output Voltage Stability
All models

Fluctuation with
input voltage(Phase voltage)*28 *29Fluctuation with
output current(Phase voltage) *30

Within ±0.15 %DC (Only single-phase model and single-phase output of the Multi-phasemodel)
Within ±0.15 V / ±0.30 V
45 Hz to 65 Hz
Within ±0.15 V / ±0.30 V
40 Hz to 550 Hz
Within ±0.5 V / ±1.0 V

Fluctuation with
ambient temperatureWithin ±0.01 %/°C (typ.)(Phase voltage) *31
28: In the case of single-phase input, for power input 90 V to 250 V for 1.5 kVA, 3 kVA, and 4.5 kVA
models, power input 170 V to 250 V for the 6 kVA or higher models, power input 200 V
reference. In the case of three-phase three-wire input, for power input 170 V to 250 V, power
input 200 V reference. In the case of three-phase four-wire input, for power input is 323 V to 433
V, power input 380 V reference.
*29: For the resistance load at the maximum current, the rated output voltage, DC (only single-phasemodel and single-phase output of the Multi-phase model) or 45 Hz to 65 Hz. Transition state
immediately after a change of the input power-supply voltage is not included.
*30: In the case that the output current is changed from 0 % to 100 % of the maximum current. For
output voltage 75 V to 150 V/150 V to 300 V, no load reference. However, if the output voltage ishigher than the rated value, the maximum current is limited to satisfy the power capacity.
*31: For power input 200 V (single-phase, three-phase three-wire input) or 380 V (three-phasefour-wire input), no load, the rated output voltage, DC (only single-phase output) or 45 Hz to
65 Hz.

10.8

Distortion of Output Voltage Waveform

All models
Distortion
0.5 % or lower(Phase voltage) *32*32: 40 Hz to 550 Hz, 50 % or higher of the rated output voltage, the maximum current or lower, AC
and ACDC modes, THD+N.

276

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

10.9 Power Input

10.9

Power Input

For the 4.5 kVA or higher models, ether single-phase input or three-phase three-wire input or
three-phase four-wire input can be chosen when ordering.
DP series

DP series
Type R

Single-phase model, Polyphase model, Multi-phase model
090S
045S
030S
060S
090D
015S
045T
075S
105S
030D
060D
090T
045M
090M
090RS
030RS
045RS
060RS
015RS
075RS
090RD
030RD
045RT
060RD
090RT
Overvoltage Category II

120S

Voltage
1P2W
100 V to 230 V ±10 %, with limited to 250 V or lower
input *33
3P3W
200 V to 220 V ±15 %, with limited to 250 V or lower
input
3P4W
380 V (phase voltage: 220 V) ±15 %,input
with limited to 433 V (phase voltage: 250 V) or lower
Frequency
50 Hz ±2 Hz or 60 Hz ±2 Hz
Power factor Power input singe-phase 100 V:*34
0.95 or higher (typ.)Power input single-phase 200V, three-phase three-wire 200V,
three-phase four-wire 380V:
0.90 or higher (typ.)
Efficiency
Power input single-phase 200V, three-phase three-wire 200V,*34 three-phase four-wire 380V:
77 % or higher (typ.)
Maximum
11.25kV
15.75kV
2.25 kVA 4.5 kVA
6.75 kVA 9 kVA
13.5 kVA
18 kVAAA
power
or loweror loweror loweror loweror loweror loweror loweror lowerconsumption*33: In the 6 kVA or higher models, the output capacity in the power running is limited to 4.5 kW for
the single-phase 170 V or lower input.
*34: In the case of AC- INT, the rated output voltage, the resistance load at the maximum current,
45 Hz to 65 Hz output.

10.10 Withstand Voltage and Insulation ResistancePower input - Output/Chassis and Power input/Chassis - Output
Withstand voltage
Insulation resistance

All models
AC 1500 V or DC 2130 V, 1 minute.
30 MΩ or higher (DC 500 V)

DP Series/DP Series Type R

277

10. Specifications

10.11 Measurement Function
All accuracy of the measurement function is indicated for 23 °C±5 °C.
View
All models
Displays almost all the measured and setting values excluding the harmonic current
measurement on one screen.
Enlarges and displays three items among all the measured values except theharmonic current measurement.

NormalSimpleVoltage*35

All models
250.0 V / 500.0 V
0.1 V
DC, 45 Hz to 65 Hz± (0.5 % of rdg + 0.3 V / 0.6 V)
40 Hz to 550 Hz± (0.7 % of rdg + 0.9 V / 1.8 V)
DC average
Full scale±250.0 V / ±500.0 V
value (avg)
Resolution
0.1 V
AccuracyDC± (|0.5 % of rdg| + 0.3 V / 0.6 V)
Peak value (pk) Full scale±250.0 V / ±500.0 V(each of
Resolution
0.1 V
max and min)AccuracyDC, 45 Hz to 65 Hz*36± (|2 % of rdg| + 1 V / 2 V)
*35: The accuracy values are in the case that the output voltage is within voltage setting range, values
Effective value(rms)

Full scale
Resolution
Accuracyfor power factor 1 in DP series, and values for power factor ±1 in DP series Type R. In thepolyphase model, polyphase system, and polyphase output of the Multi-phase, this specification
is for the phase voltage and the DC average value display cannot be selected.
*36: The accuracy of the peak value is for a waveform of DC or sine wave.

Voltage (Line voltage. Only with the polyphase model, polyphase system, and polyphase output of
the Multi-phase model. Only with sine waveform output.)
Polyphase model, Polyphase system,
Polyphase output of the Multi-phase model
Effective value Full scale
1P3W: 500.0 V / 1000.0 V(rms)
3P4W: 433.0 V / 866.0 V*37 Resolution
0.1 V*37: The displayed value is the result of calculation with the phase voltage measured value and thephase angle setting value regarding the output voltage waveform as a sine wave.

278

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

10.11 Measurement Function

Current (phase current) *38 *39 *40
Single-phase model, Polyphase model, Multi-phase model
DP series
045S,
015S,030D,045T, 030S,060D,090T,
045M
045M (polyphase 090M (polyphase
090D(single-phase
output)output)output)DP series Type R
015RS,030RD,
030RS,060RD,
045RS
090RD
045RT
090RT
Effective
Full scale
20 A / 10 A
40 A / 20 A
60 A / 30 A
value
Resolution 0.01 A(rms)
AccuracyDC, 45 Hz to 65 Hz± (0.5 % of rdg+ 0.04 A / 0.04 A)± (0.5 % of rdg+ 0.08 A / 0.04 A)± (0.5 % of rdg+ 0.12 A / 0.06 A)± (0.5 % of rdg+ 0.16 A / 0.08 A)± (0.7 % of rdg+ 0.04 A / 0.04 A)± (0.7 % of rdg+ 0.08 A / 0.04 A)± (0.7 % of rdg+ 0.12 A / 0.06 A)± (0.7 % of rdg+ 0.16 A / 0.08 A)±20 A / ±10 A
0.01 ADC±40 A / ±20 A±60 A / ±30 A± (|0.5 % of rdg|
+ 0.04 A / 0.04 A)± (|0.5 % of rdg|
+ 0.08 A / 0.04 A)± (|0.5 % of rdg|
+ 0.12 A / 0.06 A)±80 A / ±40 A±160 A / ±80 A
0.01 A
DC, 45 Hz to 65 Hz±240 A / ±120 A

40 Hz to 550 Hz
DCaverage
value
(avg)

Full scale
Resolution
Accuracy

Peak
value
(pk)
(each ofmax andmin)

Full scale
Resolution
Accuracy(Reference
Value) *41
Hold

DP series
DP series Type R
Effective
value
(rms)

Full scale
Resolution
Accuracy± (|0.5 % of rdg|
+ 0.16 A / 0.08 A)± (|2 % of rdg|
± (|2 % of rdg|
± (|2 % of rdg|
± (|2 % of rdg|
+ 0.2 A / 0.2 A)+ 0.4 A / 0.2 A)+ 0.6 A / 0.3 A)+ 0.8 A / 0.4 A)
Holds the maximum values of |max| and |min| with the polarity (with the clear
function)

Single-phase model, Single-phase three-wire model,
Single-phase output of Multi-phase model
060S, 120D
075S
090S, 090M
105S
120S
060RS
075RS
090RS
80 A / 40 A
100 A / 50 A 120 A / 60 A 140 A / 70 A 160 A / 80 A
0.01 A
DC, 45 Hz to 65 Hz± (0.5 % of rdg+ 0.16 A / 0.08 A)± (0.5 % of rdg + 0.24 A / 0.12 A)± (0.5 % of rdg + 0.32 A / 0.16 A)± (0.7 % of rdg+ 0.16 A / 0.08 A)± (0.7 % of rdg + 0.24 A / 0.12 A)± (0.7 % of rdg + 0.32 A / 0.16 A)±80 A / ±40 A±100A / ±50A

±140A / ±70A

40 Hz to 550 Hz
DCaverage
value
(avg)
Peak
value
(pk)
(each ofmax andmin)

Full scale
Resolution
Accuracy

Full scale
Resolution
Accuracy(Reference
Value) *41

Hold±120A / ±60A

±160A / ±80A

0.01 ADC± (|0.5 % of rdg|
+ 0.16 A / 0.08 A)± (|0.5 % of rdg| + 0.24 A / 0.12 A)± (|0.5 % of rdg| + 0.32 A / 0.16 A)±320A / ±160A±400A/±200A±560A/±280A±480A/±240A±640A/±320A

0.01 A
DC, 45 Hz to 65 Hz± (|2 % of rdg|
± (|2 % of rdg| + 1.2 A / 0.6 A)± (|2 % of rdg| + 1.6 A / 0.8 A)+ 0.8 A / 0.4 A)
Holds the maximum values of |max| and |min| with the polarity (with the clear
function)*38: For DP series, the accuracy values are in the case that the output current is 5 % to 100 % of the
maximum current. For DP series Type R, the accuracy values are in the case that the output
current is −5 % to −100 % or +5 % to +100 % of the maximum current.
*39: In the polyphase model, polyphase system, and polyphase output of the Multi-phase, these are thespecifications for the phase current. The DC average value display cannot be selected.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

279

10. Specifications*40: For DP series Type R, the accuracy values in the reverse power flow are in the case of DC or
50 Hz or 60 Hz, power factor −1.
*41: The accuracy of the peak value is for a waveform of DC or sine wave.

Power *42 *43 *44 *45
Single-phase model, Polyphase model, Multi-phase model
015S, 030D,
030S, 060D,
045S, 045M
090D
045T, 045M
090T,
(single-phase(polyphase
090M (polyphase
output)output)output)DP series Type R
015RS,030RD
030RS,060RD
045RS
090RD
045RT
090RT
ActiveFull scale
DP series(W)*46 1800 W
3600 W
5400 W
DP series Type R±1800 W
±3600 W
±5400 W
Resolution 0.1 W / 1 W (1000 W or higher)
AccuracyDC, 45 Hz to 65 Hz
DP series

Apparent(VA)

Reactive(var)*47 ±(1 % of rdg + 1.5 W) ±(1 % of rdg + 1.5 W)
Full scale
2250 VA
4500 VA
Resolution 0.1 VA / 1 VA (1000 VA or higher)
Accuracy
45 Hz to 65 Hz*48 ±(2 % of rdg + 3 VA) ±(2 % of rdg + 3 VA)
Full scale
2250 var
4500 var
Resolution 0.1 var / 1 var (1000 var or higher)
Accuracy
45 Hz to 65 Hz*49 ±(2 % of rdg + 3 var) ±(2 % of rdg + 3 var)±(1% of rdg + 2.25 W)±(1 % of rdg + 3 W)

6750 VA±(2% of rdg + 4.5 VA)±(2 % of rdg + 6 VA)

6750 var±(2 % of rdg + 4.5 var) ±(2 % of rdg + 6 var)

Single-phase model, Single-phase three-wire model,
Single-phase output of the Multi-phase model
060S, 120D
090S, 090M
DP series
075S
105S
120S
DP series Type R
060RS
075RS
090RS
ActiveFull scale
DP series(W)*46 7200 W
9000 W
10800 W
12600 W
14400 W
DP series Type R±7200 W
±9000 W
±10800 W±12600 W±14400 W
Resolution 0.1 W / 1 W (1000 W or higher)
AccuracyDC, 45 Hz to 65 Hz
Apparent(VA)

Reactive(var)*47
Full scale
Resolution
Accuracy*48
Full scale
Resolution
Accuracy*49±(1 % of rdg + 3 W)±(1 % of rdg + 4.5 W)±(1 % of rdg + 6 W)

9000 VA
11250 VA
13500 VA
0.1 VA / 1 VA (1000 VA or higher)
45 Hz to 65 Hz

15750 VA±(2 % of rdg + 6 VA)±(2 % of rdg + 12 VA)±(2 % of rdg + 9 VA)

18000 VA

9000 var
11250 var
13500 var
0.1 var / 1 var (1000 var or higher)
45 Hz to 65 Hz

15750 var±(2 % of rdg + 6 var)±(2 % of rdg + 12 var)±(2 % of rdg + 9 var)

18000 var

*42: All in the case of sine wave, 50 V or higher output voltage, and that the output current is 10 %or higher of the maximum current.
*43: In the polyphase model, polyphase system, and polyphase output of the Multi-phase, these are
the specifications for each phase.
*44: In the polyphase model, polyphase system, and polyphase output of the Multi-phase, theall-phase total display is available.

280

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

10.11 Measurement Function*45: The apparent and reactive powers are not displayed in the DC mode.
*46:

For DP series Type R, the value is plus display in the power running and minus display in thereverse power flow.

*47:

The accuracy of the active power is for the load with the power factor +1. In the case of the loadwith the power factor +0.5 or more and lower than +1, the accuracy is twice the value with thepower factor +1. For DP series Type R, the accuracy values in the reverse power flow are in thecase of DC or 50 Hz or 60 Hz, power factor −1.

*48:

The accuracy of the apparent power is for the load with the power factor +1. For DP series TypeR, the accuracy in the reverse power flow is in the case of power factor −1.

*49:

The accuracy of the reactive power is for the load with the power factor 0.5 or lower.

Load power factor, Load crest factorPowerfactor*50
Crestfactor*50:

All models
Measurement
DP series : 0.00 to 1.00
range
DP series Type R: −1.00 to +1.00
Resolution
0.01
Measurement
0.00 to 50.00
range
Resolution
0.01
The power factor is not displayed in the DC mode. The value of the power factor is plus display
in the power running and minus display in the reverse power flow.

Synchronization frequency (only SYNC)
All models
Display range
Resolution
Accuracy

DP Series/DP Series Type R

38.0 Hz to 525.0 Hz
0.1 Hz±0.2 Hz

281

10. Specifications

Harmonic current (AC-INT, fundamental wave 50 Hz/60 Hz only, phase current) *51
Single-phase model, Polyphase model, Multi-phase model
015S,030D,045T,
030S,060D,090T,
045S,
090D
DP series

DP series Type R
Effective
value
(rms)

Measurement
range
Full scale

Percent(%)

Resolution
Accuracy(at RMS,
referencevalue)

045M (polyphase
output)090M (polyphase
output)

015RS,030RD
045RT

030RS,060RD
090RT

Effective
value
(rms)

Measurement
range
Full scale

Percent(%)

Resolution
Accuracy(at RMS,
referencevalue)

*51:

045RS

090RD

Up to 40th order of the fundamental wave
20 A / 10 A
100 %0.01 A
0.1 %Up to 20th

40 A / 20 A
100 %

60 A / 30 A
100 %

± (1 % of rdg+ 0.2 A / 0.2 A)± (1 % of rdg+ 0.4 A / 0.2 A)± (1 % of rdg+ 0.6 A / 0.3 A)± (1 % of rdg+ 0.8 A / 0.4 A)± (1.5 % of rdg+ 0.4 A / 0.2 A)± (1.5 % of rdg+ 0.6 A / 0.3 A)± (1.5 % of rdg+ 0.8 A / 0.4 A)

21st to 40th
± (1.5 % of rdg+ 0.2 A / 0.2 A)

DP series
DP series Type R

045M(single-phase
output)Single-phase model, Single-phase three-wire model,
Single-phase output of the Multi-phase model
060S, 120D
075S
090S, 090M
105S
060RS
075RS
090RS

120S

Up to 40th order of the fundamental wave
80 A / 40 A
100 %0.01 A
0.1 %Up to 20th± (1 % of rdg+0.8 A / 0.4 A)

100 A / 50 A
100 %

120 A / 60 A
100 %

140 A / 70 A
100 %

160 A / 80 A
100 %

± (1 % of rdg + 1.2 A / 0.6 A)± (1 % of rdg + 1.6 A / 0.8 A)± (1.5 % of rdg± (1.5 % of rdg + 1.2 A / 0.6 A)+0.8 A/ 0.4 A)± (1.5 % of rdg + 1.6 A / 0.8 A)

21st to 40th

The measurement does not conform to the IEC or other standard.

Display of emission CO2 *52
All models
Displays the instantaneous (kgCO2/h) and integration (tCO2, can be cleared)
values for the internal loss and the output power
Full scale
Instantaneous: 20 kgCO2/h, Integration: 2000 tCO2
Resolution
Instantaneous: 0.001 kgCO2/h, Integration: 0.000001 tCO2
Emission CO2
Variable (resolution 0.000001 tCO2/kWh)coefficient
Factory default: 0.000555 tCO2/kWh*52: In DP series Type R, instantaneous values are not displayed while the reverse power flow is
operating. Also, integration operation stops.
Displayed items

282

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

10.12 Power Unit Energization Setting

10.12 Power Unit Energization Setting
The power consumption can be decreased by decreasing the number of the power units inoperation according to the load capacity. Each power unit can be enabled (energized)/disabled (notenergized) separately. (1.5 kVA or 1.5 kW/power unit)
DP series

Single-phase model and Single-phase output of Multi-phase model
045S
090S
015S
030S
060S
075S
105S
120S
045M
090M
015RS 030RS 045RS 060RS 075RS 090RS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

DP series Type R
Number of units
Energizing setting
No
Yes
*53
*53: Can be set for only a model with more than one unit.

DP series

Polyphase model and Polyphase output of Multi-phase model
045T
090T
030D
060D
090D
120D
045M
090M
030RD
060RD
090RD
045RT
090RT

DP series Type R
Number of units
1234(per phase)
Energizing setting
No
Yes
*54
*54: Can be set for only a model with more than one unit per phase.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

1

2

No

Yes

283

10. Specifications

10.13 Current Limiter
This controls the output voltage for the output current to be within the limiter setting value when
the peak value or RMS exceeds it. The output can be configured to be turned off when the limited
state continues over the specified time.
In the polyphase model, polyphase system, and polyphase output of the Multi-phase model, thesettings are made for the phase current and common to all the phases.
Peak current limiter
Single-phase model, Polyphase model, Multi-phase model
045S, 090D,
015S,030D,045T, 030S,060D,090T,
045M
060S, 120D
045M (polyphase
090M (polyphase

DP series

output)output)(single-phase
output)DP series Type R

015RS,030RD,
045RT

030RS,060RD,
090RT

045RS,090RD

060RS

Positivecurrent*55+7.5 A to +63.0 A/ +3.7 A to +31.5 A+15.0 A to +126.0 A/ +7.5 A to +63.0 A+22.5 A to +189.0 A/ +11.2 A to +94.5 A+30.0 A to +252.0 A/+15.0 A to +126.0 A+63.0 A / +31.5 A+126.0 A / +63.0 A+189.0 A / +94.5 A+252.0 A / +126.0 A−63.0 A to −7.5 A /−31.5 A to −3.7 A−126.0 A to −15.0 A /−63.0 A to −7.5 A−189.0 A to −22.5 A /−94.5 A to −11.2 A−252.0 A to −30.0 A /−126.0 A to −15.0 A−63.0 A / −31.5 A−126.0 A / −63.0 A−189.0 A / −94.5 A−252.0 A / −126.0 A

Negativecurrent*55

Setting Range(Peak value)
Factory
default
Setting Range(Peak value)
Factory
default

Resolution
Limiter operation

DP series
DP series Type R
Positivecurrent*55
Negativecurrent*55

Setting Range(Peak value)
Factory
default
Setting Range(Peak value)
Factory
default

0.1 A
Select whether to recover automatically (continuous) or turn the output off
when the limited state continues over the specified time (1 s to 10 s,
resolution 1 s).
Factory default setting is output OFF when the limit state continues for 10 s.
Single-phase model and Single-phase output of Multi-phase model
075S
090S, 090M
105S
120S
075RS
090RS
+37.5 A to +315.0 A/+18.7 A to +157.5 A+45.0 A to +378.0 A/+22.5 A to +189.0 A+52.5 A to +441.0 A/+26.2 A to +220.5 A+60.0 A to +504.0 A/+30.0 A to +252.0 A+315.0 A / +157.5 A+378.0 A / +189.0 A+441.0 A / +220.5 A+504.0 A / +252.0 A−315.0 A to −37.5 A /−157.5 A to −18.7 A−378.0 A to −45.0 A /−189.0 A to −22.5 A−441.0 A to −52.5 A /−220.5 A to −26.2 A−504.0 A to −60.0 A /−252.0 A to −30.0 A−315.0 A / −157.5 A−378.0 A / −189.0 A−441.0 A / −220.5 A−504.0 A / −252.0 A

Resolution
Limiter operation

*55:

284

0.1 A
Select whether to recover automatically (continuous) or turn the output off
when the limited state continues over the specified time (1 s to 10 s,
resolution 1 s).
Factory default setting is output OFF when the limit state continues for 10 s.
If you increased or decreased the number of units by the power unit energization setting, thefactory default setting corresponding to the capacity is used. (Example: In the case that only 3units operate in 6 kVA model, the factory default setting of 4.5 kVA model is used.)

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

10.13 Current Limiter

RMS current limiter *56
DP series
DP series Type R
Setting range(effective value)*57
Factory default
Resolution
Limiter operation

DP series
DP series Type R
Setting range(effective value)*57
Factory default
Resolution
Limiter operation
*56:
*57:

Single-phase model, Polyphase model, Multi-phase model
015S,030D,045T, 030S,060D,090T,
045S, 090D,
045M (polyphase 090M (polyphase 045M (single-phase
060S, 120D
output)output)output)
015RS,030RD,
030RS,060RD,
045RS,090RD
060RS
045RT
090RT
0.8 A to 15.8 A /
0.8 A to 7.9 A

1.5 A to 31.5 A /
1.5 A to 15.8 A

2.3 A to 47.3 A /2.3 A to 23.7 A

3.0 A to 63.0 A /3.0 A to 31.5 A

15.8 A / 7.9 A

31.5 A / 15.8 A

47.3 A / 23.7 A

63.0 A / 31.5 A

0.1 A
Select whether to recover automatically (continuous) or turn the output off when
the limited state continues over the specified time (1 s to 10 s, resolution 1 s).
Factory default setting is output OFF when the limit state continues for 10 s.
Single-phase model and Single-phase output of Multi-phase model
075S
090S, 090M
105S
120S
075RS
090RS
3.8 A to 78.8 A /3.8 A to 39.4 A

4.5 A to 94.5 A /4.5 A to 47.3 A

5.3 A to 110.3 A /5.3 A to 55.2 A

6.0 A to 126.0 A /6.0 A to 63.0 A

78.8 A / 39.4 A

94.5 A / 47.3 A

110.3 A / 55.2 A

126.0 A / 63.0 A

0.1 A
Select whether to recover automatically (continuous) or turn the output off when
the limited state continues over the specified time (1 s to 10 s, resolution 1 s).
Factory default setting is output OFF when the limit state continues for 10 s.
In DP series Type R, effective value of output current is not limited while the reverse power
flow is occurring. However, LIMIT LED lights up and the specified limiter operation is
performed.
If you increased or decreased the number of units by the power unit energization setting, thefactory default setting corresponding to the capacity is used. (Example: In the case that only 3units operate in 6 kVA model, the factory default setting of 4.5 kVA model is used.)

DP Series/DP Series Type R

285

10. Specifications

10.14 Setting Range Limit Function
This is the limit function for the setting of the internal signal source. It works when the signal
source is INT, VCA (frequency setting limit only), SYNC (voltage setting limit only), or ADD(internal signal source only). The limitation does not work for the Sequence and Simulation. It
does not also work for the external signal source of EXT and ADD.
In the polyphase model, polyphase system, and polyphase output of the Multi-phase model, thesetting is common to all the phases.
Voltage setting limit 1 (in the AC mode, and sine wave or clipped sine wave is selected)
All models
Setting range
Phase voltage setting(effective value)*58
0.1 V to 160.0 V / 0.1 V to 320.0 V
Line voltage setting (single-phase three-wire)
0.2 V to 320.0 V / 0.2 V to 640.0 V
Line voltage setting (three-phase four-wire)
0.2 V to 277.2 V / 0.2 V to 554.2 V
Factory default
Phase voltage setting, 160.0 V / 320.0 V
Resolution
Phase voltage setting: 0.1 V, line voltage setting: 0.2 V*58: The line voltage setting is available only when the output voltage setting is set as the line
voltage and sine wave is selected in the balanced mode of the polyphase model, polyphasesystem, and polyphase output of the Multi-phase model.
Voltage setting limit 2 (other than Voltage setting limit 1, phase voltage setting only) *59
All models
Setting Range
Positive+0.1 V to +227.0 V / +0.1 V to +454.0 V(Peak value)
voltage
Factory+227.0 V / +454.0 V
default
Negative
voltage

Setting Range(Peak value)
Factory
default−227.0 V to −0.1 V / −454.0 V to −0.1 V−227.0 V / −454.0 V

Resolution
0.1 V*59: The limitation is applied to the additional values of the AC voltage setting (recalculated to apeak value) and the DC voltage setting.

Frequency setting limit (the lower limit ≤ the upper limit) *60
All models
Upper limit Setting Range 1.00 Hz (AC mode : 40.00 Hz) to 550.00 Hz
Lower
limit

Factory
default
Setting Range
Factory
default

550.00 Hz
1.00 Hz (AC mode : 40.00 Hz) to 550.00 Hz
1.00 Hz (AC mode : 40.00 Hz)

Resolution
0.01 Hz*60: In the AC mode, the setting range is 40.00 Hz to 550.00 Hz.

286

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

10.15 Remote Sensing

10.15 Remote Sensing
This switches the voltage used for measurement. When the remote sensing is on, the sensing input
terminal voltage is used. When it is off, the output terminal voltage is used.
By combining with AGC or Autocal, a voltage drop due to wiring to the load can be compensated.
When the remote sensing is on, the output voltage detection point corrected by the AGC or
Autocal function is switched to the sensing input terminal. When AGC or Autocal is off, only thedetection voltage used for measurement display is switched.
Effective only for AC-INT, AC-VCA, AC-SYNC, DC-INT, and DC-VCA and when the waveform
is sine wave or DC. It is turned off when the Sequence or Simulation is selected.
However, in case the stand-by state of sequence mode (step 0) effective only for AC-INT,
ACDC-INT and DC-INT and when the waveform is sine wave or DC. Remote sensing cannot be
activated unless either AC voltage or DC voltage setting is 0 V for ACDC-INT. Also, remotesensing is turned off once when you change ACDC mode from AC mode of DC mode even instand-by state. Turn ON it again when you need.

On
Off

Measurement
voltage, power, power factor
Use the sensing input terminal voltage
Use the output terminal voltage

AGC/Autocal
Off
Not active
Not active (factory default)

On
ActiveActive10.16 AGC
When the AGC (Automatic Gain Control) is on, the detection point voltage is always measured,and the output voltage is continuously corrected so that its effective value is equal to the output
voltage setting value. The fluctuation of the detection point voltage can be suppressed even when
the load is fluctuated. The detection point can be switched between the sensing input terminal(remote sensing on) and the output terminal (remote sensing off).
Effective only for AC-INT, AC-VCA, AC-SYNC, DC-INT, and DC-VCA and when the waveform
is sine wave or DC. It is turned off when the Sequence or Simulation is selected. It cannot be
selected when the Autocal is set to on.
Response time
Operation range
Calibration
range
Accuracy

All models
Within 100 ms (typ.)(DC/50 Hz/60 Hz, at the rated output voltage)
The output voltage setting is 8 V or higher
Within ±10 % (difference between the output voltage and measured value)
The output voltage should be within the allowed voltage setting range of the
product.
Within ±0.5 V / ±1.0 V(in the case of DC or 40 Hz to 550 Hz, 50 V or higher output voltage, resistanceload, the output current is the maximum current or less)

DP Series/DP Series Type R

287

10. Specifications

10.17 Autocal (Output Voltage Compensation)
When the Autocal (Automatic Calibration) is on, the detection point voltage is always measured,and the output voltage is continuously corrected so that its effective value is equal to the output
voltage setting value. The ratio (correction factor) of the detection point voltage to the output
voltage setting value is used until the Autocal or the power is turned off. Therefore, the detection
point voltage is not necessarily maintained if the load changes while the Autocal is on. The
detection point can be switched between the sensing input terminal (remote sensing on) and theoutput terminal (remote sensing off).
Unlike the AGC, it cannot follow a load fluctuation because it does not keep track of the voltage.
On the other hand, when the load is stable, it has a merit of short response time on changing theoutput voltage setting.
Effective only for AC-INT, AC-VCA, AC-SYNC, DC-INT, and DC-VCA and when the waveform
is sine wave or DC. It is turned off when the Sequence or Simulation is selected. It cannot be
selected when the AGC is set to on.
However, in case the stand-by state of sequence mode (step 0) effective only for AC-INT,
ACDC-INT and DC-INT and when the waveform is sine wave or DC. Autocal cannot be activatedunless either AC voltage or DC voltage setting is 0 V for ACDC-INT. Also, Autocal is turned off
once when you change ACDC mode from AC mode of DC mode even in stand-by state. Turn ON
it again when you need.
All models
Restriction when on The output voltage setting is 8 V or higher
Calibration range
Within ±10 % (difference between the output voltage and measured value)*61 The output voltage should be within the allowed voltage setting range of the
product.
Accuracy*61 Within ±0.5 V / ±1.0 V(in the case of DC or 40 Hz to 550 Hz, 50 V or higher output voltage,
resistance load, the output current is the maximum current or less)*61: The values of the calibration range and accuracy are the ones at the time when the Autocal isturned on.

288

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

10.18 Sequence

10.18 Sequence
Effective only for AC-INT, ACDC-INT, and DC-INT.
All models
5 (non-volatile)
Maximum 255 (for each sequence)
0.0010 s to 999.9999 s
Constant, Keep, Linear Sweep
Output range
AC/DC mode (The signal source is fixed to INT)(The above 2 items are common within one sequence)
AC phase voltage, frequency, waveform
DC voltage
Start Phase
Stop Phase
Phase angle
Step termination
Jump count (1 to 9999, or infinite)
Specification of the Jump-to step
Synchronous step output (2bit)
Specification of the branch step
Trigger output
Sequence control
Start
Stop
Hold
ResumeBranch 1, Branch 2*62: The output of AC voltage, Frequency and DC voltage of step 0 can be changed on Sequence Edit
View during output ON.
*63: For DC-INT, the AC phase voltage, frequency, waveform, Start Phase, and Stop Phase cannot
be set.
*64: The DC voltage cannot be set in the polyphase model, polyphase system, and polyphase outputof the Multi-phase model.
*65: The Phase angle can be set only in the polyphase model, polyphase system, and polyphase
output of the Multi-phase model. The Start Phase and Stop Phase are specified for the L1 phase,and the component of the Phase angle setting is added to them for the other phases.
Number of memories
Number of steps
Setting range of Step Time
Intra-Step behavior
Parameter*62 *63 *64 *65

DP Series/DP Series Type R289

10. Specifications

10.19 Simulation
This allows you to simulate power line abnormalities, such as blackout, voltage rise, voltage drop,
abrupt phase change, and abrupt frequency change. It can be used only for AC, sine wave, and
ACDC-INT. Note that it does not support IEC or other standards test. When performing the tests
specified by the standards, use appropriate peripheral equipment. In the polyphase model,
polyphase system, and polyphase output of the Multi-phase model, only the balanced mode isavailable.
Number of memories
Number of steps
Setting range of Step TimeParameter

All models
5 (non-volatile)
6 (Initial, Normal 1, Trans 1, Abnormal, Trans 2, Normal 2)
0.0010 s to 999.9999 s (0 s is available only for the Transition Step)
Output range(The above item is common within the Simulation)
AC voltage
Frequency
Waveform (sine wave only)
Start Phase (excluding the Transition Step)
Stop Phase (excluding the Transition Step)
Synchronous step output (2bit)
Trigger output
Repeat count (1 to 9999 times or infinite)

InitialNormal1
定常1

初期Trans1
移行1Abnormal
異常Trans2
移行2Normal2
定常2

Initial初期

Triggersetting example
トリガ設定例

Step
sync 1 output example
ステップ同期1出力例
Stepsync 2 output example
ステップ同期2出力例

Simulation control

290

Start
Stop

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

10.20 Clipped Sine Wave

10.20 Clipped Sine Wave
The peak clipped sine wave can be output, based on the crest factor (CF) setting or the percent
setting to the peak value.
All models
Number of memories
3 (non-volatile)
CF
Variable range
1.10 to 1.41
*66 *67 Factory default
1.41
Setting resolution
0.01
Effective value correction
Yes
Clip ratio
Variable range
40.0 % to 100.0 %*66 *68 Factory default
100.0 %
Setting resolution
0.1 %Effective value correction
None*66: In the polyphase model, polyphase system, and polyphase output of the Multi-phase model,
these are the settings for the phase voltage.
*67: The crest factor is represented as "voltage peak value/voltage effective value." It is 1.41 for sinewave.
*68: When the clip ratio is specified, the peak is clipped by the voltage corresponding to thespecified % to the peak value of the setting voltage (100 %).
Example) For the output voltage setting of 100 Vrms and the clip rate of 80 %, the peak isclipped at 113.1 Vpk.

10.21 Arbitrary Wave
This uses the waveform data saved in the internal memory, which is transferred and recalled using
the external interface or USB memory.
All models
Number of memories
Waveform length
Amplitude resolution

DP Series/DP Series Type R

16 (non-volatile)4096 words
16 bit291

10. Specifications

10.22 External Signal Input
The external signal input works differently depending on the selection of the signal source.

10.22.1 External Synchronous Signal Input (Signal Source SYNC only)This is the signal to synchronize the frequency of the internal signal source with the one of theexternal signal source.
When the signal source is SYNC, you can select whether to synchronize with this external signal
input or the power input frequency of the product. When synchronizing with the power input
frequency, no signal input is needed.
Synchronization signal source switch
Synchronization frequency range
Input terminal
Input impedance
Threshold of input voltage
Minimum pulse width
Nondestructive maximum input voltage

All models
Factory default
External synchronization signal (EXT)LINE
or Power input (LINE)
40 Hz to 500 Hz
BNC connector (rear panel, unbalanced)
1 MΩ
TTL level500 µs±10 V

10.22.2 Voltage Setting Signal Input (Signal Source VCA only)This is the signal to set the output voltage amplitude of the internal signal source (DC input).
Output voltage (Vpk) = Voltage setting signal (Vdc) × Gain (Vpk/Vdc)
Example 1)

For the AC mode, signal source = VCA, the gain of 100.0, and the voltage setting
signal input of 1 Vdc, the output voltage is 100 Vpk.

Example 2)

For the AC mode, signal source = VCA, the gain of 141.4, and the voltage setting
signal input of 1 Vdc, the output voltage is 141.4 Vpk (=100 Vrms).

All models
Factory default
100 V range: 0.0 to 227.0 times
100
200 V range: 0.0 to 454.0 times
200
Setting resolution*69 0.1
Gain accuracy*70 ±5 %Input terminal
BNC connector (rear panel, unbalanced)
Also used as the external synchronization signal input
Input impedance
1 MΩ
Input voltage range±2.2 V (A/D resolution 10 bit)
Nondestructive maximum input voltage±10 V*69: In the polyphase model, polyphase system, and polyphase output of the Multi-phase model, thesetting is common to all the phases.
*70: DC or 45 Hz to 65 Hz, the gain is the factory default, the rated output voltage, no load.
Gain setting range

292

*69

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

10.23 General Function

10.22.3 External Signal Input (only EXT and ADD)
This multiplies the input signal by the specified gain and outputs it. For ADD, the internal signal
source is added.
EXT: Output voltage (V) = External signal input (V) × Gain (V/V)
ADD: Output voltage (V) = External signal input (V) × Gain (V/V)+ Internal signal source setting (V)Setting Range for gain
Setting resolution
Gain accuracy
Input-output phase
Input terminal

Specification *71
Factory default
100 V range: 0.0 to 227.0 times
100
200 V range: 0.0 to 454.0 times
200
0.1*72 ±5 %In-phase
BNC connector (rear panel, unbalanced)
Also used as the external synchronization signal input
1 MΩ±2.2 V (A/D resolution 10 bit)

Input impedance
Input voltage range
Nondestructive
maximum input voltage
Input frequency range
*71:
*72:

±10 V

DC to 550 Hz (sine wave)
DC to 100 Hz (other than sine wave)
Not available for the polyphase model. It cannot be used for the polyphase system or polyphase
output of the Multi-phase.
DC or 45 Hz to 65 Hz, the gain is the factory default, the rated output voltage, no load.

10.23 General Function
LCD display Contrast
setting
Color
Beep (key operation,erroneous operation)
Key lock
Output relay control

Output setting
at power-on
Trigger output setting
Time unit setting for
Sequence and Simulation
Reset function

DP Series/DP Series Type R

Description
0 to 99
Blue tone or white tone
On or Off
Alarms on abnormal situation regardless of the setting
On or Off
On: Only key lock-off and output-off are available
Enable: The output relay is used to turn the output
on/offDisable: The output relay is not used. High impedance
to turn the output off
On or Off
On: Output on after power-on
Polarity: positiveor negative
Pulse width: 0.1 ms to 10 ms (resolution 0.1 ms)

Factory default

Negative
10 ms

ms or ss

Blue tone
On
Off
EnableOff

Resets the items stored in the System Setting Memory (excluding theexternal interface setting and external control setting) and the items thatare to be reset at power-on, to the factory default settings.

29310. Specifications

10.24 Memory Function
You can save basic settings (AC/DC mode, signal source, output range, AC setting, DC setting,current limiter, setting range limit, etc.) for each output phase configuration in the non-volatile
Basic Setting Memory of No.1 to No.30, and recall them to use when the output is off. The No.1
setting is restored at power-on. The No.0 setting includes the setting items for the factory default.
The external control, display, and other settings are saved in non-volatile System Setting Memory
when they are changed by the panel operation or remote command.
The Sequence, Simulation, clipped sine wave, and arbitrary wave are saved in their own
non-volatile memories.
Items in the Basic Setting Memory *73
Factory default
100 V range
AC mode
INT
LINE
0V
50 Hz
Sine wave
0.0°
Phase voltage
Single-phase three-wire: 180°
Three-phase four-wire: 120°, 240°
Balanced/Unbalanced
Balanced
DC voltage setting
0V
Current limiterSee 10.13
Setting range limit
See 10.14
External input gain
100 / 200
*73: Some items do not exist depending on the AC/DC mode or signal source.
Output range
AC/DC mode
Signal source
External synchronization signal (LINE or EXT)
AC voltage setting
Frequency
Output waveform
Output on phase and output off phase
Phase voltage/Line voltage setting selection
Phase angle setting

Items in the System Setting Memory
Output function
DC offset setting
Measurement display mode
Measurement unit selection
Power unit energization setting
Remote sensing
AGC
General function
Monitor output target
External interface
External control

294

Factory default
Continuous
0 mV
Normal Viewrms
All enabled (energization)
Off
Off
See 10.23 (excluding the time unit setting of theStep Time for the Sequence and Simulation)
Current (L1 phase)USB
Disabled

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

10.25 Self-diagnosis/Protection Function

10.25 Self-diagnosis/Protection Function
At power-on
ROM check
RAM check
Basic setting Memory check
System Setting Memory check
Waveform Memory check
Sequence Memory check
Simulation Memory check
Adjustment value memory check
Version check
System configuration check

Description
Checks the internal ROM.
Checks the internal RAM.
Checks the Basic Setting Memory.
Checks the System Setting Memory.
Checks the Waveform Memory.
Checks the Sequence Memory.
Checks the Simulation Memory.
Checks the adjustment data memory.
Checks the version of the internal software.
Checks the polyphase system.

While energizing
Abnormal output

Description
Turns off the panel display and output when an output overvoltage
or overcurrent is detected.
Turns off the panel display and output when a power unit error is
detected.
Turns off the panel display and output when an internal
communication or other error is detected. Also stops all theoperations excluding power-off.

Power unit error
Internal control error

10.26 External Control Function
The following functions can be selected.
Item
DisableEnableDevCtrl

Description
Disable the control input of the CONTROL I/O. The status output signal is output.
（See 10.26.1）
Enable the CONTROL I/O.（See 10.26.2）
You can control DIP.（See 10.26.2）

DP Series/DP Series Type R

295

10. Specifications

10.26.1 CONTROL I/OWhen you enabled the external control from the menu, you can control this product by using theexternal signal (or non voltage contact). The state output is always on. The detection and stateswitching is done at 10 ms-cycle. If the Remote state is achieved by the external interface, acontrol input is ignored.
It is not available to use 10.26.2 at the same time.
Item
Control
input

State
outputExternal control input
Input level
Nondestructive maximum input
Input impedanceControl Output Off
Output On
Sequence start/resume*75
Stop of sequence*75
Sequence is in the Hold status
Sequence branch 1
Sequence branch 2
Memory recall (+ compile) *76
Memory specification 1
Memory specification 2
Clear the current peak-hold value
Output level
Output impedance
Polarity*78
StatusPower On/Off
Output On/Off*
Protection operation*
Limiter operation*
AGC/Autocal setting state*
Software busy*

Description

Factory
default

Enabled or Disabled
TTL*74+10 V / −5 V
Pull-up to +5 V via 47 kΩ
Falling Off
Falling On
Falling Start
Falling Stop
Falling Hold
Falling Branch start
Falling Branch start
Falling Recall
Specify 0 to 3
(Equivalent to memory 1 to 4, respectively)
Falling Clear
TTL
*77
220 Ω
Positive or Negative
Negative
Low: Off, High: On
Low: On, High: Off (Negative)
Low: Off, High: On (Positive)
Low: Active, High: None (Negative)
Low: None, High: Active (Positive)
Low: Active, High: None (Negative)
Low: None, High: Active (Positive)
Low: On, High: Off (Negative)
Low: Off, High: On (Positive)
Low: Busy, High: Ready (Negative)
Low: Ready, High: Busy (Positive)
Low: 200 V, High: 100 V

Output range
Sequence operation
Step sync 1*75
High level or Low level
Sequence operation
Step sync 2*75
Trigger
Positiveor Negative
Terminal D-sub 25-pin multi-connector (rear panel, female, M2.6 screw)*74: Low: 0.8 V or lower, High: 2.6 V or higher, the chassis potential.
*75: Sequence start and stop of the control input are effective for the Simulation as well. Also, step
sync output 1 and 2 of the control output are effective for the Simulation as well.
*76: The memory recall input of the control input recalls the setting memory for the Normal(Continuous), the Sequence Memory for the Sequence, and the Simulation Memory for the
Simulation. For the Sequence and Simulation, the compile data is also included.
*77: Low: 0.4 V or lower, High: 2.7 V or higher, the chassis potential.
*78: Polarity reverse (collective) is available only for the state with *.

296

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

10.27 External Interface

10.26.2 Control of Peripherals by Device Control
You can control DIP.
Set external control function to DevCtrl and connect between CONTROL I/O connector of thisproduct and CONTROL SIGNAL connector and QUICK CHANGE SYNC INPUT connector of
DIP with the attached cable of DIP. The quick change sync signal is output from this product.
It is not available to use 10.26.1 at the same time.

10.27 External Interface
This is the interface to control the product from an external computer. The RS232 and USB
interfaces are provided by default, and either GPIB or LAN interface can be chosen when ordering.
(Both GPIB and LAN cannot be chosen.)
The command language is compliant with the SCPI Specification Version 1999.0. (Factory default
is USB).
USB interface (USB1.1) *79
Item
Description
Device class
USBTMCID
Already assigned for each device
Terminator“LF”*79: The use of USB hub may cause a communication failure. It is recommended to use afully-shielded, short cable.
RS232 interface *80 *81
Item
Description or Selection
Terminal
D-sub 9-pin (male, UNC #4-40 screw)
Baud rate
9600 / 19200
Terminator“CR” “LF” / “CR” / “LF”
ParityNone/Odd/Even
Stop bit
1/2
Data bit
7/8
Flow control
None/Hardware/Software*80: Binary transmission is not supported.
*81: Use a cross cable.

Factory default
9600 bps“CR” “LF”
None
1 bit
8 bit
None

GPIB interface (IEEE488.1 std 1987) *82 *83
Item
Description or Selection
Address
0 to 30
2
Terminator“LF”*82: Binary transmission is not supported.
*83: Query for the main unit status byte using a serial poll is not supported.
LAN interface (IEEE802.3, LXI 1.4 Core 2011) *84
Item
Description or Selection
Terminal
RJ-45 modular jackTransmission method
Ethernet(100BASE-TX / 10BASE-T)
Communication protocol
SCPI-RAW
Terminator“LF”
IP address setting
Auto, Fixed*84：Binary transmission is not supported.

DP Series/DP Series Type R

Factory default

Factory default

Auto

297

10. Specifications

10.28 USB Memory Interface
Commercial USB memory sticks can be used.
Description
USB 1.1 or USB 2.0-compliant product
USB-A (front panel)
FAT32
Basic Setting Memory, Sequence, Simulation, arbitrary wave
Create dedicated directory, rename, load, and save
2-byte characters (Japanese, etc.) are not supported.
*85: We do not guarantee that all USB memories can be operational with this product.
*86: The time stamp recorded on a file is different from the actual date and time.

Available memory*85
Connector
FormatWritable/readable contents
File operation*86

10.29 Waveform Monitor Output
This can monitor the waveform of the output voltage or current. (only one terminal)
DP series

Single-phase model, Polyphase model, Multi-phase model
015S,030D,045T, 030S,060D,090T,
045S,
060S,
045M (polyphase
090M (polyphase
045M
090D, 120D(single-phase
output)output)output)DP series Type R
Monitored
Gain
Phase
voltage

015RS,030RD,
030RS,060RD,
045RS
045RT
090RT
Output phase voltage or output phase current (switched)1
1/
200 400

Phase
1 1
1 1
/
/
current
100 50*87 50 25
Accuracy*88 ±5 %Output terminal
BNC connector (rear panel, unbalanced)
Output impedance 600 Ω

DP series
DP series Type R
Monitored
Gain
Phase
voltage

1 1/
150 75060RS,090RD

1
1/
200 100

Single-phase model and Single-phase output of Multi-phase model
075S
090S, 090M
105S
120S
075RS
090RS
Output phase voltage or output phase current (switched)1
1/
200 400

Phase
1
1
1
1
/
/
current
400 200*87 300 150
Accuracy*88 ±5 %Output terminal
BNC connector (rear panel, unbalanced)
Output impedance 600 Ω*87: If you increased or decreased the number of units by the power unit energization setting, thegain corresponding to the capacity is used for the current monitor. (Example: In the case that
only 3 units operate in 6 kVA model, the current gain of 4.5 kVA model is used. However, in
7.5 kVA or higher model, the current gain of 6.0 kVA model is used for 4.5 kVA output, and theone of 3.0 kVA model is used for 1.5 kVA output.)*88: No load on the monitor output, the rated output voltage, the resistance load at the maximum
current.

298

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

10.30 Safety, EMC, and RoHS

10.30 Safety, EMC, and RoHS
DP series Type R is excluded. Only in the case that power input single-phase and GPIB interface
selected.
Description*89 Compliant with the following standard requirement.
EN 61010-1
Pollution Degree 2
EMC*89 *90 *91 Compliant with the following standard requirement.
EN 61326-1 (Group 1, Class A)
RoHS*89 *92 Compliant with the following.
Directive 2011/65/EU*89: Only Models with a CE Marking on the Rear Panel.
*90: Current limiter operation or indication malfunction of LEDs or measured values may occur if
the DP series is exposed to a strong radiated radio frequency electromagnetic field or a strong
radio frequency conducted disturbance.
*91: Electromagnetic emissions from this product may interfere with reception of radio andtelevision broadcasts. Unless the user takes special measures to reduce electromagnetic
emissions, using this product in a residential area must be avoided.
*92: For compliant manufacturing lot, please contact us or our agent.
Safety10.31 Operation Environment
All models
Indoor, Pollution Degree 22000 m or lower
0 °C to +50 °C, 5 % to 85 %RH
The absolute humidity should be 1 to 25 g/m3, without dew condensation.
On some specifications, the temperature range limit is stricter.
−10 °C to +60 °C, 5 % to 95 %RH
The absolute humidity should be 1 to 29 g/m3, without dew condensation.

Operation Environment
AltitudeOperating temperature/humidity
Storage temperature/humidity

Figure 10-2 shows the ranges of the ambient temperature and the humidity.
%RH
90

Storage
保管80

動作
Operation

70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
-10

0

10

20

30

40

50

60 ℃

Figure 10-2 Range of Ambient Temperature/Humidity

DP Series/DP Series Type R

299

10. Specifications

10.32 Externals, Weight, and Terminal BlockSingle-phase model, Polyphase model
DP series
Dimensions (W×H×D)(Excluding projections)
WeightPower input terminal (rear)
Output terminal (rear)
Outlet(Only for the single-phasemodel)(Front, 15 Amax)
Sensing input terminal (rear)

015S

030S,030D

045S, 045T

430×398×562 mm

060S, 060D

430×665×562 mm

38 kg approx. 50 kg approx. 70 kg approx. 82 kg approx.
Single-phase, three-phase three-wire, three-phase four-wire input:
M6 screw
M6 screw
For Japan/North America (NEMA 5-15, 100 V range only)
Or for Europe (CEE 7)
M4 screw
Single-phase model, Polyphase model

DP series
Dimensions (W×H×D)(Excluding projections)
WeightPower input terminal (rear)
Output terminal (rear)

075S

090S,090D,090T

430×1021×562 mm

105S

120S, 120D

430×1287×562 mm

110 kg approx. 125 kg approx. 140 kg approx. 155 kg approx.
Single-phase input: M8 upset bolt
Three-phase three-wire, three-phase four-wire input: M6 screw
Single-phase model: M8 upset bolt
Polyphase model: M6 screw

OutletFor Japan/North America (NEMA 5-15, 100 V range only)(Only for the single-phase model)
Or for Europe (CEE 7)(Front, 15 Amax)
Sensing input terminal (rear)M4 screw
Multi-phase model
DP series
Dimensions (W×H×D)(Excluding projections)
WeightPower input terminal (rear)Single-phase Output terminal(rear)Polyphase Output terminal (rear)
Sensing input terminal (rear)

300

045M

090M

430×665×562 mm

430×1287×562 mm

75 kg approx.

130 kg approx.
Single-phase input:
M8 upset bolt
Three-phase three-wire,
three-phase four-wire input:
M6 screw

Single-phase,
three-phase three-wire,
three-phase four-wire input:
M6 screw
M6 screw

M8 screw

M6 screwM4 screw

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

10.32 Externals, Weight, and Terminal BlockSingle-phase model, Polyphase model
DP series Type R
Dimensions (W×H×D)(Excluding projections)
WeightPower input terminal (rear)

015RS

030RS, 030RD

430×398×562 mm

430×665×562 mm

045RS, 045RT

50 kg approx.
80 kg approx.
90 kg approx.
Single-phase, three-phase three-wire, three-phase four-wire input:
M6 screw
M6 screw

Output terminal (rear)
OutletFor Japan/North America (NEMA 5-15, 100 V range only)(Only for the single-phase model)
Or for Europe (CEE 7)(Front, 15 Amax)
Sensing input terminal (rear)M4 screw

DP series Type R
Dimensions (W×H×D)(Excluding projections)
WeightPower input terminal (rear)

Output terminal (rear)Single-phase model, Polyphase model
090RS,090RD,
075RS
060RS，060RD
090RT
430×1021×562 mm

430×1287×562 mm

130 kg approx.
Single-phase,

150 kg approx.
170 kg approx.
Single-phase input:
M8 upset bolt
three-phase three-wire,
three-phase four-wireThree-phase three-wire,
input:
three-phase four-wire input:
M6 screw
M6 screw
Single-phase model: M8 upset bolt
Polyphase model: M6 screw

OutletFor Japan/North America (NEMA 5-15, 100 V range only)(Only for the single-phase model)
Or for Europe (CEE 7)(Front, 15 Amax)
Sensing input terminal (rear)M4 screw

DP Series/DP Series Type R

301

10. Specifications

10.33 Option
Option nameRemote Controller
DP008
System Cable (1P3W)
PA-001-1720
System Cable (3P4W)
PA-001-1721
Rack-Mount Adapter
EIA (inch)
PA-001-1728 (Type1)
PA-001-1729 (Type2)
PA-001-1730 (Type3)
PA-001-1731 (Type4)
JIS (mm)PA-001-1732 (Type1)
PA-001-1733 (Type2)
PA-001-1734 (Type3)
PA-001-1735 (Type4)
Replacement Air Filter
PA-001-1736 (grill 1)
PA-001-1737 (grill 2)Power Cable (3 m)
PA-001-3251
PA-001-3252
PA-001-3253
PA-001-3254
PA-001-3255
PA-001-3256
PA-001-3257
PA-001-3263
PA-001-3264
Cable Holder
PA-001-3245
PA-001-3246
PA-001-3247
PA-001-3248
PA-001-3249

302

Description
Multifunctional remote controller with numeric
keypad and jog shuttle.
Allows you to configure the Single-phase
three-wire system by using two of theconfigurable single-phase models.
Allows you to configure the Three-phasesystem by using three of the configurable
single-phase models.

The rack-mount adapter is a set of brackets
used to mount the product on the EIA or JIS
standard compliant rack. Provided for eachcabinet size.

Remarks
On order andafter purchase
On order andafter purchase
On order andafter purchase

On order andafter purchase

Replacement air filters. Two types, double On order andfilters.
after purchase

Cables for the power input.
Please refer to the correspondence table.

On order andafter purchase

Allows you to fix power cables and/or output
On order andcables by mounting it to this product.
after purchase
Please refer to the correspondence table.

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

10.33 Option

Correspondence table of air filter

Front grill 1

Front grill 2

Replacement Air Filter grill1

Replacement Air Filter grill2

Correspondence table of power cable
Single-phase model, Polyphase model, Multi-phase model
DP series
045S,
030S,
060S,
015S
045T,
030D
060D
045M
DP series Type R
030RS,
045RS,
060RS,
015RS
030RD
045RT
060RD
Single-phase input
060S,060D
PA-001-3247
PA-001-3251
PA-001-3252
060RS,060RD
PA-001-3249
Three-phase
PA-001-3255
PA-001-3256
three-wire input
Three-phase
PA-001-3263
four-wire input

DP series
DP series Type R
Single-phase input
Three-phase
three-wire input
Three-phasefour-wire input

Single-phase model, Polyphase model, Multi-phase model
090S,090D,
075S
105S
120S,120D
090T,090M
090RS,090RD,
075RS
090RT
PA-001-3253
PA-001-3254
PA-001-3256

PA-001-3257

PA-001-3264

DP Series/DP Series Type R

303

10. Specifications

Correspondence table of cable holder
Power input side
DP series
DP series Type R
Single-phase input
Three-phase
three-wire input
Three-phasefour-wire input

DP series
DP series Type R
Single-phase input
Three-phase
three-wire input
Three-phasefour-wire input

Single-phase model, Polyphase model, Multi-phase model
045S,
030S,
060S,
015S
045T,
030D
060D
045M
030RS,
045RS,
060RS,
015RS
030RD
045RT
060RD
PA-001-3246
PA-001-3247
PA-001-3245

PA-001-3249

PA-001-3245
Single-phase model, Polyphase model, Multi-phase model
090S,090D,
075S
105S
120S,120D
090T,090M
090RS,090RD,
075RS
090RT
PA-001-3248
PA-001-3249

Output side
DP series
DP series Type R
Output015S,030S,030D,
060D,045T,090T
015RS,030RS,
030RD,060RD,
045RT,090RT
PA-001-3245

Single-phase model, Polyphase model
045S,060S,090D,
075S,090S,105S,
120D
120S
045RS,060RS,
090RD
PA-001-3249

075RS,090RS
PA-001-3248

Multi-phase model
DP series
Single-phase
outputPolyphase output

304

045M
PA-001-3249

090M
PA-001-3248

PA-001-3245

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

10.34 Outline Dimensional Drawing

10.34 Outline Dimensional Drawing
The outlet of the single-phase model and the phase configuration setting switch of the multi-phaseare omitted.
The rear I/O terminal panel of the multi-phase consists of the upper and lower sections. (Upper:
polyphase output terminal, Lower: power input terminal, sensing input terminal, single-phase output

Cable holder(Option)Front View

Side View

Rear View

terminal)

Figure 10-3 DP015S, DP030S, DP030D, DP015RS (Type 1 cabinet)

DP Series/DP Series Type R305

Front View

Side View

Cable holder(Option)Rear View

10. Specifications

Figure 10-4 DP045S, DP045T, DP045M, DP060S, DP060D,
DP030RS, DP030RD, DP045RS, DP045RT(Type 2 cabinet)
306

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCEFront View

Side View

Cable holder(Option)Rear View

10.34 Outline Dimensional Drawing

Figure 10-5 DP075S, DP090S, DP090D, DP090T,
DP060RS, DP060RD(Type 3 cabinet)
DP Series/DP Series Type R

307

Front View

Side View

Cable holder(Option)Rear View

10. Specifications

Figure 10-6 DP090M, DP105S, DP120S, DP120D,
DP075RS, DP090RS, DP090RD, DP090RT(Type 4 cabinet)

308

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE

10.34 Outline Dimensional Drawing

Cable holder (Option)

Plan View (Stabilizer Attached)

4 in allFront View (Stabilizer Attached)

Cable holder (Option)

Side View (Stabilizer Attached)

Rear View (Stabilizer Attached)

Figure 10-7 Stabilizer Installation Drawing (Type 3, Type 4 cabinet only)

DP Series/DP Series Type R309

 Index 

１
100 V range ............................................................... 58

２200 V range ............................................................... 58

busy ......................................................................... 219

Ｃcable holder ........................................... 19, 23, 43, 244
calibration ................................................................. 37
CANCEL key ................................................ 44, 45, 51
caster ............................................................. 16, 41, 43
CF ............................................................. 67, 149, 220Ａcharacter string entry box .......................................... 53
circuit breaker ........................................................... 24

AC coupling .............................................................. 55

clip ratio .................................................................. 147

AC mode ................................................................... 55

clipped sine wave .................................................... 147

AC output ................................................................ 271

compile ........................................................... 101, 130

AC/DC mode ............................................................. 55

component name ....................................................... 40

accessories ................................................................ 10

Const ......................................................................... 88

ACDC mode .............................................................. 55

Continuous function .......................................... 55, 222

active power .............................................................. 66

CONTROL I/O connector ......................................... 43

ACV .......................................................................... 61

control panel ....................................................... 33, 41

ADD .................................................................. 55, 202

crest factor ........................................................ 67, 147

Adjuster Foot ...................................................... 13, 41
AGC ................................................................ 176, 219
air filter ........................................................... 242, 262
air outlet .................................................................... 43
Amplifying the External Signal Input ...................... 202
apparent power .......................................................... 66
arbitrary waveform .................................................. 150
Arbitrary Waveform Memory .................................. 163
arrow key .................................................................. 45
asynchronous ................................................... 200, 219

Ｄdata list box ............................................................... 50
DC coupling .............................................................. 55
DC mode ................................................................... 55
DC offset ................................................................. 183
DC output ................................................................ 275
DCV .......................................................................... 61

Autocal ............................................................ 179, 219
AVG .......................................................................... 68

Ｂbalanced mode ........................................................... 62
Basic Setting Memory ..................................... 156, 224
beep ................................................................. 210, 225
branch step ................................................................ 90

310

Ｅ
eject operation ......................................................... 170
emission CO2 calculator ......................................... 206
ENTER key ............................................................... 45
error ID ................................................................... 248
ERROR LED ............................................................. 44
error message .................................................. 248, 251

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCEEXT .................................................................. 55, 202

Ipk-Hold .................................................... 66, 147, 220

Ext Control .............................................. 195, 199, 225
external control function ................................. 192, 225
external signal input ................................................ 202
external signal input connector .................. 43, 189, 202
ExtOut Pol ....................................................... 196, 225

Ｊ
Jog ............................................................................. 45
Jump count ................................................................ 90
Jump-to step .............................................................. 89

Ｆ
F ........................................................................ 67, 220
F key ......................................................................... 44
factory default setting .............................................. 212
firmware version ..................................................... 265

Ｋ
Keep .......................................................................... 88
key lock ........................................................... 210, 219

frequency .................................................................. 64
frequency setting range limit ..................................... 83

Ｌfront grill ........................................................... 41, 262
front grill holder ................................................ 41, 263

LAN ........................................................................ 235
LAN connector .......................................................... 43

Ｇ
GPIB ....................................................................... 233
GPIB connector ......................................................... 43

LCD .......................................................... 44, 211, 225
LIMIT LED ............................................................... 44
limiter ........................................................................ 78
limiting action ......................................................... 250
line voltage ................................................................ 63
line voltage display ................................................... 74

Ｈ
harmonic current ............................................. 143, 144

Ｉ

Local state ............................................................... 237

Ｍmeasured value area ........................................ 218, 220
measurement function ............................................... 66

I ......................................................................... 66, 220

measuring mode ........................................................ 68

I key .......................................................................... 45

Memory function ..................................................... 155

Iavg ................................................................... 66, 220

MEMORY key .................................................. 44, 155

Imax .................................................................. 66, 220

Memory View ......................................................... 155

Imin ................................................................... 66, 220

menu composition ................................................... 222

Information ..................................................... 225, 266

MENU key .......................................................... 44, 49

Initial Step ............................................................... 119

model naming system .................................................. 2

inrush current .......................................................... 145

Monitor ........................................................... 171, 225

installation environment ............................................ 11

Monitor function ..................................................... 170

INT............................................................................ 55

monitor output connector .......................................... 43

Intra-Step parameter .......................................... 87, 120

Multi-phase model .......................................... 2, 28, 46

DP Series/DP Series Type R

311

Ｎ
Normal View ............................................................. 69
numeric keypad ................................................... 45, 52
numerical entry box ................................................... 51

power cable ....................................................... 18, 243
power factor ...................................................... 67, 220
power input terminal ........................................... 18, 43
power on/off .............................................................. 45
power switch ............................................................. 41
power unit energization setting...........48, 208, 219, 249
protection type ........................................................ 248

Ｏ

PU-ON ............................................. 208, 225, 248, 249
PwOn Mode .............................................114, 141, 225

off phase .................................................................... 64

PwON Output .................................................. 206, 225

on phase .................................................................... 64
operation check ......................................................... 34
options .................................................................... 239
outlet ................................................................... 24, 41
output current peak-hold function ........................... 146

Ｑ
Q ....................................................................... 67, 220

output current peak-hold value .................... 66, 72, 146
output display area .................................................. 218

Ｒoutput function .......................................................... 49
OUTPUT key ............................................................ 44

rack-mount adapter .................................................. 241

OUTPUT LED .......................................................... 44

RANGE key .............................................................. 44

output mode ............................................................ 218

rated power icon ................................................ 48, 219

output off........................................................... 65, 250

reactive power ........................................................... 67

output phase configuration ...................................... 218

Relay Cntrl ...................................................... 204, 225

output range ...................................................... 58, 218

Remote ..................................... 225, 229, 231, 233, 235

output relay control ................................................. 203

remote controller ............................................... 41, 240

output setting display area ....................................... 221

Remote sensing function ......................................... 173

output terminal .................................................... 22, 43

Remote state ............................................................ 237

output voltage............................................................ 61

Repeat ..................................................................... 122

output-on at power-on setting ............................ 47, 205

reset ......................................................... 212, 215, 225
RMS .......................................................................... 68

Ｐ
P ........................................................................ 66, 220

RMS current limiter .......................................... 80, 219
RS232 ..................................................................... 231
RS232 connector ....................................................... 43

Peak .......................................................................... 68
peak current limiter ........................................... 78, 219

Ｓ

PF ...................................................................... 67, 220phase configuration setting switch ............ 2, 35, 41, 46

S ........................................................................ 66, 220phase current ............................................... 66, 74, 220

screen title ....................................................... 218, 248

phase voltage ....................................... 62, 74, 185, 220

selection box ............................................................. 49

polyphase output terminal ................................... 28, 43

sensing input terminal ....................................... 43, 173

polyphase system .......................................... 2, 29, 240

Sequence Control View ................................... 101, 115

312

PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCESequence Edit View .......................................... 94, 115

System menu ........................................................... 225

Sequence function ............................................. 86, 223
Sequence Memory ............................................. 97, 167
SHIFT key ........................................................... 45, 54
SHIFT LED ......................................................... 45, 54
Shift state .................................................................. 54
Shortcut operations.................................................... 54
Shuttle ....................................................................... 45
signal source ............................................................. 55
Simple View .............................................................. 69

Ｔthree-phase .................................................... 26, 29, 62
Transition Step ........................................................ 119
Transition to ............................................................ 125
Trig Out .............................................91, 121, 197, 225
trigger output ..................................................... 91, 121

Simulation Control View ................................. 130, 142
Simulation Edit View ...................................... 130, 142

Ｕ

Simulation function ......................................... 118, 224
Simulation Memory ................................................. 168

unbalanced mode ..................................................... 185

single-phase ........................................................ 23, 61

USB Communication............................................... 228

single-phase output terminal................................ 28, 43

USB connector .......................................................... 43

single-phase three-wire ................................. 26, 29, 62

USB Eject ....................................................... 170, 225

Soft-key ............................................................... 44, 50

USB ID ................................................................... 230

soft-key function ..................................................... 218

USB memory ........................................................... 169

Start Phase......................................................... 91, 121

USB memory connector ............................................ 41

status icon ....................................................... 218, 219

USBTMC ................................................................ 228

Step Behavior ............................................................ 88
Step parameter ........................................................ 119
Step sync code output ........................................ 90, 121
step termination ......................................................... 90
Step Time .......................................................... 89, 120
step-control parameter ....................................... 87, 120
Stop Phase ......................................................... 91, 121
storage ..................................................................... 265
SV ................................................................... 175, 220
SVavg ...................................................................... 220
SVmax .................................................................... 220
SVmin ..................................................................... 220

ＶV ....................................................................... 66, 220
V key ......................................................................... 44
Vavg .................................................................. 66, 220
VCA .......................................................................... 55
VISA ....................................................................... 228
Vmax ................................................................. 66, 220
Vmin ................................................................. 66, 220voltage setting range limit ......................................... 82

sweep ........................................................................ 88
SYNC ................................................................ 55, 200Ｗsynchronization ............................................... 200, 219
synchronization frequency ......................................... 67

wattage limiter .................................................. 85, 219

System Cable .................................................... 29, 240

waveform .................................................................. 59

SYSTEM I/O connector ............................................ 43

window.................................................................... 218

System Lock ............................................................ 250

DP Series/DP Series Type R

313

ーーーー WARRANTY ーーーー
NF Corporation certifies that this product was thoroughly tested and inspected and found tomeet its published specifications when it was shipped from our factory. In the unlikely eventthat you experience an issue during use, please contact our company or agency of ourcompany from which you purchased the product.
All NF products are warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of
one year from the date of shipment. During the warranty period, NF will repair the defective
product without any charge for the parts and labor.
For repair service under warranty, the product must be returned to either NF or an agent
designated by NF. The Purchaser shall prepay all shipping cost, duties and taxes for the
product to NF from another country, and NF shall pay shipping charges to return the product tothe purchaser.
This warranty shall not apply when corresponding to following particulars.
A) Failure caused by improper handling or use of the product in a manner that does notconform with the provisions of the Instruction Manual.
B) Failure or damage caused by transport, dropping, or other handling of the productafter purchase.
C) Failure caused by repair, adjustment, or modification of the product by a company,
organization, or individual not approved by NF.
D) Failure caused by abnormal voltage or the influence of equipment connected to thisproduct.
E) Failure caused by the influence of supply parts from the customer.
F) Failure caused by such as corrosion that originate in the use of causticity gas,organic solvent, and chemical.
G) Failure caused by the insect or small animal that invaded from the outside.
H) Failure or damage caused by fire, earthquakes, flood damage, lightning, war, or otheruncontrollable accident.
I) Failure caused by the reason that was not able to be foreseen by the science andtechnology level when shipped from our company.
J) Replacement and replenishment of consumables such as batteries.

NF Corporation

WABUN: (DA00027762)

If there are any misplaced or missing pages, we will replace the manual. Contact thesales representative.

NOTES• Reproduction of the contents of this manual is forbidden by applicable laws.
• The contents of this manual may be revised without notice.
• Information provided in this manual is intended to be accurate and reliable. However,
we assume no responsibility for any damage regarding the contents of this manual.
• We assume no responsibility for influences resulting from the operations in thismanual.
©Copyright 2010-2022, NF Corporation

Programmable AC Power Source
DP Series/DP Series Type R
Instruction Manual

NF Corporation
6-3-20, Tsunashima Higashi, Kohoku-ku, Yokohama
223-8508 JAPAN
Phone +81-45-545-8111 Fax +81-45-545-8191

http://www.nfcorp.co.jp/

NF Corporation
6-3-20, Tsunashima Higashi, Kohoku-ku, Yokohama 223-8508 JAPAN